TSD 2859

"'O
C
(tJ
w
O'.)
C Contents
C:
-
"'O
Q,)
C
\...
a... General Information
CHAPTER
A
Special Processes B
Air Conditioning C
Lubrication and Maintenance D
Engine E
Propeller Shaft and Universal Joints F

N
r-,..
O')
,--
Hydraulics G
>
\...
(tJ
::,
'-
.0
Q,)
Sub-frames and Suspension H
u..
Final Drive J
Fuel System and Carburetters K
Engine Cooling System L
Electrical System M
Power Assisted Steering N

O')
LO
CX)
N Torque Tightness Figures p
d
Cl)
i-,: Exhaust System Q
00 Wheels and Tyres R

oe::t"
co
~
Body s
The name Bentley is registered trademark of
Bentley Motors Limited© 2005.
The name Rolls Royce is a registered trademark of

Rolls Royce plc.
All material enclosed in this publication was accwate at original publication.

Please refer to your authorised Bentley dealership for any update/changes.
Originally printed in 1966
TSD Publication 2859 (Vol I)

Published by:-
Bentley Motors Limited.
Re-printed by Elanders Hindson Limited, England.

CHAPTER A
GENERAL INFORMATION
. . . . .
~
ROLLS•ROVCE SILVER SHADOW

;..
AND BENTLEV T SERJES ,.SERVICE BULLETI
No. SY/A4
Circulation - All European
Distributors and Retailors
except U.K.
CA.TF.GORY C
HIGH-SPEED ROOOHNESS AND NOISE
INTRODU::TIOO
A number of canplaints have been received of roughness and noise when travelling
at varying speeds. The roughness and noise can be caused by a number of different
features and this Service Bulletin is issued to describe these features and the
action to be taken by Service Personnel in the event of a custaner ccmplaint.
A brief description of the characteristics of.the noises and the necessary

procedures to effect a cure are as follows.
!
l
0
1 1. ROAD WHEEL VIBRATION
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T series cars.
DESCRIPTIOO
Out-of-balance road wheels are by far the most comnon cause of high-speed roughness.
This being soJ before attempting to cure roughness of any kind it is most .important
to ensure that the road wheels are correctly balaneed.
IMPORTANT
When it is necessary to balance the road wheels the following procedure should be
applied.
1. Run the car on the road until the tyres are warm and naturally roW1d. This
will take approximately 20 kms. (12 miles) to achieve 1 dependent upon local
conditions.
2. As soon as the car enters the garage remove the road wheels, before flats
on the tyre are fonned. Then balance the road wheels in the normal way.
This procedure also applies if an on-the-car balancing machine is

used. In this case the wheels should be raised off the ground as soon as
Continued •••
./ ROLLS-ROVCE LIMITED, PVM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/BP 22.8.68 A
-===================:::::::=====================---======================
ROLLS-ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES
- 2 - No. SY/A4
the car enters the garage after running on the road. Then, and only
then, should the wheels be balanced whilst on the car.
It is also important to note that the wheel and tyre units should
run as true as p.ossible and to achieve this the correct fitting procedure
as given in Service Bulletin SY/R.1 should be observed.
2. COOLANT FAN NOISE

APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T series cars fitted with the
refrigeration system and produced after car number 3000.
DESCRIPTIOO
This noise is in the fonn of a constant boaning roar which is heard fran
105 k.p.h. (65 rn.p.h.) upwards. On some cars the roar can be heard as a
heterodyne at speeds between 115 k.p.h. and 130 k.p.h. (70 m.p.h. and 78
m.p.h.) which then develops into a constant.:.roar as higher speeds are attained.
ACTICN
A viscous drive fan assembly is now available for service use which ca11pletely
eliminates the fan roar. The new parts required a.re as follows:
MATERIAL REQQIR.ED
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTIOO QUANTI'Gf.
UE 32842 Viscous coupling 1

UE 35510 Extension cone 1
UE 32648 Fan assembly l
UA 302/Z Nut 8
UA 1252/Z Plain washer 8
It is exphasised that the viscous drive fan assembly should only be fitted
in the event of a customer canplaint.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/BP 22.8.68 A
ROLLS-ROYCE SILVER SHAOOW
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES ~$~RVICE
~ ~- BULLEttN
-. - ~,
- 3. - No. SY/A4
PROCEDURE
1• Remove the three setscrews securing the expansion tank to the radiator
matrix. It is not necessary to dr:a.in any coolant frcm the syf;ltem.
2. Remove the four setscrews securing the fan assembly to the e~ten~ion cone.
3. Hold the expansion tank away frcm the fan and gently remove the fan.
Take care not to damage the matrix finning when doing this.
Flg.1 E?CPlod~d vt~

Viscous drive fan
AssembJ.;Y
1 VISCOUS CDUPLlNG
2 COOLANT FAN
3 EXTENSION COOE
I
·'
4. Remove the fan extension cone.
5. Assemble the viscous drive fan assembly on the bench, in the order
shown in Figure 1. Leave all the nuts slack as this will help ,men
placing the fan into position ..
6. Assemble the fan on to the engine and tighten all the securing nuts to
standard torque figures, relative to s.i.Zet as given in Chapter P of the
Workshop Manual.
7. Fit the expansion tank.
Continued •••.
CHAPTER
SB/BP 22.8.68 A
=======·========== -...... _....::::
ROLLS··ROYCE SILVER SHAOOW

. ... -·· ._. ; . .,,.
-- ____
___--... ..·--·. - • -··· . . . .·"'-·i·, .

====·-
- 4 - No. SY/A4
3. HIGH-SPEED ROlXiHNESS
APPLICABLE TO:
All left-hand drive Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T series cars
produced prior to car number 4308.
DESCRIPTIOO
On a small number of cars roughness may be felt i f the car is cruised

continually at speeds between 160 k.p.h. and 190 k.p.h. (100 m.p.h. and
118 m.p.h.).
The roughness can be heard and felt in the fonn of a heterodyne which
has a frequency of approximately 1 per second. In descriptive tenns it can
be heard as a boom at 1 second intervals with corresponding roughness being
felt through the seat and body structure.
It should be noted that this particular roughness is felt only at these

higher speeds and the range over which it occurs can vary. On some cars the
range over which the roughness occurs may be between 168 k.p.h. and 176 k.,p.h.
(105 m.p.h. and 110 m.p.h.), while on other cars the range may b¢ greater,
between 160 k.p.h. and 185 k.p.h. (100 m.p.h. and 115 m.p.h.).
This roughness is caused by small out of balance forces in the torque

converter transmission being amplified by the flexible mounting of the
transmission and so transmitted through the structure of the car. A
stiffened cast aluminium bottom cover for the torus unit is now available for
service use which eliminates the roughness to a point where it cannot be felt
by the occupants of the car.
ACTION
In the event of a customer complaint of high speed roughness the stiffened

bottom cover for the torus unit should be fitted. The new part numbers
required are as follows:
MATE~IAL REQUIRED
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
UG 12833 Bottom cover 1
LC 2644 Setscrew 2
UA 1253/Z Washer 2
Continued •••
SB/BP CHAPTER
22.8.68 A
....
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULLETIN
- 5 - No. SY/A4
PROCEDURE
l. Drain the coolant system.
2. Remove the transmission oil cooler located beneath the torque converter
trarnnission.
3. Remove the existing torus unit bottan cover.
Fig. 2 Stiffened bottom cover -

Torus unit
1 GUSSET ro BE REMOVED SHCMN

OOI'TED
2 TRANSMISSI~ OIL COOLER
3 STIFFENED TORUS COVER
4 LARGER SETSCRaVS
A INSET TO SHOW GUSSET
RQl)VED
4. Remove the two lower engine foot gusset plates from the assembly plate
(see Fig. 2). These are best removed using a cold chisel, the races
being filed flat afterwards.
s. Enlarge the two holes in the transmission casing where shown in Figure 2
and tap the hole to.\ in. u.N.C.
RecC111Dended drill size 0.315 in. (8,00 nm.)
Alten,ative size 0.3125 in. (7,94111n.)
6. Check for any casting flash on the sloping bottan face of the torque
converter transmission casing.
Continued •••
CHAPTER
SB/BP 22.8.68 A
··sERv1··ce··_::e·uLtET IN
.. . . . . . ,· ~
- 6 - N°-GY/A4
7. Place the bottan cover in position and lightly screw the four smaller
setscrews with plain washers and the two tin. setscrews with plain
washers into place.
8. Push the bottcrn cover up into the wedge shaped aperture, keeping the
front face against the engine mounting plate.
9. Tighten the four smaller setscrews finger tight and then finger tighten
the two tin. setscrews.
Torque tighten the four smaller setscrews to between 16 lb.ft. and

18 lb.ft. (2,21 kg.m. and 2,49 kg.m.) and the two% in. setscrews to between
19 lb.ft. and 22 lb.ft. (2,63 lcg.m. and 3,04 kg.ro.).
10. Fit the transmission oil cooler and fill the coolant system.
11. Road test the car.
4. LOW-SPEED VIBRATION
APPLICAB~:
DESCRIPTION
On a small number of cars a l<M'-frequency vibration is apparent when the car is

accelerated sharply from any speed within the range 60 k.p.h. to 130 k.p.h.
(40 m.p.h. to 80 m.p.h.). The frequency of the vibration is approximately that
of the road wheels and it is only apparent when accelerating.
In the cases experienced, the vibration was caused by the half-shafts

running out of line due to the rear standing heigi;\t of the car being too low.
PROCEDURE
In the event of a customer complaint of vibration of this nature it should only

be necessary to reset the standing height of the car to eliminate the vibration.
The correct procedure for setting the standing height of the car is given in
Chapter H, 'Sub-Frames and Suspension', of the Workshop Manual.
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMtTED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/BP 22.8.68 A
No. SY/AS
Circulation - All United
Kingdom Distributors and
Retailers.
CATEGORY C
ROAD WHEEL AND SUSPENSION ROOOHNESS
APPLICABLE TO:
INTRODUCTIOO
A number of complaints have been received of roughness and noise when travelling
at varying speeds. The roughness and noise can be caused by a nwnber of
different features and this Service Bulletin is issued to described these
features and the action to be taken by Service Personnel in the event of a
customer complaint. ·
A brief description of the characteristics of the noises and the

necessary procedures to effect a cure are as follows:
1• ROAD WHEEL VIDRA~
DESCRIPT rm
Out-of-balance road wheels are by far the most colllllon cause of high-speed
roughness. This being so, before attempting to cure rougl:lness of any kind it
is most important to ensure that the road wheels are correctly balanced.
IMPORTANT
When it is necessary to balance the road wheels the following procedure should
be applied.
1• Run the car on the road until the tyres are wann and naturally round.
This will take approximately 12 miles (20 kms.) to achieve, dependent
upon local conditions.
2. As soon as the car enters the garage remove the road wheels 1 before flats
on the tyre are fanned. Then balance the road wheels in the normal way.
Continued •••
- ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/BP 22.8.68 A
ROLLS- ROYCE SILVER SHAOOW
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULLETIN
- 2 - No. SY/A5
This procedure also applies if an on-the-car balancing machine is

used. In this case the wheels should be raised off the ground as soon
as the car enters the garage after running on the road. Then, and only
then, should the wheels be balanced whilst on the car.
It is also important to note that the wheel and tyre units should
run as true as possible, and to achieve this the correct fitting procedure
as noted in Service Bulletin SY/Rl, should be observed.
2. L<Jfl-SPEED VIBRATION
DESCRIPTION
On a small number of cars a low-frequency vibration is apparent when the car is
accelerated sharply from any speed within the range 40 m.p.h. to 80 m.p.h.
(60 k.p.h. to 130 k.p.h.). The frequency of the vibration is approximately
that of the road wheels and it is only apparent when accelerating.
In the ~ases experienced the vibration was caused by the half-shafts

running out of line due to the rear standing height of the car being too low.
PROCEDURE
In the event of a customer complaint of vibration of this nature it should only
be necessary to reset the standing height of the car to eliminate the vibration.
The correct procedure for setting the standing height of the car is given in
Chapter H, 'Sub-frames and Suspension' of the Workshop Manual.
SB/BP 22.8.68 CHAPTER A

ROLLS• ROYCE SILVER SHAOOW
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES
S·E.RVlCE BULLETIN
No,SY/A7
Circulation - United Kin~dom and
European Distributors and Retailers
CATE<DRY C
CARS BUILT TO COvU>LY WITH

THE AMERICAN FEDERAL SAFETY STANDARDS
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series left-hand drive cars built to
comply with the American Fede~ Safety Standards (car serial number SRX. 6C()1
and onwards) •
DESCRIPTION
Cars produced after and including the above car serial number and destined for
the U.S.A. market are built to comply with the American Federal Safety Standards.
This means that a nunber of the components fitted to these cars are peculiar to
American market cars only, and that if any of these components are replaced with
parts which are designed for use in another market, the car will no longer
conform to the legal requiranents of the American Federal Safety Standards.
Many American Owners take delivery of their cars in England and subsequently
spend a touring holiday in England and Europe before having the car shipped to the
U.S.A. Should it be necessary to replace any components on these cars, which are
built to the American Federal Safety Standards, it is imperative that the correct
cCJT1ponents are used as denoted in the current Parts List (T.S.D. Publication
2201).
ROLLS-ROYCE LtMITEO, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER A
BP/F.Ck 25.9.69
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULLETI
No.SY/AS
Circulation - All Distributors
ancl Retailers
CATEOOR.Y C
THE CAR Nl.MBERING SYSTEM
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars
All Rolls-Royce Phantom VI cars
DESCRIPTION
There has recently been three additions to the car serial ntunbering system which
is used on the above cars and this Service Bulletin has been issued for information
purposes to prevent any confusion arising from these additions.
The car serial ntunber is marked on an engraved plate which is attached

to the left-hand side of the bulkhead in the engine compartment,or in the case
of later cars built to comply with the American Federal Safety Standard
requirements, on an engraved plate attached to the left-hand front door pillar.
The complete car serial ntunber consists of three letters followed by a

four figure ntunber.
CAR SERIAL Nl.MBER

The first letter of the car serial ntunber denotes the body styling:
s = Standard saloon
C ::: Two-door saloon with coachwork by

H.J. Mulliner, Park Ward
D = Convertible with coachwork by

H.J. Mulliner, Park Ward
L = Long wheelbase saloon

(Long wheelbase fonnal sedan in the U.S.A.)
p = Rolls-Royce Phantom VI limousine
Continued •••
BP/ECk 16.10.69 CHAPTER A

ROLLS• ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
No.SY/AS
- 2 -
The second letter differentiates Silver Shadow motor cars from the Bentley T
Series:
R = Rolls-Royce
B = Bentley
The third letter denotes ,vhether the car is left or right-hand drive:
X = Left-hand dr fve
H = Right-hand drive
The different letter combinations of the car serial numbering system are shown
below:
ROLLS-ROYCE
SRH == Standard saloon right-hand drive
SRX :::: Standard saloon left-hand drive
CRH :::: Two-door saloon right-hand drive
CRX = Two-door saloon left-hand drive
DRH = Convertible right-hand drive
DRX = Convertible left-hand drive
LRH = Long wheelbase saloon right-hand drive
LRX = Long wheelbaf3e saloon left-hand drive

(Long :wheelbase fonnal sedan in the U.S.A.)
PRH = Phantom VI limousine right-hand drive
PRX = Phan.tan VI limousine left-hand drive
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITEO. PYM•s LANE, CREWE. ENGLAND
CHAPTER A
BP/ECk 15. 10.69
ROLLS~ ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES :SERV_ICE BULLETI
No.S't/A8
- 3 -
BENTLEY
SBH = Standard saloon right-hand drive
SBX ::::: Standard saloon left-hand drive
CBH = Two-door saloon right-hand drive
CBX = Two-door saloon left-hand drive
DBH = Convertible right-hand drive
DBX = Convertible left-hand drive
-Note All coachbuilt cars were denoted by the prefix C (e.g. CRX) up
to car serial number CRX 6646. Convertible cars produced
after CRX 6646 hO\vever are denoted by the prefix D (e.g. DRX),
while Two-door saloons continue to be denoted by the prefix C.
IMPORTANT
The ccmplete and correct car serial number MUST be quoted whenever ordering
parts or in any correspondence concerning a~ticular motor car, and on all
Warranty claims.
ROLLS•ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/ECk 16. 10.69 A
Rolls-Royce ft Bentley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Service B·u lletin issued for
Circulation All Distributors Section A
and Retailers Bulletin No SY/A9
Page No 1
Date 2.6. 71
CATEGORY C
AU'J'OW.TIC SPEED CX>NTROL
APPLICABLE TO :
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series, and all Rolls-Royce
and Bentley Corniche cars.
DESCRIPTION
An autana tic spee~ control device is now available as a custaner request

item on a new car, providing it. is included in the motor car specification
order.
The device allows the driver to select a cruising speed which will
then be autanatically maintained, until cancelled by operation of the
contl'ol switch, or by depressing the brake pedal. Provision is also made
"D
...
C for increasing or decreasing the controlled speed without having to
Cl
C
disengage and ~en re-engage the speed ·control. Cruising speeds of
w
-~ 24 rn.p.h. (38 k.poh . ) and above may be selected.
"D
~
<:: The device comprises three main canponente, a Regulator, a Vacuum
·.:::
a.. Servo and a Control panel.
The regulator , shown in Figure 1, is fitted in the engine compartment

and is connected by special drive cables to both the transmission and the
speedometer head, thus allowing the regulator to accurat ely assess the speed
of the car. The regulator also contains a series of valves and is
connected to the engine induction manifold such that the valves can
accurately control in unison with engine speed t he amount of manifold
depression which is allowed to act on the vacuum servo.
As the vacuwn servo is mechanically connected to the carburetter

linicage, as shov.n in Figure 1, the regulator can by varying the vacuum
applied to the servo, control the throttle opening and therefore the
speed of the car.
The regulator is activated by the control panel which is situated

within easy reach of the driver. The control panel has three switches,
one of which is an 'On-Off' switch, one a decrease speed button and the
third switch perfonns the fooctions of 'sett ing s peed' and '.increasing
speed'. The control panel is shown in Figure 2.
Continued •••
I If"\ r:lnllc:-Anvr.A Motors limited 1971

Rolls-Royce /J Bentley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Service Bulletin issued for
Ci.rculation All Distributors Section A
Page No 2
Date 2.6. 71
'C
C
CD
0,
C
w
.5
'C
sC
cf
Fig. 1 Regulator and Bellows
1. Carburetter lirikage
2. Regulator unit
3. Bellows unit
•
Continued •••
I
-'
(0 Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971
Page No 3
Date
When fitted, the speed control device nrust first be energised by

using the 'On-Off' switch on the control panel. The car should then be
accelerated in the normal manner until the desired cruising speed is
achieved at which point the 'Increase' button should be momentarily
depressed. This will have the effect of setting the regulator at that
speed and the speed of the car will now be automatically maintained.
Adjustment of the cruising speed within the range quoted is
accomplished by means of the two push-buttons. If it ls desired to
increase the selected cruising speed, this can be achieved by holding
down the 'Increase' button which will cause the car to be gently
accelerated. When the desired speed is reached, .releasing the button
will reset the regulator at that speed. Decreasing the cruising speed
is achieved by holding down the 'Decrease' button, thus causing the car
to decelerate until the desired speed is reached. Releasing the button
will then reset the regulator. It is possible that if the 'Decrease'
button is not depressed fully:an increase in speed may result. Care
nrust therefore be taken when using the 1 Decrease' button.
Moving the control switch to the 'Off' position, or momentarily
"
c;
t'O
O>
depressing the brake pedal, will de-energise the regulator and thus
C:
w cause the vacuum servo to relax. The speed of the car will now be
.5 affected only by movement of the accelerator pedal •
"O
f
cf TEST PRO:::EOORE
1. Drive the car along a level road at a speed of 50 m.p.h. (80 k.p.h.) .•
2. Energise the master switch.
3. Fully depress the 'Increase' button and.then release. The car

should then maintain 50 m.p.h. ±. 1 m.p.h. (80 k.p.h. ±. 1,6 k.p.h.).
4. Fully depress the 'Increase' button and hold until the road speed
reaches 60 m.p.ho (96,56 k.p.h.) then release. The car should hold
60 m.p.ho ±. 1 m.p.h. (96t5 k.p.h. ±. 1,6 k.p.h.). ..
5. Fully depress 'decrease' button and hold until car reaches 50 m.p.h.
(80 k.p.h.) then release and car should hold 50 m.p.h. ±. 1 mop.h·.
(80 k.p.h. ±. 1,6 k.p.h.).
6. Slowly depress brake pedal until brake lamps are energised and
speed control unit sh9uld disengage.
1. Re-engage speed control at 32 m.p.h. (51 k.p.h.) and check that

it disengages when neutral is selected.
Continued •••
0 Roll~-Rovr:P. Motor~ Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce fJ Bem!ey Moto1 Cats Service Bulletin
Pag~ No 4
Date 2.6.71
--------
1 2
"O
C:
.!!!
en
C:
w
C:
"O
!!!
.5
a:
Fig. 2 Facia Controls

1. Autanatic Speed Control controls
z. Facia lower roll
Continued •••
<t) Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce r, Bentley Motor Cats Service Bulletin
PageNo 5
Date 2 • 6 • 71
s. Re-engage the speed control and check that it disengages when

'On-Off' switch is moved to 'Off' position.
9. Check tha."t the autanatic control will not engage below 24 m.p.h.
10. In the event that the limits in item (3) above are exceeded an
Allen-screw adjustment is provided on the regulator assembly,
adjacent to the nulti-pin socket.
It is marked 'c'. If it is found that the speed held in (3)
is higher than that at which the unit was engaged or that the
car accelerates fran the engaged speed then the screw should
be turned clockwise - i.e. in the direction of the arrow 'S'.
If the car decelerates then the screw should be turned anti-
clockwise, i.eo in the direction of the arrow 'F'.
WARNING:
No other adjustments should be made to the regulator and the top cover
should not under any circumstances be removed as this fonns an integral
-e
C
«I
part of the vacuum circuit.
"61
c::
w
.5
l
C
i
Arr/JCl/EcK
(0 Rolls-Aoyce Motors Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce ft Bel/Uey l'vfotor Cr1rs Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributors and Retailers Section A
Other Than C.S.A. And Canada Bulletin No SY/A 10
Page No 1
Date 16.2.71.
CATEGORY C
INCREASED PERFORNANCE ENGINE FOR USE IN ROLLS -ROYCE

AND BENTLEY COR.NICHE M010R CARS
APPLICABLE TO
All Rolls~oyce and Bentley Coachbuilt two-door motor cars from Car
Serial Number CRH 9919 on"W<lrds.
DESCRIPTION
The recently introduced Rolls-Royce and Bentley Corniche motor cars

feature a number of changes from the two-door coachbuil t cars they
replace. The styling and interior appointment changes are described
in the relevant Sales Infonnation Sheets.
The engine and its associated components feature a number of

developments to give a greater power output than the engines of
standard Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T series saloons.
Some of these developments affect the servicing and overhaul of canponents
and it is therefore important to note and familiarise service
personnel with them.
1. Revised Camshaft Timing
The valve timing has been retarded by 7~0 •

To achieve this the keyway in the cranks ha ft p101.on gear which
mates with the key in the crankshaft has been relocated thus
retarding the angular position of the camshaft relative to the
crankshaft.
To set the camshaft timing follow the procedure laid down
in the Workshop Manual - T.s.u. 2476, Chapter E - Engine, Page E.42.
2. Increased Bore Exhaust System
To improve the dispersion of the exhaust gases the bore of the

exhaust system has been increased at the front and rear ends.
The outlet fran the manifolds has been increased by
approximately 0.25 in. (6,35 nun.) and this larger bore is carried
t'.1rough the downpipes to the front silencer.
Other changes to the system concern the high frequency damper
and the tail pipe which now protrudes horizontally from the rear
apron.
Continued ••••
,fl Rolls- Royce Lirnited 1971

Rolls-Royce & Benrley /v1otcf l'cJtS Service Bulletin
Circulation All lhstriDutors and ReLlU ers Section A
Other than u.s .A. and Canada Bulletin No SY/A 10
Page No 2
Date 16. 2. 71 •
Because of the increase in the exhaust downp.i.pe diameter a

change in the shape of the right-hand upper triangle lever has
been introduced to provide adequate clearances at ~ll ttmes.
3. Air Cleaner Intake Tube and Intake Silencer
Ti1e length of the air cleaner/silencer intake tube has been reduced
inside the silencer box. This has reduced the re,;;triclion to air
flow through the air cleaner/s.ilencer assembly.
A new develoflTlent to cut intake noise has been i.ntroduced into
the air breaking half way along its length. The unit is called
a 'Helmholtz' resonator and its function is to provide a static
air cushion to damp out the pressure waves developed in the intake
system.
The air cleaner element requires service attention as laid
down in standard saloon service schedules.
The ?Helmholtz' resonator requ.i.res no attention at all during
the car's life.
4. Carbura tio~
The improved air flow through the engine requires different

carburation characteristics, and these have been provided by
change to the carburetter needles. The new needles have the
reference number BAM. All other carburetter features remain
unchanged.
,.,
,").
To improve ttle performance of' the cooling sys tern a faster running
cooling fan has been introduced. By reducing the coolant pump
riulley diameter the fan speed at engine idle has been increased,
in the ratio 1.2: 1~
The fan is still f i tt,ed with a viscous unit to .reduce fan
roar at speed and improve the wann-up rate of the engine but the
viscous unit is larger to cope with the increased speedso To
prevent possible problems with cavitation at the higher speeds the
waterpump impeller has been reduced in size to maintain standard
engine water flow rates. Obviously the new pulley sizes have
necessitated new belt lengths between the crankshaft pulley and
Lhe water pump pulley.
6. Transmitters
To feed the additional dashboard instrumentation used, a coolant

temperature transmitter is fitted to the back of 'B 1 bank cylinder
head and an oil pressure transmitter to the oil filter pedestal
assembly. These units are both as used on early versions of the
6~ litre engine. The tachometer used is of the impulse type\a
feed being taken from the ignition circuit.
\rr/JCl
1
,f') Rolls- Aovce Limited 1971

CHAPTER B
SPECIAL PROCESSES
. {-
No. SY/Cl
Circulation - All Retailers
CATEGORY C
WATER LEAKS FROM THE AIR O)NDITIONING lNIT
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series c~rs fitted with refriger-
ation units and produced prior to car number SRH 2970.
DESCRIPTICXIJ
We have r.ecei'Ved complaints from:· a number of Customers concerning water

dripping into the interior of the car when the refrigeration unit is in oper-
ation.
'Illis water is condensate which forms on the evaporator unit and its
sucti~n lines and, unless the water dfa:i'ns away readily, it can accumulate
and drip into the interior of the car; usually onto either the driver's or
the passenger 1 s feet.
The water can drip from two sources.
l). 'Ille drip ·tray which fits under the evaporator box. The leakage from
this source is caused by a rubber drain valve which if it is too stiff
to operate, allows the condensate to accumulate a~d spill over the drip
tray.
ACTlCl'-I
Locate the evaporator box drain tube which is positioned centrally

above the gearbox bell housing. It can be reached from under the
bonnet b.Y feeling down between the back of the engine and the bulk
head.
Remove the drain tube and modify the flap valve by cutting the sides
as shown in Figure 1.
Continued •••
ROLLS •ROYCE Lt Ml TED• PYM'S LANE, CREWE• ENGLAND
SB/BP 10.8.67. SECTION C
Printed '" E,sgfu;d

RO LLS - ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES .
SERVICE BULLETIN
' .
~, -==========================================================::::::::::::::=====================
-z- No. SY/C1
l
Fig.1 Flap valve showing cuts in sides t
.,
2) Condensate fonns on the external low pressure suction lines. If the
lagging on this pipe is not ccmplete or if gaps exist in the lagg.lng
then condensate can collect and drip into the interior of the car.
'nus pipe is located beneath the facia and runs alOllg the left-hand
side of the evaporator box. It r:uns 1n conjunction with the high
pressure liquid pipe and is wrapped with a PVC backed foam lagging.
If the leakage is from this source the pipes should be completely

lagged with a suitable foam lagging or with one of the propriety
lagging materials lfflich can be obtained from any local refrigeration
repair workshop.
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
10.,8.,67. SECTION C
SB/BP
Printed In Ensland
ROLLS· ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
No. SY/C2
Circulotion - All
Distributors and Retailers
CATEGORY C
DEMISTER DLCT OUTLETS
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shodow and Bentley T Series cars.
DESCRIPI'IOO
The front windscreens of the obove cars ore demisted by a series of nozzles
located behind the instrument panel at the bose of the screen.
Should -_the demisting system fail to clear the windscreen correctly,

the nozzles '. should be exwdned to ensure that they have not become defonned
or blocked by the adjacent trim. The nozzles will be visible by viewing
from outside. the car and looking through the wind6creen towards the lower
edge of the screen.
If the nozzles nre blocked by th(! adjacent trim, the latter should
be tucked down the si(es of the nozzles; taking care not to deform the
outlets.
Should the nozzles hcve deformed cousing the outlets to close, this
can be corrected by fitting small plastic wedges into the nozzles, as
described in the following procedure, such that the sides of the outlet are
held open. These plastic wedges cr.n be mnde from small oblong pieces
measuring 3.0 in. x 0.312 in. x 0.120 in. (7,62 cm. x 0,793 cm. x 0,305 cm.)
which are obtainable from Rolls-Royce Limited, the p2rt number being RH 8138.
PROCEDURE
1. Locate the outlet which requires modifying.
2. If the outlet i1: one of the two narrow ones each side of the centre
of the ducting, cut the piece of plastic provided to the dimensions
given in Figure 1.
3, Using a poir of long-nosed pliers, fit the wedge into the outlet
such thnt the sides of the outlet are held np~rt and the shoulders
of tle wedge sit on the edges of the ducting as shown in figures 3
and 4.
Continued •••
CHAPTER
SB/Eek 30.5.68. C
AND BENT.LEY T SERIES
~
SERVI-CE
, .
•
BULLETI
.I • •
NoSY/C2
- 2 -
D F
,... .,
C
1...-
E
..,I
Wedge d.J.mens!ons
Fig.1 Fig.2
A= 0.12s in. (3,18 mn.) G = 0.55 in. (14,(X) nm.)

B =-0.0625 in. (f,59 m ·. ) H = 0.0625 in. (1,59 mn.)
C~ 0.10 in. (2,54 mn.) J = 0.30 in, ,7,62 11111..)
D= 0.30 in. (7,62 mn.) K = o.~7 Jn. (12,10 mn.)
E = 0.125 in. (3,18 nm.) L = 0.12S in. (3,18 nmo)
F = 0.250 in. (6,35 nm.) M = 0.375 in. (9,53 mn.)
Continued •••
SB/e::k 30.5.68. CHAPTER C

-:(-,, . ,,:... . ·~ -.. ~: . :- -
No. SY/C2
- J -
I 1(294
We.::gee in position
FJ..u.3
Illustrating the wedge shown in Illustrating tri,~ wedge shown J.n

Figure 1 fitted to one of the Figure 2 fitted to one of the
narrow outlet cbcte. wider cutlet wets.
-~------·---· --·~·-·--·-·-----~~--·-
CHAPTER
SB/B::k JO. 5.68. C
CHAPTER C
HEATING, DEMISTING AND
VENTILATION SYSTEM
,.
CHAPTER D
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
ROLLS-ROVCE SILVER SHADOW
. . . . '
No.SY/J)S
IGNITIQ'; DISTRIBU'IOR CONTACT BREAKER CAM LUBRICATICN
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver ShadOW'. and Bentley. T Series cars::
DESCRIPTIQ';
The purpose of this Service Bulletin is to advise Distributors, Retailers

and Service Personnel that the Midland Silicones Canpound MS4 mentioned in
Service Bulletins SY/D4 and SY/M13 is obtainable as a stock item.
The compound is supplied in four ounce tubes, the Rolls-Royce part

number being RH.8029.
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PVM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/ECK 8.2.68. D&M
ROLLS•ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
SERVICE BULLETIN
No. SY/D6
~irculation - All Retailers
CATEOORY C
SPECIAL GREASES
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of this Service Bµlletin is to inform 1)i.stributors, Retailers

and Service Personnel that Dextagrease Super G.P., which is mentioned in
Section H4 of the Workshop Manual is available in 11b. (0,45 Kg.) containers
from R.ol.ls-Royce L.imited, the part number being RH 8126,
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 4.4.68 D
=========--=--=····-· ·---·· =-===========
··s,ERv1cE
' ' '
BULLET IN
SY/D7
No.
Circulation - All Countries
other than United Kingdon.
CATE(X)RY C
ROCOL LUBRICANTS
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars.
DESCRIPTICN
The Lubricants and Maintenance Data Chart and the Workshop Manual quote a
number of Rocol lubricants which are used in the servicing of the above cars.
These lubricants can be obtained from Rocol Representatives, situated in
each of the following countries.
AUSTRALIA FINLAND
British Paints (Aust.) Pty~ Ltd., Oy Impoil,

Rocol Division - Snellmaninkatu 15.A.,
P.O. Box 43, HELSINKI.
9-29 Gow Street,
Bankstown,
SYD.'IEY, N. S. W. FRANCE * {and French Territories)
Societe Nouvelle des Huiles Minerales,
AUSTRIA 81 Rue de l'Industrie,
RUEIL-MALMAISON (S & 0)
Evva-Dauerfette-Fabrlk QnbH.,
Fonsthaugasse Nr. 12-16,
VIENNA :XX. GERMANY (WEST)
Oel-1-Iandels-Kontor,
BELGIUM Postfach 60,
40(X) DUSSELDORF-KAISERSWERTH.
Comauto S .A.,
Autostrade,
GRAND BIGARD.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE• CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 1S.4.68 D
ROLLS- ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
- 2 - No. SY/Di
CANADA (ex~luding British HOLLAND

Columbia).
AWZ Smeenniddelente~hniek,
Peel Lubricants Ltd.t Vredeweg 35,
P.O. Box 69, Postbus 20,
Port Credit, ZAANDM1,
OOTARIO
!!:ill-sh Columbia onll'. HONG KONG

Glenn-Lyster Sales Ltd., Lebel (China) Ltd.,
103~ Commercial Drive, P.O. Box 699,
VANCOWER 6. HONG KONG.
DENMi\RK IRELAND
Georg Keller A/S, Wilby & Co. Ltd.,
Vodroffsvej 7-9, 15 Upper Onnond Quay,
COPENHAGEN V. OOBLJN 7.
ITALY SOUTH AFRICA

Rocol Molybdenised Lubricants, Wilson & Herd (Pty) Ltd.,
R.T.D. Products and Aerosols. P.O. Box 7733,
Agip S • p .A. , JOHANNESBURG.
Vextra,
Viale Dell'Arte 72, Wilson & Herd (Eng.) Pty. Ltd.,
ROWE. P.O. Box 1459,
CAPE TOWN.
RocoJ. Kilopoise Products,
Kimates S .p .A., K .lbum & White lPty) Ltd.,
Via Turati 28, P.O. Box 2609,
20121 MILAN. 19 Ordnanc~ Road,
DURBAN.
JAPAN· >:~ ( China and parts of
S .E. Asia). SPAIN
Sumico Lubricant Co., Agell Hennanos S.A.,
c/o Sumitomo Metal Mining Co. Ltd., Trafalgar 14,
11-3, 5-Chome Shimbashi, BARCELONA 3.
Minato-ku,
TOKYO.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM•s LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 18.4.68 j)
=--======= ===================
ROlLS-ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
- 3 - No. SY/D7
NORWAY SWEDEN
Harald A. Johanse, A.B. Produktionsmateriel,
Vognmannsgt. 12, Fack,
OSLO. SOLNA 1.
fORTUGAL SWITZERLAND
Sociedade Activa de Wanner A.G.,
Representacoes , Lda., HOO.GEN.
Import-Export,
Rua Da Boa-Vista 84, 2~ S/3,
LISBON 2. U.S.A.
Ralph Hayden & Associates,

P.O. Box 834,
Walnut Creek,
CALIFORNIA 94597.
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED , PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CMAPTER
SB/Eek 18.4.68 D
Rolls-Royce & Bentley Morar Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributors and Retailers Section D
except U.S.A. and Canada Bulletin No SY/Dl 3
Page No 1
Date 20th January 1971
(ISSUE 2)
CATEGORY C
PERIODIC LUBRIO\ TION AND IW\INTENANCE
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls~oyce Silver Shadow and Corniche cars, and all Bentley T
Series and Corniche cars except those destined for the U.S.A. or Canada.
DESCRIPTION
Since Service Bulletin SY/D13 Issue 1 was introduced, the Service

Maintenance Schedules have been revised, as a result of Service experience.
This Service Bulletin contains the new Schedules which Distributors and
Retailers should now institute as nonnal routine.
The items marked thus• in the following Schedules are items
which are classed as Essential Services and are therefore those which
-0
C should be carried out at the stipulated intervals in order to ensure
~
O> correct operation of the car and compliance with the Rolls-Royce
C
w
C
Warranty.
"'O
~ SCHEOOLES
C
ii: REGUIAR MAINTENANCE

As climatic and operation conditions affect maintenance to a large
extent, the following items should be checked by the Owner or Distributor/
Retailer at the periods specified.
Battery
Weekly Check the level of the electrolyte; top~p if necessary
with dis ti !led water. During hot climatic conditions or when
long distances are covered, the battery must be checked at more
regular intervals.
Engine
Weekly or every 5CO miles (800 km.) whichever i~ earlier. Check
the oil level in the engine sump and top~p if necessary with the
approved oil.
He<1dlamp aligrnuenl
Periodical!~ Check the headlamp beam alignment whilst the engine
is running.
Continued •••
~ Rolls- Royce Limited 1971

Ro/ls-Royce fl Bentley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
except U.S.A. and Canada Bulletin No SY/bl 3
Page No 2
(ISSUE 2)
Hydraulic Reservoirs
Mont hly Run the engi ne for 4 minutes then top~p the hydrau lic
reservoirs with t he specified fluid to the indicated level.
Tyres
Weekly Check the tyr e pressures and correct as necessary . The
spare wheel als o should be checked .
Windsc reen W'd shers
Periodicallv Check the level of fluid i n the reservoir and top-up

a s required wi t h the correct mixture .
SER.VICE SCHEOOLES
EVERY 3 000 MILES ( 5 OCX) l<M. ) OR 3 IDNTHS • WHICHEVER IS THE E\RLIER
If t he ca r is us ed for cons tant 'stop-start' operation; renew

-0
C the engine oil.
"'
C)
C
w
C
Initial Service - First 3 000 miles ( 5 000 km.) or 3 months, whichever
is the earlier
Engine • Renew the engine oil~
Torque Converter Transmission or Fou r Speed Autana t ic Gearbox
• With the engine running check the fluid l evel; top-up i f

necessary. For full instructions refer to Workshop Manual TSD 2271 -
Torque Converter Transmission or Workshop Manual TSD 2206 - Four
Speed Autonatic Gearbox.
Engine Cooling System
• Tighten all coolant hoses wonn-drive clips.
Belt tensioning
Check the tension of the following belts: All cars - Coolant pump
via the jockey pulley, Steering pump and Genera tor. Non-refrigerated
cars - Steering pump and Generator. Refrigera ted cars - Steering
pump and refrigerant compressor, coolant pump and al ternatoro
S Leering pump
Check the level of the fluid in t he power steering pump reservoir;
top~p if ne~essary.
Road test the ca r f or satisfactory perfonnance.
.
ID
ID
(t, Rolls-R oyce Limited 19 71
Continued •••
flo/ls-floyce l! Benrley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Page No 3
(TSSUE 2)
E\TERY 6 000 MILES ( 10 000 KM.) OR 6 MONTHS. WIIICIIEVER IS 1H£ EARLIER
Engine
* Renew the engine oil and oil filter element.
Bell ten!'.>ioning
Check the tension of the following belts: All cars - Coolant pump
via the jockey pulley, Steering pump and Genera tor. Non-refrigerated
cars - Steering pump and Generator. Refrigerated cars - Steering
pump and refrigerant compressor, coolanL pump and alternator.
Brakes
* Inspect the brake pad linings for wear, including the handbrake
pads. When renewing foot brake pads examine the condition of the
dust excluders fitted to the calipers. Although it is normally
reconmended that the face of the footbrake pad should not be less
"Q
C:
than 0.125 in. (3,2 nm.) from the backing plate, the mechanic
~ should be able, through experience, to detennine whether or not the
0)
C:
w brake pad linings are of a sufficient thickness to satisfactorily
C:
complete 6 000 miles (10 O(X) km.) to the next service. Should the
lining back plate ever contact the braking disc, the resultant
damage will necessitate renewal of the disc.
Manually adjust the handbrake pads.
Inspect all 'Bundy' brake pipes a:1d connections for sign of corrosion.
Im1ition systan
Clean the sparking plugs and set the gaps to between 0.023 in. and
o.028 in. (0,58 T11T1. and 0,71 mm.). Test the sparking plug for
correct and efficient operation. Lubricate the distributor spindle,
automatic advance mechanism and shaft bearings with engine oil.
Smear the contact breaker cam with the specified grease.
Clean and check the contact breaker gaps.
Clean the contact breaker points, check the gaps or dwell angle;
if necessary, reset ignition timing.
Control linka~es
Apply a few drops of engine oil to the accelerator linkages and to
the gear range selector controls adjacent to the transmission casing.
Carburetters
Check the oil level in the air valve dampers. Reset the carburetter
balance and engine idle-speedo
Continued •••
© Rolls-Royce Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce fl Bentley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Page No 4.
(ISSUE 2)
Electrical system
Check that all lamps, direction indicators, instruments and air
conditioning controls are operating correctly.
Check the following levels and pressures
Check the fluid level in the power steering pump reservoir; top-up if
necessary.
Check the level and specific gravity of the engine coolant; correct
if necessary.
Run the engine for 4 minutes, then check the hydraulic reservoir
fluid levels; top-up if necessary.
Check the level of electrolyte in the battery and top-up, if
necessary, with distilled water.
Check the tyre pressures and adjust if necessary.
* Check the fluid level of the Four Speed Automatic Gearbox/Torque
Convertor Transmission; top-up if necessary.
Test
Road test the car for satisfactory perfonnance.
EVERY 12 000 MILES (20 000 KM.) OR 12 IVPNTIIS WHIQ-IEVER IS TIIE FARLIER
,:,
C
~
0)
Engine
c::
w
.S * Renew the engine oil and oil filter element •
-0
~
~ Four Speed Automatic Gearbox or Torque Convertor Transmission
Renew the transmission fluid. On cars fitted with Four Speed

Automatic Gearbox, drain the fluid coupling.
For full instructions refer to Workshop Manual TSD 2271 - Torque
Convertor Transmission or Workshop Manual 1'SD 2206 - Four Speed
AutCJJlatic Gearbox.
Belt tensioni!Yf
Check the tension of the following belts driving the following:
All cars - Coolant pump via jockey pulley. Non-refrigerated cars -
Steering pump and Generator. Refrigerated cars - Steering pump
and Refrigeration canpressor, Coolant pump and Alternator.
Renew any belts showing signs of wear.
Brakes
* Inspect the brake pad linings for wear, including the handbrake
pads. When renewing the footbrake pads, examine the condition of
the dust excluders on the calipers. Although it is normally
rec<Jlllllended that the face of the brake pad should not be less than
0.125 in. (3,2 nm.) from the back plate, the mechanic should be able,
through experience, to detennine whether or not the brake pad
Continued •••
,f'l Rolls- Rovce Limited 1971

Circulation All D.istr.ibutors and Retailers Section D
except U.S.A. and Canada Bulletin NoSY/Dl 3
Page No 5
(ISSUE 2)
linings are of sufficient thickness to sa tis factor ily complete 6 000

miles ( 10 O(X) km.) to the next service. Should the lining backplate
ever contact the braking disc, the resultant damage will necessitate
the renewal of the disc.
Inspect all 'Bundy' brake pipes and connections for sign of corrosion.
Ignition System
Renew the sparking plugs, ensuring that the gaps are set to between
0.023 in. and 0.028 in. (0,58 nm. and 0,71 mm.). Lubricate the
distributor spindle, automatic advance mechanism and the shaft
bearings with engine oil. Smear the distributor cam with the approved
grease. Renew the contact breaker points; set the gaps or dwell
angle. Check, and if necessary, set ti.ming.
Control linkages
Apply a few drops of engine oil to the accelerator linkages, and to

"O
C
.!!?
CJ)
C
UJ Carburetters
C
Clean the air valves in the carburetters. Ensure that the float
chamber lids are securely tightened. Check the oil level in the
air valve dampers. Remove the inlet unions from the float chambers
and clean the filters. Reset the carburetter balance and engine
idle speed. Check the cold start idle speed (also the idle speed
with the refrigeration system operation, if fitted); reset if
necessary.
Steerin& mechanism
* Lubricate the six grease nipples with the approved grease.

Air silencer/filter
* Clean and oil the wire mesh filter elements (if fitted) or renew
the paper filter elements (if fitted).
Handbrake linkage
Lubricate the pivot pins and pulleys in the handbrake system with
the approved grease; free off where necessary.
§_P.are wheel
Lubricate the spare wheel lowering bolt and mechanism.
Electrical systan
Ensure that all lamps, direction indicators, instruments and air

conditioning controls are operating correctly.
..,...
<O
Continued •••
(D Rolls-Royce Limited 1971
Rolls-Royce Ii Bentley Motor Ca,s Service Bulletin
except U.S.A. and Canada Bulletin No SY;b1 3
PageNo 6
Date20th January 1971
(ISSUE 2)
Check the following levels and p:r:essures
Check the fluid level in the power steering pump reservoir and top-up
if necessary.
Check the level and specific gravity of the engine coolant and correct
if necessary.
* Check the oil level in the final drive unit and top-up if necessary.
Check the fluid level in the steering idler box damper and top-up if
necessary. Check the level of electrolyte in the battery and top-up
if necessary with distilled water. Run the engine for four minutes
then check the hydraulic fluid levels; top-up if necessary.
Test
Road test the car for satisfactory performance.
EVERY 24 000 MILES ( 40 000 KM. ) OR 2 YEARS WHICHEVER IS THE E\RLIER
Engine
• Renew the engine oil and the oil filter element. Clean the gauze
flame traps in the engine breather system.
Four Speed Automatic Gearbox or Torque Convertor Transmission
Renew the transmission fluid. On cars fitted with Four Speed

Autorm.tic Gearbox, drain the fluid coupling. On cars fitted with
Torque Convertor Transmission, renew the fluid strainer.
Convertor Transmission or Workshop Manual TSD 2206 - Four Speed
Automatic Gearbox.
Belt tensioning
Check tension of belts driving the following: All cars - Coolant

pump via jockey pulley. Non-refrigerated cars - Steering pump and
Generator. Refrigerated cars - Steering pump and Refrigeration
compressor, Coolant pump and Alternator. Renew any belts which
show signs of wear.
· Brakes
• Inspect the brake pad linings for wear, including the handbrake
pads. When removing the footbrake pads examine the condition of
the dust excluders on the calipers. Although it is normally
recommended that the face of the footbrake pads should not be less
than 0.125 in. (3,2 rrm.) from the backplate, the mechanic should be
able, through experience, to determine whether or not the brake pad
linings are of sufficient thickness to satisfactorily complete 6 000
miles (10 000 km.) to the next service. Should the lining back plate
ever contact the braking disc, the resultant damage will necessitate
renewal of the disc.
....,
CD
co © Rolls-Royce Limited 1971
Continued •••
Rolls-Royce & Benfley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
except U.S.A. and Canada Bulletin No SY/D1 3
Page No 7
Date20th January 1971
(ISSUE 2)

Inspect all 'Bundy' brake pipes and connections for signs of corrosion.
!&Qition system
Renew the sparking plugs ensuring tht't the gaps are set to between
0.023 in. and o.. 028 in. (0,58 nm. ar.ct o, 71 nm.). Lubricate the
distributor spindle, autanatic ad•.a.'.ce mechanism and shaft bearings
with engine oil. Smear the dis'~ributor cam with an approved grease.
Renew the contact breaker points, set the gaps or dwell angle.
Check, and if necessary reset ignition timing.
Control linkages
Apply a few drops of engine oil to the accelerator linkages and to
Carburetters
Clean the air valves in the carburetters. Ensure that the float
chamber lids are securely tightened. Check the oil level in the air
valve dampers. If wire mesh filters .are fitted, rsnove the inlet
unions from the float chambers and clean the filters.
Reset the carburetter balance and engine idle speed. Check the cold
start idle speed (also the idle speed when the refrigeration system
is operating if fitted);· reset if necessary.
Steering mechanism
• Lubricate the six grease nipples with the approved grease.
Steering pump (Hobourn-Eaton}

Renew the filter element in the pump reservoir.
Air SilencerL£'ilter
• Clean and oil the wire mesh filters (if fitted) or renew the paper
filter elements (if fitted).
Fuel pumps
Remove the fuel pump unit fran the car and check for pumping efficiency.
Fit a new fuel pump assembly if necessary.
Continued •••
i... © Rolls-Royce Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce & Bentley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
-----------·
·----------------------
except U.S.A. and Canada Bulletin NoSY/Dl 3
Page No 8
(ISSUE 2)
Handbrake linkage
Lubricate the pivot pins and pulleys in the handbrake systen with the
approved grease. On cars with exposed front cables, dismantle the
pulley housings and pack with the approved grease.
SR§!:re whee~
Lubricate the spare wheel lowering bolt and mechanism.
Electrical system
Check that a 11 lamps, direction indicators , instruments and air
conditioning controls are opera ting correctly.
Al ter1t(;I tor { i r fitted)

Inspect the slip rings and brushes for wear; check the brushes for
freedom of movement in their holders.
-0
C:
"'
0) Generator (if fitted)
C:
U-1
C:
Inspect the corrmutator and brushes for signs of wear; check the
brushes for freedom of movement in their holders.
Final drive
* Drain when hot and refill with an approved oil.
Fuel tank
Remove the drain plug and allow any accumulated water to drain away.
Fit the drain plug and add 4 s.B.N. inhibitors to the tank.
Height control mechun.ism

Disconnect the control valve linkage ball joints. Clean, grease
and fit the ball joint.
Fuel filter
Renew the main line filter and clean out the filter bowl.
Fuel mixture weakening device filter (if fitted}

Fit a new fuel mixture weakening device filter.
Rear wheel drive-shaft

Lubricate the rear wheel drive-shaft outer universal couplings with
an approved grease.
Rolls-Royce fl Bentley Morar Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation An Distributors and Retailers Section D
except U.S.A. and Canada Bulletin NoSY/D1 3
Page No 9
(ISSUE 2)
Power opera led hood (Convertible cars)
Check the level of fluid in the reservoirs; top-up if necessary.
Check the following levels and pressures
Check the fluid level in the power steering pump; top-up if necessary.
Check the level and specific gravity of the engine coolant; correct
if necessary.
Check the level of electrolyte in the battery and top-up if necessary,
with distilled water.
Check the fluid level in the steering idler box damper; top-up if
necessary.
Run the engine for four minutes, then check the hydraulic fluid
levels; top-up if necessary.
Check the tyre pressures; correct if necessary.
Road test the car for satisfactory performance.
SPF.CIAL SE.RVICES
These Special Services are not normal servicing arrangements and will
be carried out only at the Owner's request. It is emphasised however,
that it is the responsibility of the Service Manager to advise the
Owner when these Special Services should be carried out at the specified
distance/time intervals.
SFASONAL SCHEOOLES
Every 12 months
Engine cooling svstem
Drain the coolant from the radiator and the engine crankcase. Clean
any debris (flies, leaves etc.) from the surfaces of the refrigeration
condensor and radiator matrices by reverse flushing with a hose.
This should be carried out just prior to the Autumn (in the U.K.
prior to September 21st.). Fill the system with the correct anti-
freeze mixture, or in where anti-freeze is not required the correct
approved inhibited solution.
Air conditionin& system

Ensure that the foam filter elanent fitted to the scuttle intake
grille is free from obstn.1ction.
On long v.heelbase cars fitted with a centre division, check that the
foam filter element fitted to the intake grille in the rear decking
panel is free from obstruction.
Continued •••
I
""... © Rolls-Royce limited 1971
Rolls-Royce ft Benr/ey Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Page No 10
Date 20th January, 1971
(ISSUE 2)
Refrigeration system (if fitted)

The following operations must be carried out by fully qualified
refrigeration engineero
Check that the refrigeration system is functioning correctly. If
necessary top-up the system with refrigerant. If loss of refrigerant
is evident, check the system for leakage. Visually check the
refrigerant compressor for oil leakage, if oil leakage is aprarent
check the oil level and top-up if necessary.
In the event of a major oil loss, check and repair before topping-
up (refer to Workshop Manual TSO 2476 - Chapter C - Air Conditioning
System for a full instruction).
Check that the body drain holes are unobstructed.
Every 2 ;¥ears
-0
C:
In addition to the 12 monthly schedule, carry out the following:
"'
0,
C:
I.U Eng:ine cool in£ ~ys Lem
C:
Drain the coolant from the radiator and engine crankcase. Thoroughly
reverse flush the coolant passages with a continuous flow of water.
Fit a new coolant hose if necessary. Fit a new engine coolant
thermostat. Fill the system with the correct anti-freeze mixture
or inhibited solution.
Service-Recommendations
Brake and hydraulic s~stem components
48 000 miles ( 80 000 km. )
At this mileage and under nonnal motoring conditions it is recommended

that the following servicing is carried out.
Renew the following flexible high pressure hoses; the front and
rear accwnulator to frame hoses, the front and rear brake pump to
accumulator hoses.
Renew the disc brake caliper seals, the deceleration conscious
pressure limiting valve seals and the master cylinder seals.
Completely drain the fluid from the hydraulic syste, then fill with
Castrol~irling Green Fluid. This fluid exceeds specification
S.A.E. J 1703. Bleed the braking systems and automatic height
control system.
Continued •••

Rolls-Royce 8 Bentley Matar Cars Service Bul/Btin,

except U.S.A. and Canada Bulletin No SY/D13
Page No 10 .AJrendme nt l
Date 20th Janm.cy, 1971
(::fSUE 2)
Refrigeration system (if fitted)

The following operations rrrust be carried out by fully qualified
refrigeration engineer.
Q\eck that the refrigerati on sys tem is functioning ccrrectl_y. If
necessary t op-up the system with r e frigerant. If loss of refrigerant
is evident, check the system for leakage. Visually check the r efrigerant
compressor for oil leakage, if oil leakage is apparent check the oil level
and top-up if necessary.
In the event of a major oil loss, check and repair before topping-up (refer
to workshop Mmua l TSD 24-76 - Chapter C - Air Conditioning System for a
full instruction).
~
Check that the body drain holes are unobstructed.
Every 2 y ears
In addition to the 12 monthl_y schedule, carry out the following:

Engine coolin& system
Drai n the coolant from the radiator and engine crankcase. Thoroughly
reverse flush the coolant passages with a continuous flow of water. Fit
a new engine coolant thermostat. Fill the &rstem with the correct anti-
free ze mixture or inhibited solution. Visually examine all coolant hoses
and r enew if necessary. The heater feed hose (UE 12961) ,!!!USt he renewed
irrespective of appearance.
service Recamiendations
Brake and lzydraulic system components
4t• 1 COO miles (80,000 km.)
At this mileage and under normal motoring conditions i t is r ecorruended

tt:.at the follo.ving servicing is carried out.
Renew the following flexible high pressure hoses: the fr ont and rear
accumulator to frarre hoses , the front and rear brake pump to accumulator
hoses.
Renew the disc brake caliper seals, the deceleration conscious pressure
lirr.iting valve seals and the master cylinder seals.
completely drain the fluid from the lzydraulic system, then fill with
Castrol-Cirling Green Fluid. This fluid exceeds specification s.A.E.Jl703.
Bleed the braking systems and automatic height control system.
Continued •••....••
I «:) Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1972

flol/s-floyce ft Benrley Motor Cats Service Bulletin
except U.S.A. and Canada Bulletin No Si/013
Page No 11
Date 20th January, 1971
(ISSUE 2)
96 OCX> miles (160 000 km.)

At this mileage and under normal motoring conditions it is recorronended
that the following servicing is carried out.
Renew the following flexible high pressure hoses; the front and rear
accumulator to frame hoses, the front and rear brake pump to
accunUJlator hoses.
Renew the disc brake caliper seals the deceleration conscio:'.s pressuure
limiting valve seals and the master cylinder seals.
Completely drain the fluid from the hydraulic systans, then fill with
Castrol-Girling Green Fluid. This fluid exceeds specification
S.A.E. J 1703. Bleed the braking systems and automatic height
control system.
Fuel mixture weakening device cut-off valve
Every 36 OX) miles ( 60 OX) km.) or 3 years, the fuel mixture
weakening device cut-off valve must be renewed.
Special Precautions
Should the car be used in very cold temperatures, drain the engine
sump and carburetter air valve dampers. The engine sump and
carburetter air valve dampers should then be filled with oil having
the following viscosity. 0
For constant temperatures of between o c and -23°c (32°F and -10°F),
use a 10'//30 grade oil.
For constant temperatures of -230C (-100 F) and below, use a SN/ 20
grade oil.

A,::.:.============:::::::=:::::::==::::.:===========
No. SY/D14
Circulation - U.S.A. and Canadian
Distributors and Retailers only
CATEGORY C
PERIODIC LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars~
DESCRIPTION
The Service Maintenance Schedules have been revised as a result of service
experience an·d the following are the new Schedules which Di~tributors and
Retailers should institute as nonnal routine.
•Essential'- maintenance which is indicated thus * in the following
Schedules is the ri\inimum servicing which must be carried out, at the
appropriate d.istanc~time intervals, in order to canply with the Rolls-Royce
Limited Warranty and the Motor Vehicle Air Pollution Control Act. The
remaining items in the Schedules concern 'Preventive• maintenance, aimed at
securing the maximum life and efficiency for the vehicle. Preventive
maintenance will be carried out on request.
The following complete Schedules cover the whole car but it should be
noted that some items are applicable only to cars fitted with the Exhaust
Emission Control System, that is car serial number 6,000 and onwards. On
cars produced prior to this car serial number these items are not applicable.
Additionally, some items are applicable only to cars fitted with the
Fuel Evaporative Emission Control System, that is car serial number 9.0CX)
and onwards. On cars produced prior to this car serial number these items are
not applicable.
Note On the Initial Service - First 3,000 miles (5000 km.) or 3 months
whichever is the e:crlier, the items marked thustare carried out free of charge.
continued •••
ROLLS•ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE. CREW£. ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP 10.12.69 D
SERVICE BULLETI
No6Y/D14
U.S.A. and Canada only
- :l -
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
As climatic and operating conditions affect maintenance to a large extent,
the follo.ving items should be checked by the O.Vner or Distributor/Retailer
at the periods specified.
BATTERY
Weekly - Check the level of ~he electrolyte and top-up if necessary with
distilled water. Dur:-ing hot_ weather or when long distances are covered, the
battery requires checking more frequently.
ENGINE
Weekly or every 500 miles (800 km.) whichever is the earlier - Check the
oil level in tile engine sump and top-up if necessary with an approved
engine oil.
HEADLAMP ALIGNMENT
Periodical~~ - Check headlamp beam alignment with the engine running.
HYDRAULIC RESERVOIRS
Monthly - Run the engine for four minutes then top-up the hydraulic
reservoirs to the indicated level as required with the specified fluid.
TYRES
Weekly Check the tyre pressures and adjust as required. Also check
the spare wheel tyre pressure.
WINDSCREEN WASHER
Periodically - Check the level of fluid in the reservoir and top-up as
required with the correct mixture.
SERVICE SCHEDULES
EVERY 3 /XX) MILES ( 5000 KM.) OR 3 IDNTHS WHICHEVER IS TIIE EARLIER
*If the car is used for constant stop-start operation, change the engine
oil.
INITIAL SERVICE - FIRST 3,000 MIJ,ES ( SCXX> KM.) OR 3 IDNTHS WHICHEVER IS THE
FARLIER
*Change the engine oil. continuedi •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED. PvM·s LAN£. CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP 10.12.69 D
ROLLS-ROVCE SILVER SHADOW
No·SY/D14
- 3 -
Torque Converter Transmission

~<Check the fluid level and top-up if necessary; check the level with the
engine running.
Converter Transmission.
Engine Coolin~ System ,:,Tighten all coolant hose worm drive clips.
Belt Tension Check the tension of the belts driving the following. Fan and
steering pump, generator or alternator, and the refrigeration compressor (if
fitted).
Steering Pump Check the level of the fluid in the power steering pump
reservoir and top-up as required.
Ai.r Injection Pumf? f *Check the tension of the pump driving belt.
I~ition System t *Check the distributo~ contact breaker gaps and adjust if
necessary. Check the ignition timing and adjust if necessary.
Choke Stove Pipe t *Check the depression in the choke stove pipe.
Carburettersf *Check the oil level in the air valve dampers and top-up if
necessary. Check the tightness of the float chamber covers. Check depression
in the float chamber. Check the exhaust CX) emission and if necessary reset.
carburetter balance, mixture strength and idle speed. Check and if necessary
reset the cold start fast-idle speed.
Test: Road test the car for satisfactory performance.
EVERY 6,000 MILES ( 10000 KM.) OR 6 MONI'HS WHICHEVER IS THE F./t.RLIER
Engine ~Change the engine oil and renew the oil filter element.
Belt Tension Check the tension of the belts driving the following.
Fan and steering pump, generator or alternator and the refrigeration compressor
(if fitted). Renew any belts which show signs ofweat'.
continued ••••
CHAPTER
BO 10.12.69 D
-·-=================~-========
ROLLS~ROVCE SILVER SHADOW
NoSY/ D14
U.S.A. a nd Canada only
- 4 -
Brakes *Inspect the br a '<e pad l inings f or wear, including the ha nd brake pads.
When renewing t he foot bra ke pads examine the condition of the dus t exclude r s on
t he calipe r s . Al t.hough it i s nonna lly recorrunended t hat the f ace of the foo t
bra ke pad s hould no t be l~s s than \; in. (3,2 nrn,) from the back plate , the
mecha nic should be abl e to determine, through e xper.ience, whe ther or not the
brake pad linings are of suff icient th t ckness t o satis f a ctorily comple te 6,(X)()
miles (tOOCO km.) to the next service . Should t he lining back pl ate ever
contact the brak i ng disG , the resul t ant damage wi l l necessitate re newal of the
d isc. ,; :
Manually adj µs t t he ·hand bra ke pads .
Ins pect all 'Bundy' brake pipes and connections for si gns of c orrosion.
Igni t i on System Clean the spa r king plugs and set the gaps to between 0.023 in.
a nd u.028 in. (0,58 mm. and 0, 7 1 rrm.). Test the sparking plugs. Lubricate the
d is tributor spindle , automat ic advance me chanism and shaft bearings with engine
oil. Smea r t he contact breaker cam w itt.i the specified grease . Clean and check
the c ontact breaker gaps and r e set if necessary. Check, and if neces sary
re s e t , the ignition timing.
Cont. ro.l Lrn kag<~ s Apply a fe.v d rops of engine oil to the accelera tor
l 111!,;.ages a nd to the gear range s e le ctor controls adjacent to the transmission
c a~u ng.
Carbure tters Check t he oil l evel in the air valve dampers a n:t top-up if
necessary .
Electrical System Ensure that a l l lamps , instruments and air conditioning

controls a r e operating sat is factoril y .
Check the foll owing levels and pressures Check the fluid l eve l in t he pruer
s teer i ng pump reservoir and t op - up if ne cessary.
Check t he leve l and spec ific gravity of t he engi ne coolant and c orrect i f
ne cessary.
*Check the fluid l evel of the torque converte r transmission and top- up if
necessary.
Run the engi ne for f our minutes then check the hydraulic re s ervoir fluid
levels; top-up if necessary wi th the specified fluid.
Check t he level of ele ctrolyte i n the ba ttery and top-up with distilled water
if necessary.
Che ck the t yre pressures and adjust if necessary.
continued •••
BP l (). 12.69 CHAPTER D

====================
ROLLS·ROYCE seLVER SHADOW
·SERVICE BULL ET I
NOSY/014
- 5 -
Test Road test the car for satisfactory performance.
EVERY 12,000 MILES ( 20000 l<M.. ) OR 12 l\ONTHS WHICHEVER IS THE EARLIER
*Change the engine oil and rene.v the oil filter element.
Torque Converter Transmiss.ion .,*Drain the transmission sump and refill with an
approved fluid. For full instructions refer to Workshop Manual T.S.D. 2271 -
Torque Converter Transmission.
Belt Tension Check the tension of the belts driving the following. Fan and
steerin~ pump, generator or alternator and the refrigeration compressor (if
fit,ted).e ·Renew any belts which s~ow signs of wear.
Brakes *Inspect the brake pad liningS for wear, including the hand brake
pads. When renewing the foot brake pads, examine the condition of the dust
excluders on the calipers. Although it is normally recolllllended that the face
of the foot brake pad should not be less than~ in. (3,2 rrun.) from the back
plate, the mechanic should be able to detennine, through experience; whether
or not the brake pad lin.ings are of sufficient thickness to satisfactorily
complete 6,000 miles (1<:XXX) km.) to the next service. Should the lining
back plate ever contact ~he braking disc, the resultant damage will
necessitate the renewal of the disc.
Manually adjust the hand brake pads.
Inspect all 'Bundy' brake pipes and connections for signs of corrosion.
!~nition System *Rene.v the sparking plugs, ensuring that the gaps are set to
between 0.023 in. and 0.028 in. (0.58 rrrrn. and 0,71 mm.). Lubricate the
distributor spindle, automatic advance mechanism and the shaft bearings with
engine oil. Smear the distributor cam with the approved grease. Rene.v the
contact breaker points and set the gaps. Check the ignition t.im.ing and reset
if necessary.
Crankcase Breather System >:<Remove and clean the gauze flame traps in the
crankcase breather tube and also clean the adaptor in the choke butterfly
housing.
Air Injection Pwnp Belt Tension *Check the tension of the belt driving the
a.ir injection pwnp
continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED. PYM•s LAN£, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP 10.12.69 D
ROLLS•ROYC£ SILVER S>-IAOOW
AHD BENTLEY T seR,ES SERVICE· BULLET I
No.SY/014
- 6 -
Air Injecti~n Pump Intake Filter *Remove and clean the intake filter element.
l
Alr InJecLion S,y:..:.t(:m

*Check the systan for leaks and correct functioning;
renew any defective items.
Carburetters *Clean the air valves in the carburetters. Check the oil level
in the air valve dampers and top-up if necessary. Ensure that the float chamber
lids are securely tightened. Remove the inlet unions from the float chambers
and clean the filters. Reset the carburetter balance and engine idle speed.
Check the cold start idle speed''(and also the idle speed with the refrigeration
system operating, if fitted); reset if necessary ..
Control Linkages Apply a few drops of engine oil to the accelerator linkages
and to the gear range selector controls adjacent to the transmission casing.
Steering Mechanism *Lubricate the six grease nipples with the approved
grease.
Air Silencer/Filter *Clean and oil the wire mesh filter elements (if fitted)
or renew the paper filter elements (if fitted).
Hand Brake Linkage Lubricate the pivot pins and pulleys in the hand brake
system with the approved grease.
Spare Wheel Lubricate the spare wheel lowering bolt and mechanism.
Electrical Systan Ensure that all lamps, instn.mlents and air conditioning
controls are operating satisfactor Hy.
~__beck. the Follo.v ing Levels and Pressures· Check the fluid level in the power
steering pump reservoir and top-up if necessary.
Chee~ the level and specific gravity of the engine coolant and correct if
necessary.
*Check the oil level in the final drive unit and top-up if necessary.
Check the fluid level in the steering idler box damper and top-up if necessary.
Check the level of electrolyte in the battery and top-up with distilled water
if necessary.
Run the engine for four mintures then check the hydraulic fluid levels; top-up
if necessary.
Check the tyr~ pressures and adjust i f necessary.
continued •• ~
1 ROLLS~ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE. CREW£, ENGLAND
BP 10. 12.69 CHAPTER D

ROLLSwROYCE SILVER SHAOOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES ·sERVICE BULLETI
Ho. SY/014
- 7 -
EVERY 24,000 MILES ( 40000 KM.) OR 2 YEARS WHICHEVER IS THE EARLIER
Engine *Change the engine oil and renew the oil filter element.
Torque Converter Transmission >:<After the initial 24,(X)() miles ( 400C() km.)
or two years, whichever is the earlier, drain the transmission sump and renew
the fluid strainer; fill with.,an approved fluid. For full instructions refer
to Workshop Manual T.S.D. 2271 - Torque Converter Transmission.
Belt Tension Check the tension of the belts driving the follo.ving. Fan and
steering pump, generator or alternator and refrigeration compressor (if
fitted). Renew any belts which sho.v signs of wear.
Brakes *Inspect the _brake pad linings for wear, including the hand brake
pads. When renewing the foot brake pads examine the condition of the dust
excluders on the calipers. Although it is normally recommended that the
face of the foot brake pads should not be less than~ in. (3,2 rrun.) from the
back plate, the mechanic should be able to determine, through experience,
whether or not the brake pad linings are of sufficient thickness to
satisfactorily complete 6,0CO miles (10000 km.) to the next service. Should
the lining back plate ever contact the braking disc, the resultant damage will
necessitate renewal of the disc.
Manually adjust the hand brake pads.
Inspect all 'Bundy 1 brake pipes and connections for signs of corrosion.
Ignition System *Renew the sparking plugs ensuring that the gaps are set
to between 0.023 in. and 0.028 in. (0,58 mm. and 0,71 nun.). Lubricate the
distributor spindle, automatic advance mechanism and shaft bearings with
engine oil. Smear the distributor cam with the approved grease. Renew the
con~act breaker points and set the gaps. Check the ignition timing and reset if
necessary.
Crankcase Breather System *Remove and clean the gauze flame traps in the
crankcase breather tube and also clean the adaptor in the choke butterfly
housing.
Air In,iection Pump B~lt Tension *Check the tension of the belt driving the
air injection pump.
Choke Stove Pif!e ~<Check the depress ion in the choke stove pipe.
continued •••
,. ROLLS ROYCE LIMITED, PYM•s LANE. CREWE, ENGLAND

4
BP 10.12.69 CHAPTER D
_. . . . . .-============;:!-=-~-
·····-·==·--·---·======- =-========
No.SY/D14
8 -
A.i.r In.iection Pump In~ake Filter >:<Remove and clean the intake filter element.
Air Inject ion S.\ stem >:<Cl1eck the system for leaks and correct functioning;
renew any d:•rect.ive items.
Fuel Evaporative Emission Control Canister ,:•R.enew the foam filter element in
the canister.
Fuel Evaporative Emission Control Purge Line Filter ,:•Renew the paper
element in the purge line filter
Ca: lit1r-1·1 t··i· fi!t,11:1·,· \'!i·.·l,,-,, 1n~: DE'\ n·, *Renew the air filter element for the
fuel mixture weakening devL:e.
Carburetters* Clean the air valves in the carburetters. Ensure that the float
chamber lids are securely tightened. Chee!< the oil level in the air valve
dampers. Remove the inlet unions from the float chambers and clenn the filters.
Reset carburetter balance and engine idle speed. Check the cold stnrt idle
speed {and also the idle speed with the refrigeration system operating, if
fitted); reset if necessary.
Control Linkages Apply a few drops of engine oil to the accelerator linkages
;111<1 1.<• 1 ht '.;<'H' range selector· controls adjacent to the transmission casing.
Steering Mechanism *Lubricate the six grease nipples with the approved grease.
Steering Pump {Molbourn Eaton} Renew the filter element in the pump reservoir.
Air Silencer/Filtei: ,:,clean and oil the wire mesh filter elements ,if fitted) or
renew the paper filter elements (if fitted).
Fuel Pumps Remove the fuel pump from the car and test on the bench. Fit a new
pump un.it if the per·fomiance is below the specified level (refer to Chapter K
- .Fuel System of the Workshop Manual).
Hand Brake Linkage Lubricate the pivot pins and pulleys in the hand brake
system with the approved grease. On cars with exposed front cables, dismantle
the pulley housings and pack with ·approved grease.
Spare Wheel Lubricate the spare wheel lowering bolt and mechanism.
Electrical System Ensure that all lamps, instruments and air conditioning
controls are operating satisfactorily.
continued •••
CHAPTER
BP 10. 12. 69 D
...:...;=======
-··-;;~~~-Rov~tSILVER SHAoow
ANO BENTLEY T S§,RIES
EiiffiAl=ffillilli No. SY/D14
- 9
Alternator (if fitted) Examine the slip rings and brushes for wear and check
the brushes for freedom of movement in their holders (refer to Chapter M -
The Electrical Section of the Worl<shop Manual).
Generator ( if fitted) Examine the comrm.1tator :md brushes for wear and the
brushes for freedom of movement in their holders (refer to Chapter M - The
Electrical Section, of the Workshop Manual).
Final Drive >:•Drain when hot and refill with an approved oil.
Fuel Tani~ Remove the drain plug .a.nd allow any accurrulated water to drain away.
Add four S.B.N. Inhibit.ors to the fuel tank, after fitting the drain plug.
Fuel Filter Renew the main line filter element and clean the filter bowl.
Height C~>~1i r:)' :,h-•.ii..:i-,isrn Disconnect the control valve linkage ball joints.
Clean, grease and refit the ball joints.
Rear Wheel -
Dr-ive-Shaft
-- - Lubricate the rear wheel drive-shaft outer universal
couplings with an -
approved grease.
Check the FollCJ_l_ving.~~vels and Pressures Check the fluid level in the power
steering pump reservoir and top-up if necessary.
Check the level and specific gravity of the engine coolant and correct if
necessary.
Check the level of electrolyte in the battery and top-up with distilled
water if necessary.
Check the fluid level in the steering idler box damper and top-up i f necessary.
Run the engine for four minutes then check the hydraulic reservoir fluid
levels; top-up if necessary.
On Drophead Coupe cars, check the fluid level in the hood mechanism reservoir
and top-up i f necessary.
Check the tyre pressures and adjust if necessary.
SPECIAL SERVICES
These Special Services are not nonnal servicing arrangements and will be
carries out only at the Owner's request. It is emphasised that it is the
responsibility of the Service Manager to advise the Owner when these Special
Services are due and that in the interests of safety they should be carried
out at the specified distance/time intervals.
continued •••
EP CHAPTER))
10.12.69
ROLLS ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
4

;::·S.ERVJ'CE
. .. ..
•, '. .
E3ULLETIN
.
No.SY/014
- 10 -
SEASONAL SCHEDULES
EVERY 'IWELVE l\,ONTHS
Engine Cooling System Drain the coolant from the radiator and the engine
crankcase. Clean any debris from the surfaces of the refrigeration condenser
and radiator matric~s by reverse flushing with a hose. This should be carried
out just prior to the Autumn. 'Fill the system with the correct anti-·freeze
mixture or inhibited solution. (See Chapter L of the Workshop Manual).
A.ir Comli1 ioning .Syslt'ffl Ensure that the foam filter element fitted to the
scuttle intake grille is free from obstruction. On Long Wheelbase cars
fitted w i i::.h a centre div r.s ion, f'heck that. thP. foam filter element fitted to
the intake grille in the rear decking panel is free from obstruction.
Refrigeration System (if fitted) These operations should be carried out

only by an experienced refrigeration engineer.
Check that. thP. refrigeration system is functioning correctly. If necessary,
top-up the system with refrigerant. If loss of refrigerant is evident, check
the systP.m for leakage. Visually check the refrigerant compressor for oil
leakagP., if oil leakage is apparent check the oil level and top-up if
necessary. In the event of a major oil loss check and repair before topping-
up (refer to Workshop Manual T.S.D. 2217 - Air Conditioning (Refrigeration),
for full instructions).
Check lhat the body drain holes are free from foreign matter.
EVERY 'IWO YEARS

In addition to the 12 monthly ~chedule, carry out the follON ing.
Eng.i.ne Cool in~ Sysl.t>m

Drain the coolant from the radiator and engine crank,-
case. Thoroughly reverse flush the coolant passages with a continuous flON of
water. Change the C'OOlant hoses where necessary. Fit a new engine coolant
thermostat. Fill the system with the correct anti-freeze mixture or inhibited
solution.
continued ....
10. 12.69 CHAPTER 0

BP
ROLLS~ROYCE SILVER SHAOOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES <s:eRvlcE
~ .. ~ =:. - .• > '
suLLET1
No.SY/014
- 11 -
SERVICE RECO\iMENDATIONS
BRAKE AND HYDRAULIC SYSTEJ~ COMPONENTS
48 ,UOl) Miles (80000 km.) At this mileage and under normal motoring conditions
it is recommended that llw following servicing is carried out.
Renew the following flexible high pressure hoses: the front and rear brake
pumps to accumulator hoses; the front and rear accumulator to frame hoses.
Rene.v the disc brake caliper seals, the deceleration conscious pressure
limiting valve seals, and the master cylinder seals. Completely drain the
fluid from the hydraulic circuits and then fill with Castrol-Girling Brake
Fluid Amber S.A.E. 70R3. Bleed the braking systems and automatic height
control sys tern.
96,000 Miles (HiO(X)O km.) At this mileage and undernormal motoring conditions
it is reconuneruk'<I that the following servicing is carried out.
Renew all thP. flexible hoses Lo the braking systems and the automatic height
control system. Renew the disc brakes caliper seals, the deceleration
conscious pressure Li.mi ting valve seals and the master cylinder seals.
Completely drain the fluid from the hydraulic circuits and then fill with
CastroJ--Girling Brake Fluid Amber S.A.E. 70R3. Bleed the braking systems
and automatic height control system.
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS
Sl10uld the car be used in very coid temperatures, drain the engine sump
when thoroughly wann and also drain the carburetter air valve dampers. The
engine sump and carburetter air valve dampers should tl1en be filled with
oil having the follo..ving viscosity.
For constant temperatures of between O0 C and -230 C (320 F and -100 F), use a
lGV/30 grade oil.
For con8tant temperatures of -23°c (-10°F) and below, use a SW/20 grade oil.
HP 10. 12.69 CHAPTER D

= ROLLS•ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
No. SY/1)15
and Retailers
CATECDRY C
OIL ROCa.vJMENDATIOO STICKERS
APPLICABLE TO:
PROCEDURE
During an engine oil change it is conmon practice amongst Distributors and

Retailers to affix a sticker to some convenient point, indicating the
mileage at which the next oil change is due and recommending a certain brand
of oil for topping-up purposes.
To avoid confusion it is most important that such stickers

should be affixed on, or as near as is physically possible to,the appropriate
fill er cap, i.e. the stickers for the engine oil to be af_fixed on or by
the engine oil filler cap.
CHAPTER
BP/JC' 7.7.70 D
---· ____. ___Ro/ls-floyce 8 llentley Motor
_..._ -........·~------··---·--- ··-- -- S·t·rvice
,,............,""_'_'" .............................
Cars 8:<'.··--·th1
-- -··-··-··-~
... ...
Circulation All Distributors and Section D
Retailers Bulletin No SY/D16
Page No 1
Date 14.9.71
CL\TEGORY C
,!!EAT~. FEED HOSE REPLACE\iENT
APPLICABLE TO
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Corniche cars an.ct all Bentley
T Series and Corniche cars after Car Serial Nurnber 3000 and all
those cars prior to this number fitted with refrigeration.
D~CRIP1'ION
The heater on the above cars takes its feed from the high pressure
side cf the coolant pump and as a consequence the heater feed hose
is more highly stressed than other hoses in the system.
It is therefore recommended that in future at all 24 month

Seasonal Services the heater feed hose, Part No. UE 12961, is
always renewed.
As previously recOIMlended all other coolant hoses should
be inspected and ren~h~d as necessary.
) Arr/JCl
«;) Rolls-Ao',·ce Motors Limited 1971

CHAPTER E
ENGINE
ROLLS"ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
No. SY/E2
CA.TE.GORY A
ACCELERATOR PEDAL Cl.AMPING LEFT--HAND DRIVE CARS
APPLICABLE TO:
Left-hand Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow Standard and Coachbuilt cars.

Left-hand Bentley T Series Standard and Coachbuilt cars.
DESCRIPTIOO
A new lever which clamps the accelerator pedal more securely is being fitted
on production cars and it has been decided to modify all left-hand drive cars
in Service.
'Ille modification requires the changing of the lever and clamp which
secures the accelerator pedal. The lever is easily seen from underneath
the car at the forward end of the undersheet which covers the brake actuation
mechanism. On a number of cars th~ accelerntor pedal itself may have to be
changed. 'Illis is because on early prociuption cars the thl"<>ttle pedal had a
smooth stem whereas later cars had a pedal with a knurled stem to prevent
slipping. It is this later pedal which should be fitted.
One of ~1e knurled stem accelerator pedals will be included in each set
of parts; if the car already has the knurled pedal, the one in the kit should
be returned to the fnctory.
It will not be necessary to order the parts to do the modification as

these will be sent direct to each Retailer, together with a list of the cars
in his area which require modification. This will be done in arrangement
with the Service Pr~notion Department at the factory and any cO!llJl.lnication
concerning the modification should be addressed to the Service Promotion
Manager (Europe) at the Crewe factory.
NOTIFICA.TIOO
When each modification has been completed, the label which is included in
the set of parts should be filled in and despatched to the Technical Services
Department, Crewe, England.
PROCEDlJRE
1. Place the car on a ramp.

Continued •••
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED,. PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
SB/BP 6.12.66. SECTION E

Printed In England
A ND BENTLEY T SERIES
- 2 - Ho. SY/E2
PROCEDURE
1. Place the car on a r~np.
2. Remove the undersheet which covers the brake actuator mechanism.
3. Unscrew the 2 B.A. bolt which secures the accelerator pedal stem and
remove the return spring.
4. Remove the split pin and the link which connects the accelerator pedal
lever to the cross-shaft.
5. Remove the bolt which secures: the lever between the two brackets.
6. Renove the distance tube fr.om the.existing lever.
7. Clean the distance tube and fit it to the new lever.
8. Fit the new lever to the car.
9. Refit the accelerator pedal taking care to ensure that when fitting the
pedal the 2 B.A. nuts and bolts which secure the new clamping piece are
tightened correctly. If the original pedal has a knurled stem it should
be refitted. If the pedal h.as a plain stem, the new pedal provided in
the modification kit should be fitted.
1O. Ensure that the accelerator pedal does not foul the floor aperture during
its full arc of travel.
11. Connect the acceler~tor linkage and refit the undersheet which covers the
brake mechanism.
MATERIAL. REQUIRED
Part Nwnber Description Quantl;t,Y
UR 15422 Assembly lever - accelerator pedal 1 off

UR 15424 Piece - clamping accelerator pedal to lever off
UR 13446 Assembly accelerator pedal 1 off
XC 158/Z Bolt 2 off
X 4404- Washer 2 off
Label 1 off
Continued •••
SB/BP f3 .12. 66. SECTION E

Printed In En1l1nd
AND BIENTLEY T SERIES
- 3 - Ho. SY/E2
The foregoing material will be supplied in kit form,"the kit nwnber

being Modification Kit No.2
MATERIAL DISPLACED
Part Number Description Quantity
UR 14013 Assanbly lever - accelerator pedal l off

UR 10881 Clamping piece - accelerator pedal lever 1 off
Assembly accelerator pedal (smooth stem
pedal) l off
TIME ALLOYED
J .5 hours.
SB/BP 6.12.66. SECTION E

Prfnted In En,land
No. SY/E6
and Retailers.
CATEGORY C
---
THE - ~ E OIL LEVEL INDICATOR
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T series cars produced before car
serial numbers SBH. 5320 and CRH. 5471 {Righ~_-hand drive cars} and SRX. 6565
and CRX. 6610 (Left-hand dri.ve cars). \.
\
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this Service Bulletin is to inform Distributors and Retailers
that in the event of a custaner complaint of oil leak.age from the oil level
indicator joint, the securing setscrews should be fitted with spring washers.
DESCRIPTION
Service experience has shown that the cork gasket which is fitted between the
engine sump and the oil level indicator on the above mentioned cars, reduces in
thickness after a time and thereby slightly alters the torque loading on the
six .3etscrews securing the oil level indicator to the sump. Therefore, to
overcane this, all cars produced after the above mentioned serial numbers
have been fitted with spring washer.s to the securing setscrews to allow for
the settling of the gasket.
PROCEOORF;
1. Remove one of the sump unit securing setscrews, clean the threads and
fit a UD 5033 :-:;pring washer between the screw head and the existing
altuninitun washer.
2, Apply a generous coating of Wellseal canpound to the threads of the screw.
3. Refit the setscrew, torque tightening to 22 lb.in.
4,. Repeat the orocedure on the remaining five ~etscrews.
Continued ••.
CHAPTER
SB/Eek 16. t .69 E
. ',
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVIC.E BULLETIN
- 2 - No. SY/E6
MATERIAL REQUIRED
Pa rt No. Description Quantity
UD 5033 Spring washe r 6 off
TIME ALl.O,YED
• 25 hou·r s .
sa/ ECk CHAPTER

16 . 1. 69 E
Rolls-Royce S1lre1 Shadow ft Bentley TSeries Service Bulletin
SECTION E
Circulation - All Distributors and Bulletin No. Sf/E7
Retailers
Date: 12.11.70 Sheet No.
£ATF.GORY C
CYLINDER. LINERS
A~PLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce and Bentley motor cars fitted .with aluminium

V8 engines.
!?_~SCIUPI'ION
When overhauling Rolls-Royce alu:ninium V8 engin~s, it is sometimes

necessary to remove and renew one or more of the cylinder liners.
Since the liners are retained.by the pressure exerted by the

~ cylinder head studs on the cylinder head, Jt is essential that new
~
C) 1 iners have tho= correct 'nip' measurement. · i.e. protrusion of the
7
.£ liner top face above the face of the crankcase.

C:
It is, therefore, necessary to know accurately the depth

(measu~ed between points 'X' - 'Y' shown in Figure 1) of the crank-
case counterbore at the two points shown in Figure 1. This counter-
bore is machined during manufacture to a depth of 0.324 in. to
o.326 in. (8,2296 nun. to 8,2804 mm.)
When ordering new liners the measured depth ONLY must be

quoted, and liners providing the correct 'nip' will th,~n b~ supplied
by the Crewe Spares Department.
Fitting of the liners should be carried out as descr,ibed in

the workshop Manual - Chapter E - page ElO, T.S.D. Publication 2476.
continued •••
BP/JC
Rolls-Royce Si/re, Shadow fl Bentley TSenes S11r11ice Bulletin
SECTIO.N E
Circulation - All Distribu·cors and Bulletin No. ~/E7

Retailers
Date: 12.11.10 Sheet No. 2
'--- - ---:::::::::::::::=:===----
~ ,,,_.
f (
I
..
"1:1
C
ci,
C:
w
.5
"'E
;f
L 958
Figur~ 1 Counterbore depth measuring P<?!nts

·------
Rolls-Royce Silver Shedow fr Bentley TSeries Sarvice Bulletin
SECTION E
Circulation - AJ.l Distributors Bulletin No. SY/ES

and Retailers
Date: 1.1a71 Sheet No. 1
- --
CATF.GO.RY C
1
90o V' EIGHT ~YLINDER r-EPI.ACB.\'"£N~GINE - SE.R.VICE
APPLICABLE_'l!)_
All Rolls-Royce and Bentley motor cars fitted with aluminium 90° 'v• eight
cylinder engines.
INTROn.JCTIOO
From the 1st January, 1971 all,, replacenent 00° 'V' eight cylinder engines
for .Rolls-Royce and Bentley. motor cars will be supplied to a revised
s_pecifJ.catJ:on.
This change is necessary because it has become .impossible to
stock an adequate range of vee~lght engine specifications to meet world-
wide service requirements. This is because of the very large number of
vee-eight engine specifications which are required to meet the many
differing, domiciliary and legal requfrenents throughout the world.
DESCRI PTICN
An engine built to the revised specification will comprise of a basic
engine unit - crankcase, crankshaft, connecting rods, pistons,
cylinder heads, oil pump, coolant pump, camshaft and valve gear but will
not include inlet manifolds, exhaust manifolds, carburetters, and
air ancillary equipment.. A revised specification engine is illustrated
in Figure 1.
Certain detail engineering improvements and changes will be
applied to all engines built to the revised specification to ensure that
they are of a canmonised standard. The basic unit will be tested in the
factory to ensure that it confonns to our quality standards of
worknanship and materials.
A min.i..mwn range of revised specifications will be available to
meet requirenents and a canplete list of these specifications is
detailed in the following text.
The procedure in service will be that a revised specification
engine will be.supplied and the Distributor or Retailer will then
transfer the ancillary equipnent frcm the old unit to the new one.
Alternatively; and following discussions with the custa:ner, the
following two options are open to Service Personnel concerning the
renewal of ancillary equipnent.
1) That the ancillary units (Starter, Dynamo,etc.) be reconditioned

in accordance with Workshop Manual instructions and re-fitted to
the engine.
Continued ••• o
Ro/ls-Royce Stiver Shadow ft Bentley T Series Service Bulletin
SECTION E
Circulation - All Distributors Bulletin No. SY/E8

and Retailers
Date: 1.1~71 Sheet No,. 2
2) That new or replacement components are fitted from Distributors

or Retailers own stock..
The price of each of these options will vary considerably and
as indicated in the previous paragraph the customer should be contacted
regarding which option he required before any work is undertaken.
The costs involved in removing and replacing the engine unit
and transferring the ancillary components are _£hargeable to the customer.
Should it be necessary to replace an engine under Warranty,

agreement should be obtained from Rolls-Royce Limited before any work
is corrmenced.
In· the United Kingdom, Europe and all countries other than
U.S.A. and Canada, pennission should be obtained from the Service
Promotion Manager at the Crewe factory.
In the U.S.A. penn.i.ssion ~hould be obtained fr(XO the nearest
Rolls-Royce Inc. office or in Canada fran Rolls-Royce Motor Cars Ltd.,
Montreal.
It should be noted that when an engine is replaced under W~rranty
the charges involved in overhauling the ancillary units or supplying
replacement units will not be acceptable under Warranty unless they
have been damaged as a direct result of the engine failure.
ORDERING
When ordering the replacement engine, it is imperative that the correct RS

number, quoted on page 4, is forwarded together with the Car Serial Number.
Please note that the engine to be returned rrrust be of the same specification
as the replacanent unit supplied i.e. less manifolds, carburetters etc.
IDENTIFICATION
These revised specification replacanent engines will be identified

by a serial number stamped on the crankcase or where applicable
on a pedestal by the front of TB' bank cylinder head (see Fig. 1).
Whenever possible please quote this number in any future correspondence
concerning the engine unit.
Rolls-.Royce Silver Shadow & Bentley TSeries Service Bulletin
SECTION E
Circulation - All Distributors Bulletin No. SY/E8
and Retailers
Figure 1 Front and rear view of engine

1. Position of engine serial number stamped on pedestal.
____________ __ - - - - - - -
Rolls-Royce
__:_
Silver Shadow fl Bentley TSeries - -- - --- Service Bulletin
SECTION E
Circulation - AU Distributors Bulletin No. SY/E8
and Retailers
Date: 1 . 1. 71 Sheet No. 4
RANGE· OF REPlACEMENT ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
The canplete range of revised engi.ne specifications is listed below:
~ DESCRIPTION APPLICATIOO'
RSI ~ litre vee-eight engine (Silver Cloud I I

8: 1 compression ratio (Bentley S2
RS2 ~ litre vee-€ight engine (Silver Cloud III

9:1 compression ratio (Bentley S3
(Phantan V
RS3 6% litre vee-eight engine (All L.H.D. and later

9:1 ccrnpression ratio (R.H.D~ Silver Shadow
suitable for cars fltted with (and Bentley T Series
Torque Converter Transmission (prior to Serlal No. 8743
RS4 6~ lit.re vee-eight engine (Early R.H.D. Silver

2 9: 1 compression ratio (Shadow and Bentley
i suitable for cars fitted with R.R. (T Series
21 Four Speed Automatic Gearbox
u
-
::,
~ litre vee-eight engine (LoH.D. and later R.H.D.
I> RSS
i: 8:1 compression ratio ( Silver Shadow and Bentley
t suitable for cars fitted with ( T Series prior . to
Torque Converter Transmission ( Seria'l No. 8743
R56 6J..
litre vee-eight engine (Early R.H.D. Silver
8:1 compression ratio ( Shadow and Bentley T .
suitable for cars fitted with R.R. (Series
Four Speed Automatic Gearbox
RS7 64 litre vee-eight engine (Silver Shadow and

9:1 compression ratio (Bentley T Series from
suitable for cars fitted with (Car Serial Number 6001
Torque Converter Transmission and (prior to Serial No.
engines with Exhaust Emission (8743
Control
RS8 ~ litre vee-eight engine (

9:1 canpression ratio (Phantom VI
suitable for cars fitted with (
the Hydrarnatic Gearbox (
RS9 6\ litre vee--eight engine (

9!1 compression ratio {
(Silver Shadow and
RSlO 6\ litre vee--eight engine (Bentley T Series
9: 1 compression ratio (from Car Serial
suitable for cars fitted with (Number 8743
Exhaust Emission Control (
Rolls.f!oyce Silver Shadow ft Bentley TSeries Service Bulletin
SECTION E
Circulation - All Distributors Bulletin No. SY/£8
and Retailers
Date: 1.1.71 Sheet No., 5
All engines will be supplied completely tested and inhibited

against internal corrosion. In addition each engine will be supplied
with a small pack of parts which will include thermostat, inlet manifold
gaskets, exhaust gaskets and all other minor gaskets and 1 0' rings to
enable the ancillary equiµnent to be transferred from the old unit to
the new one.
PROCEDURE
The procedure involved in transferring the ancillary equipment fron
the old unit to the new unit is straightforward and no problems are
envisaged. However, in the following procedure we have listed the
assembly points which require special attention:
1) Remove original engine unit from the car as detailed in the

appropriate Workshop Manual.
Z) TRANSFER OF COMPQ°"ENTS
2.1 Oil filler neck

"I:)
C
co
Transfer the oil filler neck using the new gaskets supplied.
0
C
lU
C:
2.z Breather pipe
-0
!!:l On early SZ engines the breather pipe is of the non-enclosed
C
variety.. When transferring this to the new engine i't will
a: first be necessary to remove the tappet covers and transfer
the baffle plate covering the breather outlet (see Fig. 2).
Then fit the breather pipe and clip to the back of the
replacement engine.
Fi&!!re ~ M,2dlf~d Baffle shown in oosition.
Continued • ., •••
fi,?//s Roye': Sdver 5/Jadaw & Bentley T Seriqs Service Bulletin
--------~---- - . - ---- --------·
SECTION E
Circulation - i\11 Distri.butors Bulletin No. SY/ES

and Retailers
I::1 the case of those engines fitted with enclosed breather

systems the breather w1ll ue fitted after the inlet manifold and
and carburetters. The breather should be fitted using the 'O'
rings supplied in the kit.
Brake pumps
On Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series engines the brake
pwnps must be fitted to the replacement engine before
fitting the inlet manifold.
When requested to do so, overhaul the brake pumps
as described in the Workshop Manual.
2.• 4 H~raul.ic accwnula tors
On Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series engines transfer
the hydraulic accumula t.ors to ttie ne'W' unit. When
requested, overhaul the accumulators as described in the
.Workshop Manual.
];plet rr.anifold
Transfer the inlet manifold and its associated fittings and
drain pipe using the gaskets supplied.
Fit the by-pass elbow to the water pump using a new
gasket and fit the bobbin witn 1
new
0' rings or where applicable
fit a new hose.
2.6 Thennostat
Fit the new thermostat into its housing and seal with the new
gasket supplied.
2,. 7 Rocker covers

The replacement unit may have Rolls~oyce or Bentley rocker
covers - transfer these as necessary.
2.8 Exhaust manifold

Transfer the exhaust manifold and choke stove pipes.
2.9 Carburetters and linkage
Transfer the carburetter assembly linkages, drain pipes,
feed pipes etc. after removing as described in the
Workshop Manual.
When fitting to the replacement engine use the new
joint supplied to seal the assembly to the manifold.
When requested, overhaul the carburetters as
described in the Workshop Manual. Transfer the engine
oil dipstick and dipstick tube with the carburetters.
The tube is simply pushed into the adaptor on the
swnp.
2.10 Crank.shaft front pulley
The crankshaft assembly will have ueen balanced in the factory
using a slave pulley. Since these pulleys are fully machined
units .it is penn.issible to interchange them.
When the replacement engine is received the castellated
nut securing the adaptor to the front of the crankshaft will have
been fully tightened and the castellations aligned to allow the
lockplate to be fitted.
Continued •••••
Ro/ls-Royce Sl!ve, Siiadow /J Bentley TSeries SsrvicB Bulletin
----------- · - - - - ·- ----------------
SECTION E
Circulation - All Distributor·s Bulletin No. SY/ES
and Retailers
Date: lol.71 Sheet No. 7
Therefore, to fit the crankshaft pulley simply remove the

five setscrews retaining the lockplate and the lockplate itself.
Fit the pulley onto the adaptor over the castellated nut.
Note The location of the damper and pulley is by
dowels in the adaptor plate.
Fit the lockpla te and tighten the setscrews.
2 .. 11 Coolant pump pulle,'l'.

Fit the coolant pump pulley and the various pipes to the coolant
pump.
2.12 Steering pump .,

In the case of cars fitted with Sagin::i.w steering pumps, fit the
idl,er pulley for the water pump belts to the front of the
crankcase transferring the pivot bolt from the old unit.
Fit the brackets from the old unit to the replacement
engine for the Saginaw steering pump and/or fridge compressor
and/or alternator or dynamo.
F_it the Saginaw or Hotiourn Eaton steering pump. On
cars fitted with refrigeration equiJJ11entt fit the refrigeration
canpressor.
Fit the dynamo or alternator.
Fit new belts to the water pump drive, steering pump
drive, alternator or dynamo drive and compressor drive.
When requested, overhaul the above itans as described in
the relevant sections of the appropriate Workshop Manual.
2.13 Starter m.Q!2!:

It will not be possible to fit the starter motor until the
engine is mated with the gearbox Torque Converter Transmission.
On those cars fitted with Torque Converter Transmission
however, it may be necessary to fit packing washers between the
mating faces of the starter mo~or and the crankcase. Determine
the number of packing washers required as described in the
Workshop Manual, Chapter M - Electrical System. When requested,
overhaul the starter motor as described in the Workshop Manual.
2.14 Distributor and coil

Transfer the distributor and coil to the replacement unit following
the fitting procedure described in the respective Workshop Manual.
It is recommended that new contact points are fitted to
the distributor.
A~ an initial setting the ignition timing should be set
statically. It should be rechecked.once the engine has been
started with a stroboscopic lamp to the settings detailed in
the Workshop Manual. .
Fit the.ignition harness to the replacement engine.
---------
Ro//s-&yce Sliver ~/Jadow [! Benr/ey TSe11es
-· - - ------·-- - - - - ··- Ssrt1ice Bulletin
SECTION E
Circulation - All Distrit>utors Bulletin No. SY/E8
and Re tailers
Date: 1.1.71. Sheet No. 8
2.15 Emission Cum rol Svs tEJn
On cars fitted with thi s equ i pment it i s VERY IMPORTANT
tha t t he carburetters a re reset to give the correct exhaus t
eTiission levels as described in Workshop Manual T.S.D. 2476
- Chapter U.
It i s recomnended with Silver Shadow a nd Bentley T

Series engines that the hydrauli c sys t em is equ i pped with
the rigid brake pump to accumula t or pipes before the engine
is fitted to the front sub-frame.
Certain early Silver Shadow and Bentley T Seri es
engines fran Right41and Drive cars had a heater take off
point from the back of 'B' bank cylinder head. All
replacement Silver Shadow engines will have heater feed
and return from the ~ter pump casing and this previous
connection blanked off. It is to be noted t herefore
that when fitting a r eplacement engine to one of these
early Silver Shadow a nd Bentley T Series cars the rear
hea t er connections are to be used. This will involve
using the later t ype of heater hose UD 12961.
The replacement engine may now be fitted to the
front sub-frame as described in t he Workshop ~nual.
New coolant hoses snould be used for the radiator
to engine, heater to engine and transmission oil cooler
to engine connections .
TIME AL~ED
For the transfer of canponents as described on the preceeding
pages with both engi ne units out of the sub- frame the following
times are allowed.
All other itsns i ncluding ass€mb l y and replacement of
engine uni t are as shown in the Man-hour schedule:
S2 Series engines with non-encl osed breather pipe. 6.75 hrs.
S2 Series engines with enclosed breather pipe and

S3 Series engines for those cars without r efrigeration
equlpnent. 6.00 hrs.
S2 and S3 Series engines for those cars fitted with

refrigeration. 6 . 25 hrs.
Silver Shadow and Bent ley T Series engines for those

cars without refrigeration equipnent. 7.50 hrs.
Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series engines for those

cars fitted wi th refrigeration equipmen t . 7.75 hrs.
Silver Shadow and aentley T Series engines for those

cars fitted with exhaust emission control equi{JTlent. 9o25 hrs.
BP/ JC
Service Bulletin issued for •vee• Eight Cylinder engines
Circulation All Distributors Section E
and Retailers Bulletin No SY/E9
Page No 1
Date 16. 2. 71 •
CATEGORY C
'VEE' EIGHT ENGINE CAMSHAFTS
APPLICABLE TO
All Rolls-Royce and Bentley vee-eight cylinder engined motor cars.
DES:::RIPTION
A new camshaft be,i.ng used in current production engines is. now being
supplied for service replacement purposes.
The new camshaft incorporates wider eccentrics, to operate the
brake pumps, and a change to the lubrication of its thnist face.
0
e
tO
The groove incorporated in p,revious camshafts (see Fig. 1) has
a been deleted and the thrust plate now has a chamfer machined on the
..,
c::
thrust side of the central hole (see Fig~ 1) •
s
C
!l The camshaft will be supplied for replacement purposes in all
C
f vee-eight cylinder engined cars with the exception of early Rolls-Royce
Silver Cloud Mark II and Bentley S2 motor cars which have a different
camshaft bearing lubrication system (see Service Bulletin S2/E1).
When the new camshaft is fitted as a replacement it is most

important that a small 45°chamber is formed on the thn.ist plate as
shown in Fig. 1. This may be done by careful use of a half-round
file known to be in good condition.
Continued •••

Rolls-Royce ft Bentley Motor Cars Servic, Bulletin
Service Bulletin issued for 'Vee• EighL Cylinder engines
Circulation · All Dis tr ihutors Section E
and Retailers Bulletin No SY/£9
Page No 2
Date 16.2.71.
:-,-
1 2 3
1~c
A B
M 182
Figure l - New camshaft and thrust plate
A - Old type camshaft and thrust plate

1. Lubrication groove
2. Thrust plate
3. Camshaft
B - New type camshaft and thrust plate
C - Inset - showing enlarged view of modified
thrust plate
l. Camshaft
2. Lubrication groove
3. Chamfered thrust plate.
I © Rolls•Royce Limited 1971

Ro/ls-Royce fl Bentley Motor Cars Ssrvit:B Bulletin
and Retailers Bulletin No SY/E 1o
Page No 1 of 6
Date 25. s. 71
CATEGORY C
ENGINE DRIVE BELTS

APPLICABLE 10
All Rolls--Royce Silver Shadow and Corniche cars .

All Bentley T Series and Corniche cars.
DESCRIPTION
Since the initial introduc t ion of t he above motor cars s everal

configurations of bel t drives have been adopted to cater for the
various modifications and addi tions to the engi ne ancilliaries.
This Bulletin shows alJ the various belt layouts giving t he
relevant Rolls -Royce part numbers . The dimensions of t he belts
have -also been given to enable substitute belts to be fi tted only
in an emergency. It must be s tressed, however, that such belts
must onl,X be us ed in extreme circumstances and only t he finest
quality be_lts available must be used.
When substitute belts have been fitted, they should be
exchanged for genuine Rolls --Royce bel ts at the earlies t opportunity.
A. Early car::; - Hobourn Eaton steering pump and dynamo

Cranks haft - Coolant pump - Dynamo 'vee' belt .., Part No. UE 31126
Crankshaft - Coolant pump - Steering pump 'vee~ belt - Part No. UE 32658
·i.... (0 Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce fl Bentley Motor Cars Servic, Bull,tin
Page No 2 ·or 6
Date 25.s. 71
B. Early cars - Saginaw steering 1,urnp and dvnamo

Crankshaft - dynamo - steering pump 'vee' belt - Part No. UE 34563
Crankshaft - coolant pump (jockey pulley) 'vee' belt - Part No. UE 34569
Early cars - Hobourn Ear:on st~erirn~ 1,ump and Refrigerant compressor

Crankshaft - Coolant pump - Steering pLUilp 'vee' belt - Part No. UE 32658
Crankshaft - Alternator - Compressor 'vee' belt - Part No. UE 31386
(C) Rolls-Royce Motors l1m1ted 1971

Ro/ls-Rpyce u8en1/ey Motor Cars Service Bulletin
_Service Bulletin issued for
and Retailers Bulletih No SY/E 10
Page No · 3 of 6
Date 25. s. 71
D. =
Later cars - Saginaw steering pump Alternator and Refrigerant
compressor
Crankshaft - Steering pump - Compressor 'vee' belt - Part No. UE 36817)
or )
UE 37811)
Crankshaft - Coolant pump (jockey pulley) 'vee' belt Part No. UE 34569
Coolant pwnp - Alternator - ' vee' belt - Part No. UE 37058
E. Later cars - Saginaw steering pump. refrigerant. can.pressor -

Alterna t.or and Exhaust erniss :_on control eqlltipment
As D, including
Coolant pump -Air pump - 'vee' belt Part No. UE 33677
·i..,. (C) Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 19n

and Retailers Bulletin No SY/ElO
Page No 4 or 6
Date 2r..a.11
F. Later cars - 1.2: 1 Coolant pump drive - Saginaw steeriru?: pump -

Refrigerant compressor
Crankshaft - Steering pump - Compressor 'vee 1 belt - Part No. UE 36817
Crankshaft - Coolant pump (jockey pulley) 'vee' belt - Part No. UE 36361
or
UE 37810
Coolant pump - Alternator 'vee' belt - Part No. UE 37079
or
lJE 37812
·I C) Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce fl Bentley Motor Cars Sentie, Bulletin
Jiervice Bulletin issued for
Page No 5 of 6
Date 25.8.71
G. Later cars - 1.2: 1 Coolan t pump driv e - Saginaw steering pump -

Refrigerant compressor - Exhaust emission control equipment
As F including -
Coolant pump -Air pump 'vee' belt - Part No. UE 36360
or
UE 36363
·I.... «:) Rolts-Rovce Motors Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce ft Bentley Mo1or Cars Service Bulletin
and Retailers Bulletin No SY /E 10
Page No 6 of 6
Date 25. 8. 71
TAJ!L.E OF BELT mME'ISI<NS
Part. Effec tJ.ve Lengtl', Insicte Ci. l'Clllllference <>.Jtside Cil'Olfflt'erMCe Top IUdU, Ansi e
lullber in. (on.) ln. ( aa.) ln. («:111.) ln. (cm.) (in degrees)
UE 31126 47.250 46.000 0 .4062 - 0.4312 4-00

(120,01) ( 116,84) (10,31)- (11,11)
UE 52658 44,750 43.562 0.4062 - 0,4312 400

(111,95> ( 109,34) 110 ,32)- (11, 10)
UI! MS63 56,980 55.&U 58,000 0,4062 - 0.4312 40°

(142,47) ( 139,BA) 1147,32) ( 10,32)- ( 11, 10)
UE M.569 35.000 33.937 36.000 0.375 - 0,400 400

(88,90) (84,05) ( 91,44) (9,52) - (D,16)
~ 36360 .?8,500 27.375 29,531 0.406 - 0.431 •·:P

( 71,24) ( 69,53) (73,79) (10,318) - (11,11)
UE 56361 3:S,700 32.594 34.75 0 .396 - 0.421 400

(83,99) (81 ,43) ( 88,55) ( 10,05) - ( 10,69)
UE 36363 29.000 0.375 - 0.4 25 4-0"

(73,66) (9,52) - ( 10, 79)
UE 36817 63.000 0.4062 - 0.4312 400

(160,02) ( 10, .11) - ( 10,94)
UE 37058 35.800 34.562 36.625 0.375 - o.400 400

(86,51) (86,50) ( 91,59) (9,52) - ( 10, 16)
UI! 37079 M.200 0 .375 - 0.425 4-00

(86,87) (9,52) - (10,79)
UE 37810 34.646 0,374 - 0.425 4 0°

(86,52) (9,49) - ( 10, 79)
UE 37812 34.84a 0 ,374 - 0.425 400

(8(;,52) j ( 9,49) - ( iO, 79)
Arr/JC1;1Uy
·I CO Rolls-Aovce Motors Limited 1971

·-·-- _________. . _.Rolls-Royce
_______ fl Bentley.______
Motor Cars··-------·-----H . . . . _____ -..U'
.Service Bulletin issued for
and Retailers Bulletin No SY/£11 (Issue 2
Page No 1
Date 14. 10. 71
CI\.TEGORY C
CAMSHAFT AND.. HYDRAULIC TAPPETS
APPLICI\DLE TO
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Ser.ies cars and all
Rolls-Royce and Bentley Corniche cars.
Engines in cars prior to SRX 2499 (four door saloon cars) and
CRX. 2672 (Coachbuilt cars) were fitted with !hardenable iron'
tappets. OwJng to the wear character is tics of these tappets it
was not permissible to fit new tappets to a used camshaft since
this usually resulted in rapid and. uneven wear of not only the
tappet but also the camshafto
Later engi:ies however are fitted with the 'chilled cast'

type of tappet and provided the camshaft is not abnonnally 'scuffed',
pitted or unevenly worn it is permissible to fi. t new 'chilled cast'
tappets to a used camshaft in both earl.ier and !al.er engines.
A number of camshafts have·been renewed recently on the grounds

of having worn below the limits quoted in the Workshop Manual. It
should be ronembered that these figures are only intended to be used
as a guide when an engine is being reconditioned throughout and arc
such as to ensure that the camshaft will give a reasonable reconditioned
engine mileage.
The camshaft ls 'chilled' to a depth of 0.2S in. (6,35 mm.)

thus it may be seen that the cam lobe is hardened to very nearly its
eatire depth. There is therefore no reason ¥.tly new 'chilled cast'
tappets should not be fl tted to a camshaft worn below the limits
stated in the Workshop Manual p1·ov.i.ded the cam5haft lobes are not
abnormally I scuffed', pitted or tmevenly or appreciably worn below
I.uni ts.
Re-issued to amend text in second paragraph.

SY/Ell dated 17.9.71 should be removed and destroyed.
CHAPTER F
PROPELLER SHAFT AND
UNIVERSAL JOINTS
CHAPTER G
HYDRAULICS
BRAKING AND HEIGHT CONTROL
SYSTEMS
=============:-=:·===- -... ·;...-:-·_----·-- -
=============== ---·-
No. SY/G2
CATEGORY 2
HYDRAULIC FLUID FEED PIPES AND CONNECTION~

TO THE REAR DISC BRAKE CALIPERS
APPLICABLE TO;
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow

Bentley T Series
DESCRIPTION
It is possible that when the rear suspension has contacted one of its bump stops
during cornering, the metal pipes which supply master cylinder fluid to the
upper cylinder of the rear disc brake calipe~ and also the pipes which bridge
over the caliper can touch against the car body causing a noise.
To eliminate this possibility, ext1'a clearance has been provided by

modifying the pipes and their connections to each reor disc brake caliper and
fitting a shorter bleed screw to each lower cylinder.
The modification was introduced on production in two stages <JS follows.
Stage 1
Modified bridge pipes fitted.
Stage 2
M::>dif ied feed pipes and connections flt ted with the short type lower bleed screws.
Due to the two stages of modification, there are cars in Service which require
Stages 1 and 2 of the modification and also a group of cars which will require only
Stage 2.
To enable you to decide which stages of m:,dification are necessary, the car
should be placed on a ramp and the configuration of the pipes and their connections
checked against the illustrations.
Continued •••
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE. ENGLAND
SB/MP 6.5.66. SECTtON G

Printed In England
= == = =R O
=L=
LS= · =RO
AND = BENTLEY
Y=C=E = S T R =SERIES
= l =LV=E= S
= H=A=D O
=W 1:::11111tWl~
= = = =P . ! _ , ! ' i ' P ' . ~!tf f l
~ ~ ~
1•1'1.:1.:i;a•
= =- • : -._,.. - •• • "'f • 4. I•, .,. _r • •
- 2 - No. SY/G2
A C
Fig.1 Rear disc brake calipers
A. Original brake pipework B. Stage 1 modification C. Stage 2 modification
1. Bridge pipe 3. Banjo connection 6. Bleed s crew ( short type)

2. Feed pipe from master 4. Banjo bolt 7. Feed pipe from pov.er
cylinder s. washers s ource
PROCEDURE
Ir any stages or the modification are necessary, chock the front wheels.
Place the gear range selector lever in the neutral position and remove
the thennal cut-out from the fuse board below the racia.
Continued •••
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED , PYM'S LANE , CREWE, ENG LAND
SB/MP 6.5.66. G
SECTION
Printed In England
'
ROLLS-ROYCE S tL VER SHADOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE
. BULL"E"TiN
. .
- 3 - No. SY/G2
With the .ignition switched off, puJtt> the brake pedal 50 or 60 times to
depressurise the system. Confirm that the system is de~ressurised by switching
on the ignition and observing that both red warning lights are illuminated, then
switch off the ignition.
Jack up the rear end of the car and place stands in position as described
in Chapter Hof the Workshop Manual (T.S.D. 2205).
Remove the rear wheels.
~tage 1
Disconnect the bridge pipe ( not colour coded) from each rear disc brake caliper
and fit the ITK)dified bridge pipe.
Stage-2
Unfasten the clips securing each of the two metal pipes which run along the top
of each trailing arm.
.' ~\
'
Disconnect each metal pipe (colour coded - one green the other blue) from
its flexible pipe and also from the caliper, then re!TK)ve the pipes.
Fit the modified (green coded) pipe with its banjo connection to each
caliper and reconnect to each flexible pipe.
Fit the modified (blue coded) pipe to each caliper and to each flexible
pipe.
Secure the pipes to each trailing arm (three clips along each arm).
Remove the long type bleed screw from each lower cylinder and fit the short
type.
Bleed the brakes as described at the end of this Bulletin, fit the ~eels,
remove the stands and f i t the thermal cut-out.
Finally, test the brakes and ensure that no leaks are evident around the
connections which have been disturbed.
Continued •••
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE. CREWE, ENGLAND
SB/MP. 6.S.66. SECTION G

Printed In En,cfanct
PHiPAl=WHiiiil No . SY/G2
- 4 -
Note ~hilst changing pipes ensure that no dirt is introduced into the
hydraulic lines; the utmost cleanliness at au times is essential.
MATERIAL REQUIR~
Part ~ber Description Quantity
Stage 1 CD 4837/8 Bridge pipes off each
(UR 14742/3
..
F~ed pipes from master cylinder 1 off each
( (green code)
(UR 14624/4 Feed pipes from power source 1 off each
Stage 2 ( (blue code)
(UR 14752 Banjo connection 2 off
(UR 14753 Banjo holt 2 off
(UR 14754 Washer - panjo bolt 4 off
(UR 10967 Bleed screw - short type 2 off
TIME ALL(W;AN'.::E
4 hours (this includes the tine allo~ed for hleeding).
BLEEDir-G TI-IE BRAKES
If Stage 1 of the modification only has been carried out, then it will be
necessary to bleed only part of the po~r braking circuit.
If Stages 1 and 2 of the modification have been c.a rried out it will be
necessary for part of the power braking and the whole master cylinder hydraulic
circuits to be bled. It will not be necessary to bleed the rear calipers of
the front disc brakes since no part of this power system should have been dis-
turbed during the lll)dlfication.
Continued •••
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED I PYM'S LANE I CREWE I 'E NGLAND
SB/MP 6.5.66. SECTION G

Prlllt*<I In En1l111d
AND BENTLEY T SERfES SERVICE BULLETIN
- 5 - No. SY/G2
PR<XEDURE
Q_uring all bleeding operations the fluid levels in the reservoir should be
maintained at the correct level as indicated on the sight glass.
The following operations are necessary after either Stage 1 or Stage 2

modification.
Run the engine and observe that the warning lights extinguish.
Connect one end of a tube onto the bleed screw of the front caliper of one
front disc brake and inunerse the other end in a glass container partially filled
with clean bra~~ fluid.
With the engine runningt open the bleed screw and depress the brake pedal.
~~en air free fluid flows throu~h the bleed tube, tighten the bleed screw.
~epeat this procedure at the front · ca ii per of the other front disc brake
and also at the lower bleed screw of each rear disc brake calipe1· (i.e. the
short bleed screw previously fitted).
Switch off the engine.
The following operations are necessary after a Stage 2 modification.
Place the bleed tube onto the upper bleed screw of a rear disc brake caliper.
The free end of the tube should be immersed in clean brake fluid.
Slacken the bleed screw two complete turns while the second operator
depresses the brake pedal with a quick forceful thrust.
Tighten the bleed screw and then allow the pedal to return; allow a few
seconds for the master cylinder to fully recuperate.
Repeat the previous two operations until all air bubbles cease, ond tighten
the bleed screw on the downward stroke.
Continued •••
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE• ENGLAND

'"' - -------------------------------------------
SB/BP 6.5.66. SECTION G
Printed In EnalMd
. . .
=
- 6 - No. SY/G2
Bleed at the upper bleed screw on the other rear disc brake caliper in a
similar manner.
Tighten all bleed screws to a torque of 8 lb.ft. to 10 lb.ft. (1 ,10 kgm. to

1 ,38 kgm.).
Notes The procedure previously described for bleeding the master cylinder
circuit is reconrrnended because great difficulty may be encountered
in removing air i f other methods are adopted. However, if the
brake pedal is thrust downwards too quickly with a top bleed screw
open, it is possible
. ..
to beat the 'G' valve. This condition can be
demonstrated by first slowly depressing the pedal until it strikes
its on-stop and then observing its lowest position. Next, by
striking the pedal extremely fast it can be arrested before it
re~ches the previously observed low point. Under these circum-
stances the master cylinder will not receive 3 full travel delivery
stroke and therefore air-may remain trapped between the 'G' valve
and the master cylinder. Jt ·:should be noted that the above
mentioned condition is possible only when bleeding the master
cylinder circuit.
It is not necessary for the brake distribution valves to be bled.

On later production cars the bleed screws have been dispensed with
at these valves and therefore whenever bleeding brakes in the
future, the distribution ~alves should not be touched even on those
with bleed screws provided.
SECTION
SB/MP 6.5.66. G
Printed In England
ROLLS*ROYCE SH.VER SHADOW
.:
No. SY/G6
FOR INFORMATIOO
PAD RATILE - REAR BRAKE CALIPERS
APPLICABLE TO:
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow Standard and Coachbuilt Cars

Bentley T Series Standard and Coachbuilt Cars
DESCRIPTIOO
Under certain drivi~g conditions a €ontinuous rattle may be heard from the
rear of the car. - On the few occasibns this has occurred, the cause has been
traced to the rear caliper brake pads settling on their abutment faces. This
settling produc~s increased vertical clearances v.hich allav the brake pads too
11n.1ch free movement.
The rattle, resulting from the pads hitting

.... the caliper body, can be
,
heard only when the car is driven as follows.
a. At road speeds between 10 m.p.h. and 20 m.p.h. (13 km.p.h. and 32 km.p.h.).
/
b. On road surfaces having small undulations similar to pave conditions.
c. In quiet surroundings (i.e. off main traffic routes).
The noise cannot be heard under any other driving conditions.
If an Owner complains of a rattle which falls into the above category,

this can be substantiated by driving the car as described previously and, if a
rattle is heard, applying the foot brake very lightly. Should the rattle
cease wi.th the foot brake lightly applied, then the cause is as described
previously.
PROCEDURE
Eliminating the rattle involves the simple exercise of fitting four springs to
the rear brake caliper assemblies (i.e. one spring to each brake pad) as
follows.
Continued •••
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITEO, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, EN~LANO
SB/MP 17. 11 • 66. SECTION G

Printed In En1l1nd
\
::.
- 2 - Ho. SY;t6
Fig.1 Brake pad anti-rattle spri~ position
1 Anti-rattle spring
2 Brake pad locating pins
3 Re·ar brake caliper
4 Locating pln securing clip
1• SUpport the rear of the car at the recommended jacking points and remove
each road wheel ..
2. Remove the securing clip fran each pad locating pin and slide the pins
outward to disengage one pad.
~. Position one anti-rattle spring as shmm in Figure 1 and enter the two
pad locating pins into the spring coils (ioe. one pin into each coil).
4o P.ush the pins inward and througn the coils of the second anti-rattle
spring positioned by the opposite brake pad as shown in Figure 1.
5. Gulde the pins further so that they pass through the brake pad back
plate and into the respective holes in the brake caliper bod,y. Fit the
sec:uring clips into each locating pin.
Continued ......
ROLLS -ROYCE UMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
SECTION
SB/MP 17 .11.66. G
Printed In England
. . . .
ROLLS-AOYC E SILVER SHAQOW
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES .SERV.ICE. BULLE.TIN
.
. . .
.
::.
- 3 - No. SY/G6
6. Using the same procedure, f i t the two remaining springs to the other rear
brake caliper.
Note It is most important that the springs are fitted only in the
positions indicated in Figure land not the reverse way round.
MATERIAL REQUIRED
Part Number Description Q\Aantity
CD.492.8 Brake pad anti-rattle springs 4 off

(2 per rear
caliper)
TIME ALLOVED
0.2 hours (each caliper)
SECTION
SB/MP 17 .11 • 66. G
Printed fn Englaftd
. ':' :, . . ·:'.:::: ~ :. . . . . ·' /··: ..
No. SY/G7
CATEGORY A
HYDRAULIC ACC.'U\1:t.JLATORS AND

ASSOCIATED HOSE ~NECTIOOS
APPLICABLE TO:
Rolls-Royce Silver Sha<;tow Standard and Coachbuilt Cars

Bentley T Series Standard and Coachbuilt Cars
INTROOOCTIOO
Through the.. ~olls-Reyce Engineering Policy of always continuing to test new

and alternative materials, with the obJect of improving upon selected design
features on current production cars, evidence has arisen Ythlch reveals that
the acc1J1rulator valve housings and certain of their associated noses can be
marrufactured to give a considerable increase in their working, factor of safety,
and at the same time provide simplified·:methods of manufacture.
'
The increases in safety have primarily ·been achieved by producing the

accumulator valve housings from steel instead of aluminium. Altering the
internal dimensions of certain hose end connections has had the effect of
substantially improving their fluid sealing capacity.
It has been decided to incorporate these improvements onto the limited

rwmber of cars at present in service, because of the increased long .tenn
advantages which they offer.
Since it has been decided to standardise these featu~es, the most

satisfactory expedient to ensure that ca.rs at present in se.rvlce receive the
improvements, will be to recall cars into a service depot and fit the necessary
components.
A separate communication will be issued shortly giving details of the

car numbL:rs and the date when they are to be called into a s~rvice depot.
Sufficient material will be made availabl-= at trot .ti.me for the completion
of the modification.
Continued •• ~
SB.MP 17 .11 .66. SECTION G

Prl11ted In En&llftd
.
:.
- 2 - No. SY/G7
DESCRIPTIOO
11\e canponents to be renewed are the two accumulator valve housing assemblies
canplete, and the two short length pressure hoses (l.~. one from each
accumulator valve housing) each of which connects to the small junction block
attached to the body sidemember.
Note The accumulr-itor spheres do not require renewal ' since they are
already manufactured from steel.
PROCEDURE
You will be informed by a separate cooununication which cars you are required to
modify, unless of course'the mnt~rial is supplied for a car which has an
accwnulator- .hose leaking.
When the car is on the premises and the material to carry out the
modification is available, the following procedure should be adopted.
1• De-pressurise the hydraulic system:~
2. Remove the left-hand front road wheel.
3. Slacken each accumulator sphere from its aluminium valve housing whilst
the housings are still secured to the engine crankcase (see Chapter G -
Section GS of the Workshop Mani.ml) •
4. Using the existing small 'O' ring re-fit immediately, the accwnulator
charging valve cap. 'Ill.is ensures that the nitrogen gas is not allowed
to escape from the sphere.
5. Remove the accumulator valve hou'sings as described in Chapter G - Section

G8 of the Workshop Manual.
6~ Using a new large 'O' ring provided in the kit, hand tieh~en each
accumulator sphere on to the new steel accwnulator valve housing asse'1}bly.
7. Re-fit the accumulator assemblies to the engine crankcase.then, fit the

new hoses and tit:;hten all connections. Refer to Service Bulletin SY/G4.
8. Remove the sphere charging v::dve cap and torque tighten each sphere to
its valve housing to between 55 lb.ft. and 60 lb.ft. (7,60 kgm. and
8,24 kgm.. ).
Continued •••
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED• PYM'S LANE• CREWE, ENGLAND
SECTION
SB/MP 17 .11 .66. G
Printed In En,l111d
AND BENTLEY T Sf RI ES SERVICE BULLETIN
=-
- 3 - No.SY;U7
9. Using a new small '(f ring provided in the kit, re-fit and tighten
inmediately, the charging valve cap on to each sphere.
Note. 'Ihe modification kit of parts does not include pressure switches.
The existing ones rrust be removed from the aluminium valve
housings and fitted to the steel valve housings.
1o. Run the engine to pressurise the hydraulic systems and check that no
leaks are evident around the connections disturbed.
11. Bleed the necessary parts of the hydraulic systems as described in

Chapter G - Section G3, Page 13 of the Workshop Manual.
MATERIAL REQUIRED
Part No. Description Quantity
UE.34584 Steel Housing Assy. 2 off

UR.15246 Pressure Hose 1 off
UR.15249 Pressure Hos~:. 1 off
UE .10376 1 1
0 Ring U1rg·e 2 off
UE.10149 'O' Ring Sma.l;-1 2 off
MATE.RIAL REMOVED
Disposal of the parts removed is very important since the valve housing assemblies
are required for stripping so that certain of the internal components may be
reclaimed. All valve housing assemblies should therefore be returned to the
"actory as soon as possible and should not be retained at the service depot.
The two pressure hoses and four 'O' rings can be considered as scrap.
They must never be used again.
NOTIFICA~OO OF MODIFICATION CCMPLETED
As soon as the modification- has been incorporated on any one car, the label which
accompanied the new components should be completed and returned to the factory
addrees provided.
TIME ALLOVED
5 hours (both accumulators).
ROLLS •ROYCE LIMITED• PYM'S LANE. CREWE• ENGLAND
SB/MP -17 .11 .66. SECTION G

Printed In En,cland
ROLLS• ROYC F. SIL VER SHAO OW
AND IBEN TL£Y T SER U:S
---
No. SY/G9
CATEGCRY A
BRAKE CALIPER SEC{Ji~.T~,.3. SETSCREWS
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series Standard 9 Long Wheelbase
and Coachbuilt cars prior to Car Number 1800.
!!ill!QDUCTI~
Whilst cars are ori your premises for the modification action detailed in Service
Bulletin SY/G7, you should also carry out an additional operation detailed below •
.This operatio_n _si,mply .enta.ils a,_ tJrque tightness check on the setscrews which
secure the_. brake calipers to their mounti_ngs • and the rear hub assemblies to
their traillng arms.
The followlng 11st contains the setscre.ws,~which require checking against the
torque figures provided.
Setscrews '!\:>ro!.Jt"
- 'i'i"'hten
to Furt.he!'....:..:=:;;
- •__________
Rear Caliper to Hub Assembly 4 off 60 lb.f't. to 65 lb.ft.

(2 per caliper) (8,3 kgmo to 8,99 kgm.)
Rear Hub Assembly to Trailing off

8 60 lb.ft. to 65 lb.ft.
Arm (4 per assembly) (8,5 kgm. to 8,99 kgm.)
Front_Callper to Hub Ass~nbly 8 off 42 lb.ft. to 45 lb.ft.
( 2 per caliper) (5,81 kgm. to 6,22 kgm.)
If, when attempting to FURTHER TIGHTEN, a setscr.e,,,v turns at a torque figure

below those llsted, then that setscrevi, must be removed and the surface onto
which the setscrew head seats be inspected for signs of contamination (i.e.
palntt burrs around the hole edges etc.). Any such contamination must be
ranoved and the same setscrew fitted and tlghtened to the specified torque
figure after flrst ~suring thnt its mating face .is free from bm·rs etc.
Continued •••

------------
Printed In En&ilftd
AND BENTLEY T SERIES .SERVICE BULLETIN
- 2 - No. SY/G9
Because of the difficulty in positioning a torque spanner onto the top

securing screw of each rear caliper~ it will be sufficient to check the tightness
of these two setscrews by feel using an open jawed spanner.
Note When checking the torque tightness of the individual setscrews,

it is important that the check be carried out by attenpting to
FUR'IHER TIGHTEN the setscrews.
If a setscrew is found to rotate at a torque figure below ~ose specified

and after you have completed the necessary action, you should then ·supply the
Technical Services Department, Rolls-Royce Limited, Crewe with the relevant
details.
IDENTI FICATICJS
After the check has been completed on a car, a spot of blue paint should be
applied to the head of one setscrew of each brake caliper.
TIME ALLOVANCE
0.1s hours.
ROLLS •ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

Prl11tect 111 Enahuul
No. SY/Gl 1
CATBJORY C
BRAKE PAD INSPECT!~
APPLICABLE TO:
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series Standard and Coachbuilt Cars
DESCRIPTION
Inspection of all the brake pad linings should be carried out every 6 1 (X)() miles
(10,(X)() km.) as indicated ~n the S~rvice Schedules.
The _pu·r.1:1ose of these inspections i~ to ensure that sufficient brake pad

lining is available to cover a further 6,(X)() miles (10,0X> km.) of service
life, thus preventing the possibility of the lining metal back plate fran
contacting the brake disc~
The thickness of the linings sho1,1ra; therefore, be measured. If the

linings are worn to ·wl thin O. 125 in. ( 3. 18 lllll.~·) or 1 ess of the back plate,
the brake pad assemblies should be renewed as described in Chapter G, Page
G48 of the Workshop Manual.
Should the linings be worn al.most to the minimum thickness limit of

0.125 in. (3.18 mm.), the decision of whether to renew the linings or not
should be influenced by the rnarmer in which the car is driven. If the
OWner is knmvn to be a fast driver, it would be advisable to renew the brake
pad assanblies; if the car is driven at moderate speeds, the existing pad
assernblles may be left in situ until the next 6,(X)() miles (10,000 km.)
service.
ROLLS •ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGlAND
SB/EC 5.6.61. SECTION G

Printed In En1tllld
- -===============- -- -- --
. . ··-·····-··
-A -- -.. _. ----- ----
ROLLS-ROYCE SILVER SttACO~N
ANO BEN TLf.Y T SIER1£S
=========== ---~ --;·_-_-;_--- =-;:-.~=;:;;;.._..;...__
No. SY/GlS
APPLICABLE TO~
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley 'T' Series cars produced prior to car
number 3384.
DESCR.IPTICN
A case has occurred in service where a faulty linkage pin in the brake actuating
mechanisn has become slack due to lack of interference in its mating p~rt. If
one of these brake linkage pins should dJsengage it could result in a loss of
one or more of the braking systmis. \"
These pins 1 shown in Figure l, form the end bearings for the balance .
levers in the brake actuating assembly and are pressed into their mating parts
with a heavy interference and should not, normally be able to move.
We believe that if ther.e are any further faulty brake linkage pins in
existence they will only have been fitted to cars contained in a narrow band
of numbers, however, in the interests of safety and in accordance with Rolls-Royce
policy, it has peen decided to modify all cars prior to car number 3384.
The modifications which have beer.i devised are in th.e f9rm of three
clips which can be fitted in position on the car in a matter of minutes and
once in position they wtll retain the brake linkage pins even if they became
slack •. TI\ese clips will only be fitted retrospectively on cars in service
and will not be fitted on cars produced after car number 3384 ..
It will not be necessary to order the parts to do the modification as

these will be sent direct to each Retailer together with a list of cars in
his area which require modification.
Continued •••·
ROLLS •ROYCE LIMITED, PVM•s LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
14.11.67 SECTION G
SB/BP
Prlntld In E111!11ul
~ • f • .._-. ·. .
AND BENTLEY T SERIES S·ERVICE BUL'LETJN
• •• ' ~i•,
..
. . . . .·I•.._ __ .. -, - .•;
-2- No. SY;1:H5
Note Would Retailers please ensure that the modification record

(pink) label included in the kit of perts is canpleted and
retumed to the Technical Service Department - Crewe.
FJR. 1 Method of fitting brake linkage retaining clips
1 BRAKE LINKAGE PINS
Continued •• t
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED, PYM ' S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
SECTION
SB/BP 14.11 .67 G
Printed In Enalanit
ROLLS-ROYCE SSLVER SHADOW
SERVICE~StJL:LE.Tl'N
- 3 - No. SY/GtS
Fig.2 Method of fitting fulcrum pin retaining clip
1 FULCRUM PIN
2 RETAINING CLIP
We believe that the faulty brake linkage pins have only been fitted
to a snall number of cars conta.ined within the range 1700 to 1900, it has
been decided to modify these cars first and then modify the cars on each
side of this range later.
The list of cars which require modification and the order in which they
shoul.d be modified will be sent to each Retailer in arrangement with the
Service Pr<111otion Departments in London and at the Crewe factory and any
camrunications concerning the campaign should be addressed to either the
Service Promotion Manager (H(ltf1E) at the London Service Station or the
Service Pranotlon Manager (EUROPE) at the Crewe factory.
Continued
.. ....
SB/BP 14.11.67 SECTION G

Primed In Engl111d
ROLLS-ROYCE SJ LVER SHADOW
-4- ,W<'}. SY/G15
PROCEDURE
1. Place the car on a ramp or over a pit.
2. Remove the brake actuation mechanism undertray.
3. Spring the three retaining clips into position as shown in Figures 1

and 2. When the upper clip is in position the tang at its forward
end should be bent under the link as shown in the inset in Figure 1.
When the clip which retains the fulcrum pin of the push rod
operating the lower distribution valve (see Fig. 2} is sprung into
position, ensure that the flanges locate correctly on the balance
lever.
4. When the clips are in position the mechanism should be operated to

ensure freedom of movanent. If the mechanism operates satisfactorily
the undertray should be refitted.
I
IDENTIFIC'ATIOO
When the undertray has been refitted a large spot of blue paint should be
applied to indicate that the modification has been canpleted.
On right-hand drive cars the paintmark should be applied on the rear

left-hand corner of the undertray.
On left-hand drive cars the paint.mark should be applied at the rear and
on the side of the undertray.
MATERIAL REQUIRED
Kit number 3.
TIME ALLQIIED
0.75 hours.
.
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLANi.}
SB/BP 14. 11 .67 SECTP)~

Printed fn England
SERVICE BULLETIN
No. SY/G19
Circulation - All
CATEGORY C
HYDRAULIC lNIT RE~DITIONING
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCRIPTICN
The purpose of this Service Bulletin is to inform Distributors, Retailers and
Service Personnel of the work Involved in stripping, cleaning and re-building
certain components which are fitted in the braking or levelling hydraulic
systems. This infonnation is provided to enable a component to be
reconditioned should a replacement component not be imnediately available.
PROCEDURE
Before carrying out work of this nature it is .important that reference is
made to Chapter G of the Workshop Manual, Section entitled Special
Precautions, which deals with component cleanliness and safety precautions.
In view of the many modifications which have been incorporated on these
hydraulic units in the past, the relevant·Service Bulletins and Infonnation
Sheets should also be consulted before the following procedures are carried
out.
In the majority of cases a hydraulic unit ls ranoved for two reasons:
1. It is leaking.
2. One of the valves in the unit is affected by dirt and is not
operating correctly as a result.
As a general guide the following list of the more usual troubles is
provided.
ACClMUIATOR VALVE Dirt beneath the regulator valve

seating.
Continued •••
CHAPTER
SB/F.ck 23.5.68 G
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULLE'FJN
- 2 - No. SY/G19
HYDRAULIC PUMP Dirt beneath the delivery valve or the

non-return valve.
Leakage fran the sealing rings.

ROLL RESTRICfOR VALVE Leakage from the sealing ring on the
longer adaptor.
HEIGHT (X)NTROL RAM Leakage from the seals.
The following procedures are intended to rectify faults of this nature.
ACCUMULATOR VALVE - TO RECOODITION
l. De-pressurise the relevant hydraulic circuit and remove the accumulator

sphere and valve assembly from the engine as described in Chapter G of
the l\"orkshop Manual, Section entitled The Hydraulic Accumulators.
2. Ranove the end plug from the accumulator valve. This can be achieved
by using a suitable spanner, on a length of hexagonal bar or the barrel
of a discarded Lucas accunrulator switch inserted into the hexagonal
recess in the end plug.
3. Insert a% in. UNF bolt into the threaded hole in the valve sealing
plug and withdraw the plug: discarding the sealing ring.
4. Remove the aluminium sealing disc (if fitted), spring and the non-return
valve from the snaller bore of the valv.e bobbin. Should there by any
signs of damage to the sealing disc, possibly caused by the piston
'hammering' a new sealing disc must be fitted. The part number of the
sealing disc is UE 34472. -
5. Remove the valve bobbin. This can be achieved by gently striking the
valve body on a piece of wood.
6. Ranove the three sealing rings fran the bobbin leaving the white Fluon
washer in place.
7. Remove the piston valve fran the centre bore of the bobbin. Due to the
difficulty encountered when fitting new seals to the piston valve, this
seal should only be renewed if the existing seal is obviously unserviceable.
8. Remove the regulator valve, spring, adjusting washers, and sealing

washer from the accumulator valve.
Continued •••
CHAPTER
SB/ECk Re-issued 12.12.68 G
ROLl S·RO"'fE SILVER SHADOW
AND BENTl£\' T SEft&ES
- J - No. SY/Gt9
~ PIS~ AND SEALING RING (UE 10230)

2 BOBBIN AND SEALING RINGS (UE 34920)
3 VALVE BOBBIN
4 END PLOO
5 VALVE SEALING PLOO AND SEALING RING
(UE 35101)
6 ALl.MINilM SEALING DISC
7 NON -Ri::Tl n~'J VALVE
8 FLlK>N WASHER
9 REGUI ,\Ti1H. V.4.LVE
10 ADJUSTING WASHER(S)
t l SEATING WASHER
Continued •••
-~···--··~---------- --------------------
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED , PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
--=·=
·· --- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - : - - -
23.5.68 CHAPTER G
- 4 - No. SY/G19
9. Thoroughly wash all the components including the accumulator valve housing
in clean methylated spirits, and dry using clean compressed air.
10. Inspect the ball seat in the bobbin and the ball of the regulator valve
for signs of ingrained dirt. If any dirt is present this should be
removed and the parts re-washed.
11. Burnish the ball seat by lightly holding the ball onto the bobbin seat
and rotating the regulator valve by hand.
a. Inspect the bobbin seat and ensure that it is of a uniform shiny

appearance all round, free from heavy pitting or marks which
extend across the face of the seat. A certain amount of light
pitting is acceptable providing that it does not extend across
the face of the seat.
b. If the seat is considered to be unserviceable, the burnishing

operation should be repeated using a metal polish or a suitable
extremely fine abrasive compound until the seat is considered to
be serviceable.
c. Carefully wash the bobbin and the regulator valve and repeat the
burnishing operation.
12. Fit the new sealing rings provided to the bobbin~ piston valve (only
if necessary) and sealing plug.
13. Assemble the valve by reverse procedure, lubricating all internal

components with clean brake fluid of the correct type.
14. Fit the accumulator valve and sphere to the engine, connect the
hydraulic pipes and bleed the system as described in Chapter G of
the Workshop Manual, Section entitled Bleeding the Hydraulic Systems.
15. Check all disturbed unions for leaks.
Mi\TERIAL REQUIRED
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTI~ NUMBER REQUIRE~
UE 35101 Sealing ring - plug 1 off per valve
UE 34920 · Sealing ring - bobbin 3 off per valve
UE 10230 Seal - piston off per valve
UE 10376 Seal - Accumulator valve
to sphere off per valve
UE 34472 Sealing disc 1 off per valve
ALWAYS CHECK SPARES INFORMATION SHEETS AND CURRENT PARTS LISTS BEFORE ORDERING
PARTS.
Continued •••
CHAPTER
SB/F.Ck Re-issued 12.12.68 G
SERVfCE. BU'L:LtETl"N
. ~-.
.• ·.. .
- 5 - No. SY/Gt9
HYDRAULIC PlMP - TO REroNDITION
It should be noted that on cars produced after SRH 2970 - Standard cars and
CRH 3130 - Coachbuilt cars, the sealing arrangement of the reservoir pipe to
hydraulic pump outer body was changed.
Earlier cars were fitted with a pipe connected to the PUil{) by means
of a brass olive and special nut, the pump housing having a stepped seating.
Later cars are fitted with a pipe having a flared end and a special
nut, the pump housing seat being conical.
Should it be necessary to replace a hydraulic pump, ensure that the

seat of the low pressure inlet port is correct for the type of reservoir pipe
fitted to the car. If this is not so, the outer housing of the new pwnp
should be replaced with the housing of the original punp.
1. Remove the hydraulic pump from the engine as described in Chapters

E and G of the Workshop Manual.
2. Remove the circlip from the top of the pump body.

3. Remove the outer housing of the punp. This can be achieved by drawing
the outer housing upwards.
4. Remove and discard the two sealing rings which encircle the valve body.
s. Remove the hexagonal adaptor from the top of the p\lTlp body. This
adaptor is torque tightened to between 50 lb.ft. and 55 lb.ft.
(6,91 kgm. and 7,60 k81ll.).
6. Remove the small circlip from the non-return valve body.
7. Remove the cap frCIIl. the non-return valve.
8. Remove the non-return valve and spring.
9. Remove the valve housing and chamfered washer. Gentle use of a

screwdriver may be necessary to remove the chamfered washer, and if
it has been badly spread it should be replaced, the part ntunber
being UE 34325.
10. Remove the inlet valve and wave washer.
11. Remove the circlip fran the base of the ptunp body.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED. PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
SB/Eek CHAPTER
23.5.68 G
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE -~.U4}._ETIN
- 6 - No. SY/G19
2 Fig.2 Hydraulic J?\Dl'lj)

1 ADAPTCR
3 2 N~-RE'ruRN VALVE
3 CHAMFERED RING
4 (UE 34325)
4 INLET VALVE
5 PlNP BARREL
6 6 OUI'ER IIJUSlNG
1 SEALI?«:t RING
(UE 32170)
6 8 PLffiGER
9 SEALmG RINGS
(UE 34921)
7
12. Remove the plWl.ger, washer and spring.

13. Thoroughly -wash all the components in clean methylated spirits and dry
with clean compressed air.
14. Assemble the hydraulic punp by reverse procedure lubricating all moving
parts with clean brake fluid of the correct type, and using the new
sealing rings provided. Should the seating face of the inlet valve be
marked, the valve should be assembled with the unused face towards the
valve seat.
15. Fit and set the hydraulic punp to the engine as described in Chapters
E and G of the Workshop Manual.
Continued •••
CHAPTER G
SB/ECk 23.5.68
=====-=·;==~L=LS=·=ROYC=E=s=,L=VE=R=S=HA=O~OW;:,:=:-=~-~=·~===•nm1·
'= ...- - ANO BENTLEY T SERIES
=
· I!:11111a1s1
- 7 - No. SV/G19
MATF.RIAL R£~JiREg
PART NWIBER DESCRIPTI<l'i
UE 3.4921 Sealing ring - outer housing 2 off per pWtp

UE 34325 Washer 1 off per ptanp
UE 32170 Sealing rlng - irmer housing 1 off per pump
ALWAYS CHECK SPARES INFORMATICN SHEF.TS AND C1JRRFNT PARTS LISTS BEFURE ORDER.ING
PAM'S.
ROLL RESTRICTOR VALVE - ro RECONDITICN

1. Remove the roll restrlctor valve from the car, as described in Chapter G
of the Workshop Manual, Section entitled The Roll Restrictor Valve.
2. Remove the longer of the two adaptors and "the single plain washer.
3. Remove the sealing ring from the adaptor.
4. Remove the restrictor valve spring.
5~ Remove the spring seat. This can be achieved by gently striking the
restrictor valve against a piece of wood such that the spring seat
drops down the bore.
6. Remove the remaining adaptor from the restrictor valve housing, noting
the nunber and position of the adjusting washers.
a~ Remove and discard the sealing ring from the adaptor.
7 •. Remove the four ~ in. UNF nuts and plain washers and detach the plunger
housing from the restrictor valve housing. Disc_ard the sealing ring.
a. Remove the plunger from the plunger housing bore noting its
position to facllltate assembly.
s. Remove the restrictor valve plwtger, noting that the axial bore of
the plunger faces the restrictor valve spring •.
9. Remove the sealing ring from the restrictor valve plunger.
10. Thoroughly wash all the canponents in clean methylated spirits, and
dry using clean c.orll)ressed air.
_______________________________________
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED. PYM'S .LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
Continued •••
,
CHAPT~R
SB/ECk 23.5.68 G
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE ·BULLETIN
- 8 - No. SY/G19
Fig.3 Roll restrictor valve

1 ADJUSTING WASHER
2 SEALING RING (UR 10814)
3 PLUNGER
4 SEALING RING (UE 8328)
5 PLUNGER 11)1.JSING
7 RESTRIC'IUR VALVE
8 SPRING SEAT
10 RESTRICTOR VALVE HOIBIN:;
11 ADAPTOR
11. Fit the new sealing rings provided to the two adaptors, the plunger
housing and the restrictor plunger.
12. Assenble the valve by reverse procedure, lubricatlng all sealing rings
and moving parts with clean brake fluid, of the correct type, and
noting that the restrictor plunger and the adaptor adjusting washers
are fitted as before.
13. Flt the roll restrictor valve to the car and bleed the hydraulic
systems as described 1n Chapter G of the Workshop Manual, Section
entitled The Roll Restrictor Valve.
Continued •••
SB/ECk 23.5.68 CHAPTER

G
-·--,=;=====
- 9 - No.SY/Gl9
M.\TERIAL REQUIRED
PART NlMBER DESCRIPTION NlMBER REQUIRED

UE 8328 Sealing ring - plunger housing to
case off
UR 10815 Sealing ring - longer adaptor 1 off
UR 10814 Sealing ring - shorter adaptor 1 off
UR 10801 Sealing ring - restrictor valve off
ALWAYS CHECK SPARES INFORMATION SHEETS AND CURR.ENT PARTS LISTS BEFORE ORDERING
PARTS.
A HEIGHI' CONTROL RAM - TO RE~DITION

1. Remove the ram from the car as described in Chapter G of the Workshop
Manual, Section entitled The Height Control Rams.
2. Grip the piston in a vicet ensuring that the vice jaws contact only
the serrations machined on the lower body of the assembly.
3. Using a suitable piece of hexagonal bar or a gearbox sump plug spanner,
unscrew the blanking plug which is fitted in the lower end of the
piston bore. Remove and discard the plug sealing ring.
4. Using a suitable box spanner unscrew the travel limiting stop bolt.
5. Withdraw the piston, bolt and distance piece from the ram.
6. Grip the ram in a vice such that the seals are accessible.
7. Remove the circlip, retaining washer, and the wiper seal from the outer
end of the ram bore.
8. Using a pointed instn.unent extract the remaining seal(s) taking care

hot to damage the bore of the ram.
Note On cars produced prior to SRX 1755 - Standard cars and CBH 1696 -
Coachbuilt cars, the rams will be fitted with a wiper seal and
two main seals, fUrther details of modifications to the ram
being contained in Service Bulletin SY/GS. After removing the
wiper seal the innennost main seal should be removed, followed
by the secondary seal adjacent to the wiper seal.
Continued •••
SB/ECk 23.5.68 CHAPTER G

- 10 - No. SY/G19
l
_,,.....
F igA Rear hei~ht control ram

(three seal tY,pe)
1 RM1 BODY
2 TRAVEL LIMITING STOP BOLT
:S SEALING PLUG AND RlNG
(UR 10815)
2 4 MAIN SEAL (UR 12075)
5 SECONDARY SEAL
3 6 WIPER SEAL (UR 10579)
7 CIRCLIP
8 PISTON
-----4
5
&
/
I( 266
~ The sealing arrangement for a front height control ram is identical to

the rear rams illustrated.
Continued•••
CHAPTl:R
SB/F.Ck 23.5.68 G
-·
SERVICE BULLETIN
.-
- 11 - No. SY/G19
F~.5 Rear h~iaht control ram

(two seal tXJ)e)
1 MA.IN SEAL (UR. 12075)

2 WIPER SEAL (UR 10579)
~ The sealing arrangement for a front height control ram ls identical to

the rear rams illustrated.
9. Place the piston in a lathe and using Corolith grit 320 emery cloth (or
equivalent), carefully remove any score marks from the piston. Finally
polish using a fine emery polishing cloth. The piston rrrust be polished
fran the body end outwards.
10. Thoroughly wash all parts in clean methylated spirits and dry with
compressed air.
11. Grease a main seal (UR 12075) with Molytone C or equivalent grease, and
compress it with the fingers to an oval shape.
~ If the ram was previously fitted with three seals, the new main
seal should be fitted into the groove originally used for the
secondary seal, leaving the upper groove vacant. Ensure that
the necessary blanks are fitted in place of the hydraulic pipes
removed as detailed in Service Bulletin SY/GS.
12. Feed the seal sideways into the ram pushing it just beyond the groove
before feeding it back into the groove using a blunt instniment.
Ensure that the seal is fitted with the flat side towards the open end
of the ram.
Contirwed •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE; ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 23.5.68 G
·····--==========================
.,
····- :==========================
- 12 - No. SY/G19
13. Grease a wiper seal (UR 10579) and fit it into position, lip outwards,
and retain with the washer and circlip.
14, Slide the piston into position, taking care not to double back t he lip
of the wiper seal.
15. Fit the bolt and distance piece and tighten to between 16 lb. ft. and
t8 lb.ft. (2,21 kgm. a nd 2,49 k~.).
16. Grease the plug s ealing ring (UR 10815) and fit it to t he plug. Screw
the plug i nto position and tighten to between 60 lb.ft. and 65 lb.~.
(8,30 k8n. and 8,99 kgm.}.
l7. Refit the ram to the car as described in Chapter G of the Workshop
Manua l, Section entitle d The Height Control Rams.
MATEIUAL REQUIRED
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTI~ NlMBER REQUIRED

UR 12075 Main seal 1 off
UR 10579 Wiper seal 1 off
UR 10815 Sealing ring - Plug 1 off
ALWAYS CHECK SPARES INFORMATICN SHEETS AND CURRENT PARTS LISTS BEFORE CJIDER.ING
PARTS.
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 23.5,68 G
~-.......:::;;;;;;;:;;===========================================================================
No.gy/G20
The information contained in
this Service Bulletin super-
sedes all previous information
contained in the Workshop
M:tnual, CWners' Handbook and
Service Booklets,
CATEGORY C
SERVICE RE00\.1MENDATIONS FOR HYDRAULIC CCMPOO'ENI'S
APPLICABLE TO :
DESCRIPTION
This Service Bulletin is issued to clarify the reconmendations regarding the

rubber components in the brake and height control systems on all Rolls-Royce
Silver Shadow and Bentley T series cars.
Our recommendations are as follmvs:
Under normal motoring conditions it is recommended that the following

Servicing Operations are carried out at 60,0JO miles (lOJ,OJO Kms.), and for
convenience this work may be carried out at the Scheduled Service or brake pad
renewal nearest to the mileage specified above.
EVERY 60 ,OCXJ Miles ( 100 ,OJO Kms.)

Renew the following components:
1. All the flexible hoses fitted to the brake and height control systems
with the exception of the following hoses:
Brake pump to accumulator hose.
Accumulator to frame hoses.
Low pressure return hoses from the height control system, identified
by white marker sleeves,
2, All disc brake caliper seals.
3. Deceleration conscious valve seals.
4. Master cylinder seals,
Continued •••
CHAPTER
SB/BP 16.5.68 G
ROLLS•ROYCE StLVER SHADOW
SERVICE BULLETIN
- 2 - No. SY/G20
Whilst doing this work the hydraulic systems should be completely

drained and refilled with the approved fluid.
It should be emphasised that this Service will only be carried out at
the request of the owner and it is the responsibility of the Service Manager
to advi~e the owner that the Service is due. As noted earlier these
operations may be carried out during a normal Scheduled Service or brake pad
renewal.
It should also be noted that the 60,000 miles (lOJ,000 Kms.) recOJl11lend-
ation is for nonnal motoring condition~. If it is known that a particular ·
<Wftler habitually drives hard, then the Service Recoomendations for brake
components should be carried out at an earlier mileage. In these cases also,
it is the responsibility of the Service Manager to advise the owner when the
work is necessary.
In all cases this work is chargeable to the owner.
ROLLS-ROYCE LINUTEO, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
16.5.68 G
SB/BP
. .
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES -S·ERVICE BULLEtlN
~• if~. r·· ::. • · ·
No. SY/G23
and Retailers
CATBXlRY C
STORAGE LIFE OF MI\STER CYLINDERS
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCRlPTI~
This Service Bulletin has been issued to advise Distributors and Retailers that
the master cylinders as fitted to the above cars must not be used for replace-
ments if they have been stored for longer than three years.
During storage the internal seals swell, and if a unit containing

swollen seals is fitted to a car, the master cylinder may suffer from piston
sticking.
PROCEDURE
When a master cylinder has been held in stock for a period of three years or
more, before being fitted to a car it should be stripped, cleaned and rebuilt
using new seals lubricated with the correct type of brake fluid.
All master cylinders produced after January 1968 have the date of
manufacture stamped on the packing carton. Units produced prior to this
date may not be marked and therefore should be carefully inspected before
use.
ROLLS-ROYCE LtMfTEO, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CH.APTER
SB/ECk 27.6.68 G
No. SY/G26
and Retailers.
CATEGORY B
THE ROLL RESTRICTOR VALVE
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars produced prior to car
serial number SRH. 37CO.
~RIPTION
The roll restrictor valves fitted to cars produced after and including car
serial number SRH. 37CO have been sealed with 'Loctite' sealing canpound to
prevent the possibility of the valve leaking.
This Service Bulletin has been issued to advise Distributors and

Retailers that on cars prior to serial number SRH. 3700, the long adaptor
(item 12) fitted to the roll restrictor valve should be sealed with 'Loctite'
sealing compound (grade c.v.).
This should be carried out at the next convenient opportunity i.e. during
the next scheduled service or when other work is being carried out.
'Loctite' grade C.V. sealing compound is available locally in most

countries.
The sealing operation involves replacing the sealing ring (item 9) on

the longer of tne two adaptors (item 12) and smearing the adaptor threads with
'Loctite' sealing compound. After re-sealing, the valve should be marked
with a spot of blue paint.
PROCEDURE
1. Depressurise the hydraulic systems and remove the roll restrictor valve
from the car, as described in the Workshop Manual.
2, Remove the longer of the two adaptors (item 12) and the single plain
washer (Item 11). Discard the adaptor sealing ring (item 9).
Continued •••
CHAPTER
SB/Eck 16.1.69 G
. ' .
AND BENTLEY T SERIES .SE·RV·tCE BULLETIN
- •• ' l '
- 2 - No. SY/G26
Fig.I Roll restrictor valve
1 ADJUSTING WASHER
2 SEALING RING
3 PLUNGER
4 SEALING RING
5 PLUNGER HOUSING
6 SEALING RING
7 RESTRICTOR VALVE
8 SPRING SEAT
9 SEALING RING
10 RESTRICTOR VALVE HOUSING
11 WASHER
12 ADAPTOR
13 SPRING
A Apply compound to both
faces of ,·,asher and
threads of adaptor.
3. Remove the restrictor valve spring (item 13).
4. Usine a clean fluff-free cloth remove any traces of dirt or rubber from
the bore of the valv~.
5. Thoroughly clean the threads of the adaptor.

Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGi.AND
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 16.1.69 G
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES $ERVl'CE BULLETIN
- 3 - No. SY/G26
6. Fits new sealing ring to the adaptor, lubricating with clean brake
fluid.
7. Fit the restrictor valve spring.
8. Smear the threads of the adaptor, and the faces of the sealing washer with
'Loctite' sealing compound (grade C.V.); refer to arJ'Q\vs A.
9. Fit the washer to the adaptor, and fit the adaptor to the roll restrictor
valve; torque tighten to between 48 lb.ft. and 50 lb.ft. (6,64 kg.m. and
6,91 kg.m.).
10, Fit the roll restrictor valve to the car.
11. Top-up and bleed the hydraulic system as described in the-Workshop Manual.
12. Mark the valve body with a spot of blue paint ,mich will be seen when the
bonnet is raised.
_PARTS RfaJLilRED
UR 10814 Sealing ring 1 off
TIME ALLO.-VED
1. 15 hours.
1
ROLLS-ROYCE LIM !TEO, PYM S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 16,1,69 G
-----~-::----".:;;.,---=:-_.: ;·
-----=====:; EHMAl=l1111iiiH
No. SY/G27
and Retailers
CATEGORY C
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
gf1,!.CABLE TO:
DESCRIPTION
After disturbing a component in one of the hydraulic systems on the above

cars it is often the practice to bleed the complete hydraulic system comprising
of the master cylinder system, the high pressure height control and braking
system and the separate high pressure braking system. This practice ls
unnecessary and expensive in both brake fluid and labour costs.
This Service Bulletin has been issued to advise that only the hydraulic system
which has been disturbed needs to be bled as described ln Chapter G of the
Workshop Manual.
For example, any work on one of the two high pressure systems will require
only that one system to be bled, It should only be necessary to bleed the
master cylinder system if a component in that system has been disturbed or
if there is a complaint about the brake travel or sponge.
It should also be noted that the brake fluid bled out of any system must be
discarded as it is unfit for further use.
The recommended times for bleeding the hydraulic systems, using two operators,
are as follows: -
SYSTEM TOTAL TIME ALLClriED

Combined high pressure height control
and braking .s ystem 0.6 hrs.
High pressure braklng system 0,5 hrs,
Low pressure master cylinder system 0.75 hrs.
The above times supersede those given in the Man Hour Schedule (T.S.D. Publication
2251) and are the only times acceptable on future Warranty Cla.im Forms.
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 3.4.69 G
ROUS- ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERV,ICE BULLETIN
No.SY/G28
Circulation - All United Kingdom
CATEGORY C
HYDRAULIC ACCUMUlATOR - NITRCGF.N CHARGING
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCllIPTION
This Service Bulletin is issued to advise Retailers and Service Personnel of

the equipment necessary for charging the hydraulic accumulator with nitrogen.
Three suppliers are quoted below !Jut similar equipment may be available from
other sources:
NITROGEN
(a) 'British Oxygen Co, Ltd.' can supply ccxnpressed nitrogen in two cy1inc1er
sizes, 165 cu.ft, or 220 cu.ft.
The cost of the nitrogen is 78/- per 1,000 cu.ft.
There is a fixed supply charge of 18/9 d.
Cylinder rental is 5/- per month, per cylinder.
(b) 'Air Products Ltd.' can supply ccxnpressed high purity nitrogen in
275 cu.ft. cylinders at a cost of 82/- per 1,0JO cu.ft.
There is a charge on delivery of 15/-.
Cylinder rental charge is 10/- per month,
Note Air Products also supply COITITlercial nitrogen at a cosl

of S0/6d . per 1 ,00) cu, ft. but this MUST NOT be us~d in
hydraulic accumulators fitted to Rolls-Royce or Bentley
cars.
REGULATORS
In order to control the fl ow of gas frcm the cylinder and to indicate the
pressure in the accumulator, a r egulator will be r equired .
(a) 'British Oxygen Co. Ltd.' can supply a suitable regulator designated
'X87 type 0-1500', at a cost of £25. 5s. Oct.
Continued •••

/
CHAPTER
SB/JC 3.4.69 G
--====·
ROLLS-ROVCF. SILVER SHADOW
UFri AI =t'Jl1ii Ni 0
No. SY/G28
- 2 -
(b} A similar regulator can be obtained from 'Air Products Ltd.' by ordering
a 1 Series 70<.Xl 1 , working pressure 0-1500 lb/sq. in. and costs £23. 12s. 6d.
1
(c) Pressure Control Ltd.' of Chessington can also supply a suitable
regulator, type '7000/lc:x::G', at a cost of £25. 12s. 6d.
PIPE'S AND FlTIINGS

·--- ·--
To enable the regulator to be connected to the accumulator a length of high
pressure hose will be re qui red. Th.is hose, which must be able to withstand a
gas pressure of at least 4,000 lb/sq.in., is of the normal 'Aeroqu.i.p' armoured
type ('Aeroquip' 1503 Size 6) and can be bought with the regulator or obtained
locally.
'Air Products Ltd.' quote a price of 3/9d, per ft, for hose with 0,25 in.
bore, End fittings are pr.iced at 6/Bd. each but they also may be obtained
locally provided they can withstand a pressure of 4,000 lb/sq.in, To connect
the pipe to the accumulator, the encl fitting can be made to fit directly
onto the accumulator or to fit the Rolls-Royce charging and discharging tool
RH. 7808.
Note The pr.ices quoted in this Service Bulletin are those whic~ ·rt
applicable at the time of printing and are subject to revi_,.; i m
at any time at the manufacturers 1 discretion.
It should be noted that the utmost care must be exercised when handling th.is
charging equipment and consequently the accumulator should be removed from
the car to enable it to be charged,
I. Before fitting the regulator to the nitrogen cylinder, the cylinder

control valve should be opened, such that the subsequent discharge of
nitrogen will remove any dust or grit which may be present on the
cylinder control valve seating.
2. Fit the regulator and the high pressure pipe to the nitrogen cylinder.
Continued •.•
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM 's LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/JC 3,4,69 G
.~ ... ;;'•, .. . ' ' . ' ' .~ .
,~=··-~~,;_~.). -~:'~.:,·.·,"/;·· ,' .· '
No. SY/G28
- 3 -
3. Remove the charging valve cap from the accumulator, ensuring that the
cap is fitted with a serviceable sealing ring.
On later cars an additional seal is provided by a nylon ball

which is fitted into the lower end of the charging valve adaptor (see
Service Bulletin SY/G14). Great care must be exercised when removing
the charging valve cap from these later cars; any gas which has
escaped past the charging valve may be trapped behind the nylon ball
and can cause it to be shot out with alarming force,
The nylon ball must be replaced with a new one when the accumulator
has been charged.
4. Open the regulator valve slowly to eliminate any residual air and any
dust which may be present in the high pressure pipe.
5. Connect the high pressure pipe to the accumulator.
6. Place the accwnulator in a corner of the workshop and surround i t with

some form of shielding, preferably a number of sacks filled with sand
or soil.
7. Open the main control valve of the nitrogen cylinder.
8. Slowly open the regulator valve and allow the pressure to build up until
the gauge shows a reading of 1,000 lb/sq.in. or slightly more. This
slight excess pressure will canpensate for the small pressure loss
which occurs when the high pressure pipe is disconnected.
9. Close the regulator valve, allowing the pressurised nitrogen ln the high
pressure pipe to escape and causing the accumulator charging valve to
close,
10. Remove the high pressure plpe from the accumulator and quickly fit the
waITting plate, washer, nylon ball (where applicable) and charging valve
cap.
11. Torque tighten the charging valve cap to between 22 lb.ft. and 25 lb.ft.
SB/JC 3.4.69 CHAPTER G

AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULLE-TIN
No. SY/G30
and Retailers
CATEGORY C
BRAKE PADS
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCRIPTION
An increasing number of brake pads are being returned to the factory for credit
allowance and it is noticed that many of them are virtually unworn. It is
obvious that they have been removed unnecessarily.
The purpose of this Service Bulletin is to inform Distributors and

Retailers that when inspecting brake pads the following points should be
observed: -
1. Brake pads should only he discarded for two reasons, 1) when they are
worn out or 2) when they are contaminated with oil or other substances.
In every other case, provided that they have an adequate thickness of
(riction material (see Service Bulletin SY/G11), ~ pads can be rendered
serviceable by merely refacing the friction lining.
2. In cases of brake squeak, refacing the pad friction lining is just as

effective in curing squeaks as fitting new pads and refacing is the only
action reconmended,
3. In cases of brake inefficiency where the cause has been found to be due to
surface glazing of the pad friction lining, refacing is the only
operation required. New pads are Nar required if the existing pads
have sufficient service life left in them.
4. When it has been necessary to fit new pads, or to reface the original
pads, the brakes should be fully bedded in before the car is returned to
the Owner.
It should also be noted that no allowance ls available on brake pads and

worn out brake pads should not be returned to Rolls-Royce Limited. Any pads
which are sent to Rolls-Royce Limited and which have an adequate thickness of
friction material f'or further service, will be returned.
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 28.5,69. G
.
No. SY/G31
and Retailers
CATEGORY C
ACCUMULATOR SPHERE OVERHAUL
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCRIPTION
This Service Bulletin has been issued to show the correct method to be adopted
when reconditioning hydraulic accumulator spheres and the safety precautions
which must be observed.
SAFETY PROCEDURES
It is most important that the following safety precautions are observed before
and during the accumulator sphere overhaul.
1. Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic circuits ensure that BOTH
high pressure systems are FULLY depressurised.
2, The nitrogen pressure must be COMPLETELY EXHAUSTED before conducting any

work on the accumulator sphere.
3, Great care must be exercised when removing the charging valve cap since
it is possible that the nylon ball, fitted to later charging valves, may
be ejected with great force during or after this operation,
4. When discharging the nitrogen from the sphere care must be taken since,
in the unlikely event of the diaphragm having split, a certain amount of
brake fluid may be ejected from the charging valve along with the gas.
5. Charged accumulator spheres MUST NOT be transported. Spheres returned

to Rolls-Royce should be completely discharged and labelled to that
effect.
It is also important that strict cleanliness is observed when overhauling

these units.
Continued.,.
CHAPTER
BP/JC 2.7.69 G
ROLLS~ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
No. SY/G31
- 2 -
PROCEilJRE
The overhaul procedure to be adopted then is as follows:
a) Depressurise the hydraulic systems by pumping the brake pedal until both
the hydraulic warning lamps are illuminated.
b) Remove the accumulator assembly fran the car as described in Section G

of the Workshop Manual.
c) To prevent the ingress of dirt, blank off all the ports and adaptors in
the acctunulator valve.
d) Carefully grip the accumulator valve in a vice using protective vice

grips. The valve must ONLY be gripped on the boss which forms the
uppennost mounting point.
e) Using tool number RH 7860, remove the accumulator sphere frCJn the valve
and discard the sealing ring.
f) Carefully remove the charging cap, washer and warning plate.
g) Should the sphere be fitted with a nylon ball this may be removed by
holding the point of a scriber against the nylon ball at an angle of
45°, The scriber should then be tapped gently so that the nylon ball
is impaled and can be levered out of the bore.
Note During this operation, position the sphere such that no

damage will occur should the nylon ball be ejected by
nitrogen pressure and do not work with the head directly
above the charging valve.
h) Fit tool number RH 8235 to the charging valve adaptor (see Fig. 1) and
completely discharge the sphere.
i) Fit the sphere into tool number RH 8145 as shown. in Figure 1, and using a
torque spaJU1er in conjunction with tool number RH 8144 remove the locking
ring •
Continued •••
ROlLS~ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/JC 2.7.69 G
No. SY/G31
- 3 -
- -- 7
10
6_
FIG.1 AccUlllulator sphere secured in the holding tool

1 Recess for torque spanner
2 Discharging tool RH 8235
3 Holding bar locating peg
4 Setscrew securing holding bar
5 Holding bar
6 Accumulator sphere holding tool RH 8145
7 Locking ring tool RH 8144
8 Hexagon boss on lower half of sphere
9 Longer cranked holding bar for small spheres
(dotted outline)
10 Locking ring
11 Inverted upper half of accumulator sphere
12 Nut (and washer) retaining the sphere in the
holding tool
Continued •••
BP/JC 2.7.69 CHAPTER G

==========A==N=D;;;;;:S;;EHTLEY T SERfES
EH®t91=1~11iii~i
No.SY/G31
- 4 -
1
'
FIG.2 Checking the outer face of the
locking ring for distortion
1 Locking ring
2 Straight edge
LI
, 1 ) (Continued)
To canply with French requirements the accumulator spheres· fitted
to French cars are smaller than standard spheres. To accommodate this
two holding bars are supplied with tool number RH 8145, the one with the
longer crank (see Fig. 1) being designed for use when overhauling French
spheres.
Should any amall slivers of rubber be evident in the dismantled
sphere, on the fluid side of the diaphragm, then the accumulator valve
should also be dismantled and cleaned as described in Service Bulletin
SY/019, since any similar slivers in this unit could cause some future
malfunctioning of the valve.
J) Remove the dismantled sphere from the holding tool and discard the old
dJ.aphra1P11. Remove the discharging tool fran the adaptor.
k) Using a suitable pair of circlip pliers, remove the retaining circlip,

the spring and the ball valve fran the lower half of the sphere,
1) In11pect the three main canponent1 of the sphere paying pa.rticula:r
nttentlon to the follow!ng:-
The charging valve ball seat.
The dinphrasm seat on the two halve1 of the aphere.
Continued, ••
ROLLS - ROYCE LIMITED , PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

I
ROLLS-ROYCE SILVER SHADOW ··
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES SERVI CE'·.BUL LET 1·N
No. SY/G31
- 5 -
l) {Continued)
Check the outer edge of the locking ring against a stra.ight edge
for any signs of bowing as shown in Figure 2. This check MUST ONLY be
carried ouL on Lhe locking ring when it is in its free state. Should
any signs of bow, or distortion of any fonn, be evident the whole sphere
must be sent Lo Rolls-Royce Limited with a note stating reason and a
replacement sphere fitted.
m) Early spheres which do not have the nylon ball incorporated in the
charging valve should be modified at this stage as follows:
Using a 7/32 in. (5,55 mm.) diameter drill increase the diameter
of the charging valve bore at the outer end to a depth of O. 110 in. +
0.005 in. (2,79 mm.+ 0,127 mm.). This will accommodate the nylon ball
and allow it to he compressed when the cap is fitted, ensuring a good
seal.
n) Clean all components using fresh methylated spirits and dry using
compressed air-.
o) Fit a new charging valve ball and lightly tap it onto its seat, using a
suitable size punch with a ('Oncave end.
p) Fit the original spring and circlip ensuring that the circlip is located
correctly in the groove.
q) Fit the inverted upper half of the sphere onto tool number RH 8145 as
shown in Figure 1 and grip the tool rn a vice.
r) IMPORTN\JT Take the new diaphragm and place it on a flat surface.

Using the smooth rounded end of a small diameter rod
positioned at the top of the curved portion of the
diaphragm, depress the diaphragm so that it collapses
symmetrically. Repeat this operation 20 to 25 times.
Perfonning this simple operation will exercise

the diaphragm and encourage symmetrical collapse under
working conditions.
Smear the sealing edge of the new diaphragm with brake fluid and
fit it onto the seat in the upper half of the accumulator sphere.
Continued •• ,
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE. CREWE. ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/JC 2.7.69 G
SERVICE· BULLETI
No. SY/G31
- 6 -
s) Fit the lower half of the sphere, ensuring that it seats correctly on the
sealing edge of the diaphragm and scre\-v the locking ring LIG~ITLY into
position by hand.
t) Fit tool number RH 8144 onto the locking ring and fit the holding bar over
the hexagon boss on the lower half of the sphere. Secure the holding
bar to tool number RH 8145 as sho-wn in Figure 1, ensuring that the bar is
positioned correctly on the locating peg. The purpose of the holding
bar is to prevent relative rotation of the two halves of the sphere and
damage to the diaphragm,
u) Tighten the locking ring, using a suitable torque spanner to between

265 lb.~. and 275 lb.~. (36,367 kgm. and 38,020 kgm.).
v) Charge the sphere with nitrogen as described in Service Bulletin SY/G28.
w) Fit a new nylon ball to the charging valve bore and a new sealing ring
to the charging valve cap.
x) Fit the warning plate, washer and charging valve cap and torque tighten
the cap to between 22 lb.ft. and 25 lb.ft, (3,041 kgm. and 3,456 kgm.).
y) Refit the sphere to the accumulator using a new sealing ring and torque
tighten to between 55 lb.ft. and 60 lb.~. (7,60 kgm. and 8,25 kgm.).
Do not use the charging valve cap as a spannering point.
PARTS REQUIRED - to overhaul one accumulator sphere Kit No. 9 comprising of:
UE 10255 Diaphragm
RG 6209 Charging valve ball
UE :55100 Sealing ring - Accumulator
valve to sphere
UE 10149 Sealing ring - Charging valve
cap 1
.AJ 6769941 Nylon ball - Charging valve 1
TIME ALL0\1/ED
4 - 5 hours.
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE• ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/JC 2.7.69 G
Rolls-!loyce Silver Shadow ft Bemle/ l Series
--------- --·
SECTIO N G
Ci r cu la tion - All Distri buto rs and Bu ll etin \o . SY/G3 ! Adde ndtLil

Re taile r s
Dat e : 2?..9. 70 . Sheet ~o .
-CATEGOO.Y
- ·---- C-·
All Ro l l s -Royce Silv e r Sha dow anct Ben t l ey T Serie s c a r s.
DESCRI
--- ---- PTIO:,.:
· ..- .........
A new t y p e of diaphra gm has been J nt roduc ed onto pres e nt p rcduct i o n met.o r
c ars and is nmv be i.ng s uppliE:ci fo r a ll s ervice repl ac€·,~;e nt.s .
The new diaphra gm when in its f re e stat e adop cs the f cnn outline d L'l
the cro:;s se ct i on shO\vn i n F i gtire t.
f i,hl_ Sectiona l Vi ew. - _Hvdraulic ai: <:Lm1ulat o r s
1. Acct.unul ator fitted t o cr1 r s other th~n t hose desti ned for Fr ~nce.
2. New s hap ed di aphra gm .
3. Accumul ato r f i tted to ca r s c. est ined f or Fr a nce .
Con tlnue d • • •
t.• • ,... •( •
.flolls-noyce S11'1er Shadow fJ Bemle1 l Series o1en11ce r;t.JMJ"t.'m
Si::CTiO:'IJ G
Ci rculal ion - All Disi..ributors

and Retailers
Dute: Shee t ~:o. 2
2i!.9.70
I t is mos t B~'.PORT.-\N'i' when overhaullng a:-i accumu.lRtOi' s1,here

that the new diaphragm i s f i tted the co:-rect way up. This is
achieved by fit ting th;; diaphragm as illw,trated in figure 1.
TM moulded .lip of the dj a1.,hragm -.,,ill t.hen !'iit t:catJ y onto the
machintd seat, situatt;<l in t,he ,:pper h.:;l f of the sphere.
A srn1:"'!ar uf hral-'.J.:: fhd.d s h~uld h<= usect on t.lle sealing

face of thf; d.laphragm c!ul'b$ ass;:~nbly.
The proc(•dur<: for th<: complete sph~re a~l":e:mt>ly is as laid

down 1n Ser-v .i.cc Fu.Uetin SY/G3t.
---·..---·-----
",~, •(• I•,~ ,/ ·~ J • '°
No.
SY/G32
and Retailers.
CATEGORY C
THE MASTER CYLINDER 'ON STOP 1

··---·------
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars produced after and
including the fol lowing rnr serial numbers:
SRI-I 7027 {also i.ncluding SB11 7001) Standard Cars

DRH 7060 {also including DRH 7018) Coachbuilt Cars
LRX 6961 Long Wheelbase Cars
DESCRIPTION
This Servjce Bulletin has been issued to advise Distributors, Retailers and
Service Personnel that the tube which fanned the master cylinder 'ON STOP' on
earlier cam has been replaced on the above cars with a flexible 'ON STOP' which
providPs H progrPssive on stop applicat jon in the unlikely event of master
cyltndPr mjsbehaviour .
Should it be necessary to disLurb the master cylindPG or the master

cylinder oper,3.t ing lever, on a car fitted with the new flex i b.l e 'ON STOP'
i.t is important that the setting of the stop is adjust Pd correctly as shown
below.
PROCEDURE
It should be noted that WhPn t hf' 'ON STOP' set t in g has been adjusted j t w i 11
then be necessary to adjust r.he 'OFF STOP' Sf'tl mg.
MASTER CYLINDER 'ON STOP'
1. Slacken the 'OFF STOP' adjusting boll lock-nut and screw the bolt away
fran the master cylinder lever.
2. Slacken the mas1.,er cylinder rod lock-nut and adjust the clearance between
the 'ON STOP 1 bracket and the mast.er cylinder lever to between 0.750 in.
and 0.765 in. (19,0S mm. and 19,44 rrnn,) as shown at 'B' in Figure 1.
The measurement should be taken at right angles to the lever.
Continued ...
----------------------------------------------------
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S 1.ANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/ECk 13.8.69 G
. ,

AND BENTLEY T SERIES ;~S~ ERV.JCE -BULLETI
,...: ~:;,_. , r.;
~ T~ ~:, ~· :• ~ l • ~
No.$Y/G32
- 2 -
~ ~IP cc
PIG. t Foot brake _actuation linkage with flexible 'ON-&FOP'
1 Adjuster lock-nut - 'ON STOP 1 setting

2 'OFF STOP' adjusting bolt and lock-nut
3 'OFF STOP' bracket
4 Master cylinder rod connecting block
5 'ON STOP' setting gauge
A 0.005 in to 0.010 in. (0,13 mm. to 0,25 mm.)
clearance - master cylinder operating rod
B 0.750 in. to 0.765 in. (19,05 mm. to 19,44 nun.) -
·~ S'IOP' setting.
3. Tighten the master cylinder rod lock-nut to between 13 lb.ft. and

15 lb.ft. (1,80 kg.m. and 2,07 kg.m.).
Continued •••
CHAPTER G
BP/ECk 13.8.69
No. SY/G32
7
V
MASTER CYLINDFR roFF STOP'
1. Gently pull the b1,ake pedal downwards until the clearance between the
master cylinder pi st on and the opera Ling rod has just been taken up;
do not apply sufficient force to movf' the pj ston.
2. Screw the 'OFF STOP' adjusting bolt towards the master cylinder lever
until a clearance of between 0.005 in, and 0.010 in. {O, 13 mm. and
0,25 mm.) is obtained betwc{'n the head of the adjusting bolt and the
master cyl indf'r rod conn<"cting block. \\'hen the brake pedal is released
this clearance will appear between the master cylinder piston and the
operating rod, as sho-wn al 'A' in Figure 1.
3. Tighten the 'OFF STOP' adjust. ing boll lock-nut.
When adjusting the foot brake linkage setting on cars produced prior to
the above car serial numbers, on which a tube fo nns the ' ON STOP' , refer to
Service Bullet in SY/ G24.
ROLLS·ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/ECk 13.8.69 G
.:...
EHMAl:JU11iild No . SY/G.33
Circulation - All D:istrihutor:..;
a nd Re t aj 1,-, _, ~ -
CATEGORY C
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS - LOW PRESSURE HOSES
AP PLICABLE TO:
All Roll s-Royce> S ilver Shadow a nd Bentley T Series cars.
DESCRIPTION
I t has been noti ced that on a number of cars in serv ice t he wonn drive clips
which secure t he various low pressure hoses u sed in t h e hyd r a uli c systems have
been ove r -tight e ned.
Over--t ight en i ng t hese clips can cau se the inner lining of the host> to bi->
damaged , with the con sequ en t ri s k o f rubber lining mate rial getting into thf'
hydra uli c syst ems.
The part i cu Ja r clips in question are the on es whi ch sec ure t he fol lowi ng
low pressure hoses :
1. Hydra uli c r ese rvoir to front hydrauljc pump h ose.
2. Hydraulic rPservoir to rear hydrauli.c pump hose.
3. Front accumulator to hydra uli c r ese rvo i r hose .
4. Rear accwnulator to hyd rauli c reservoir hose ,
Extreme care should be taken when r e -ti ghteni ng the clips to ensu re that
they a r e ti ghtened su ffi c i e ntl y to s e cure t he hose but not so tight as to damagf-'
t h e ho se material itself,
ROLLS~ROYCE LIMITED , PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP 12.7.69 G
ROlLSn ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
========- . . _AN_O_~ENTL.EY 2._!~Rl~S
No. SY/G.H
Circulation - All Dist.rihut 11r:-;
and Retail f>1 .:. •
CATE'.GORY C
------
JJ-IE B~E..fl,<-ESSURE J.IMITING VALVE
APPLICABLE TO:
including the following car serial numbers:-
SIU 6996 Standard Cars

CBH 7014 Coachbuilt Cars
LRX 6951 Long Wheelbase Cars
DESCRIPTION
The deceleration conscious, brake pressure limiting valve fitted in the high
pressure feed to the rear brakes has been modified on the above cars by the
addition of a bleed valve and an alteration to the outlet port.
This allows the brake pressurt> limiting valve to be bled during thP
normal bleeding operations and the following procedure should be adopted.
PROCEDURE
After disturbing the front brake pump oc the front accumulator, the fol .l owing
procedure for ble~cting should be adopted. If the system has been dist urbPd at
the pressure limiting valve it will only be necP.ssary to bleed the pressure
limiting valve and the calipers.
1. Place the car on a ramp, select 'PARK' position on the gearchange lPver
and remove the gea rchange actuator thermal cut -out switch. Secure J .Y
chock at least one road wheel.
2. Ensure that the fluid leve 1 in the front compartment of r he re sFTV o I r

is maintained at the correct level whilst th~ s.vstem is being hJ~d.
Use only Castrol-Girling Brake Fluid Amber.
3. Run the engine at approximately 1,000 r.p.m. until the s_vstem is ful1y
pressurised.
Conti nu f'<1 •• _
CHAPTER
BP/ECk 12.8.69 ('
,J
No. SY/G34
- 2 -
4. Attach a bleed tube to t he front accwnulato r bleed screw and immerse and
hold the free e nd i n a small quantity of fresh bra ke f luid in a clean
conta iner.
5. Open the bleed scr ew and allow fluid to pass into the container. Do
not close the bleed screw until the fluid ha s bee n fre e frClll air bubbles
for at least 15 seconds. Tighten the bleed screw and remove the bleed
tube.
6. Attach t he bleed tube to the bleed screw on the decele ration consc i ous
pressure limiting va lve, and depress t he foot brake peda l half way .
7, Open t he bleed screw a small amount unt il fluid passes into the container.
When the fluid is free fran ai r, open the bleed screw furthe r and cont inue
the bl eed ing f or 15 seconds. Close and tighten the bleed screw and
remove the ble ed tube .
8. Attach the bleed t ube to the upper bleed sc rew on one of the rea r brake
ca lipers and repeat operation nwnber 7.
9. Attach the blee d tube t o the uppe r bleed screw on t he r emaining rear brake
caliper and repeat ope ration nwnbe r 7.
10. Attach t he bleed tube in turn t o the bleed screw on each front wheel brake
front caliper a nd r epeat operation numbe r 7.
Because the decel erati on conscious pressure limiting valve is in the high
pressure system i t is poss ible t hat, if the uppe r blee d screw on either
rear brake ca liper o r the bleed screw on the pressure limiting valve is
ope ned too much, the high rate of fluid flow can cause t he ba l l in the
brake press ure control valve to contact its seat, and cut off the fluid
supply, thus preve nting bleeding. Should this occur the bleed sc rew
should be closed, the brake pedal released, and the above procedures
repeated unt il bleeding i s successful.
TIME ALLOWED
For bleeding the high pressure braking system as desc ribed above 0.5 man hou rs .
1
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMtTED, PYM S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/ECk 12. 8 .69 G
SERVICE BULLETI
' '
No.SY/G35
and Retailers
CATEGORY C
FRONT AUTOMATIC HEIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
APPLICABLE TO :
including the following car serial numbers:
SRX 7404 Standard cars

DRX 7416 Coachbuilt cars
LRX 7378 Long Wheelbase cars
DESCRIPTION
The front automatic height control system has been deleted on present productlion
cars and all cars delivered after the car serial numbe rs quoted above will have
rear automatic height control only.
This change has resulted from a continuous developn,.ent programme in

which an increase in the initial standing height and detai l suspension changes
have been found to give unimpaired ride and handling characteristics with
improved serviceability.
On cars built prior to the above car serial numbers the method for
setting the standing and levelled heights remains t he same as described in
Chapters G and Hof the Workshop Manual.
On cars with the front height control system delet ed the preparation
to enable the standing and levelled heights of the car to be checked will be
different and the following instructions describe the new procedure.
To clarify the preparation procedure the loading requirements for cars

with front automatic height control are included for comparison purposes.
PROCEDURE
The following procedure must be read in conjunction with Chapter Hof the
Workshop Manual.
Continued • • .
' ROLLS·ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/JC 29.9.69 G
~ ·-- ·-·-- ·- -·-· -~-·- -----~---=ma
~OLLS~ROV{;,: StlVEIR SH!,UOW
ANO BDfftEV T SEF!U:S
=-·--=·-····-- --· ·-···-·· ~
DD
--·-···-------=----
'r""'f.
· ~- .
:=111 •
No. SY/ G35
- 2 -
Whe n cnecl<ing U1e I showrDom ' standing height and the hydraulically
levelled height the car must be in an unladen condition with 10 gallons
(12 U.S . gall ., 45 litres) of petrol in the ta1~ , and should be positioned
on a ramp or over a pit wie,h a s uitabl,y prepared level surface,
The cac should first be rnn some distance on t he road to remove flats
from the tyres and loosen up the suspension. Following this, no time must
be lost in running the car onto the ramp and carTyin g ont the checking
procedure.
Note 00 NOT AP PLY THE HAND BRAKE.
The ~ydraulic levelling system must be OUT of operation when checking the
suspension standing height, This can be achieved i n two ways, either by
de-pressurising the hydraulic system until the right-hand brake warning
light is illuminated , or disconnecting tr,e height cori.trol valve linkage s
and dj_scharging tl1e rams. Bo th procedures are descr lbed in detail in
Chapte r Hof the Works hop Manual,
When measuring the standing he ight of a car WITHOUT front hydraulic

levelling , the car _i_s loaded with weights equivalent to two front seat
passengers i.e. 150 lb. ( 68 kg .) is placed on each front seat. This is
150 lb. ( 68 kg. ) more than is used when checking the standing height of a
car WITH front levelling where t50 lb. (G8 kg.) f)nly is placed between the
front seats.
The measurements to be taken, together with the method of adjustment

are detailed in Chapter· H of the Workshop Manual.
HYDRAULICALLY LEVELLED HEIGHT
To check the hydraulically levelled height of the car the system must be
fully pressurised and all the height control valve linkages connected .
The loading arrangement to check the hydraulically levelled height for

a car WITHOl.iT a front levelling system is exactly the same as that for a car
WITH a from level Ung system. This loading arrangement i s 600 lb. ( 27 2 kg.)
evenly distribut ed between the front and rear seats.
Continued • .•
--------..--------------------·--------,- --------
ROlLS-ROVCE LIMITED, PYM'S lANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
----·---·· -·-----·----~~----------·--~- ------------
CHAPTER
BP/JC 29.9.69 G
.. . ..
AND 8ENTLEV T SERIES SERVl·CE
..~-'·
. ..
BULLETI
==========:::= . .{. .,. .
No. SY/ G35
- 3 -
The me asurements to be taken , together with t he method of adjustment,

are detail ed in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual noting that on cars WITHOur
front levelling the measuri ng procedure nee d only be pe rformed on the rear
suspension.
SlM't1ARY
Cars WITH hydraulic Cars WITHOUT hydraulic

front levelling front levelling
'Showroc:m' standing 150 lb. (68 kg.) 150 lb. (68 kg . ) on

height be tween the front each front seat
seats. i.e. 300 lb. ( 136 kg.)
total weight .
Hydraulically 150 lb. ( 68 kg.) 150 lb. (68 kg.) on

levelled height oil each seat each seat i.e. 600 lb.
i.e. 600 lb. (272 kg. ) total weight.
( 272 kg. ) total
weight.
When the standing or levelled heights have been reset it is .important

that the headlamp beams are also re-aligned. This should be done with t he
car loaded in the same manner as when measuring the hydraulically levelled
height.
TIME ALLOWED
a) Cars WITHOUT front hydraulic levelling:
Checking the 'showroooi' standing height and levelled

height, including setting the headlamp beam
alignnent 0.75 hours
b) Cars WITH front hydraulic levelling:
For checking the 'showroom' standing height and

levelled height time allowance refer to the Man Hour
Schedule (T.S.D. Publication 2251)
For all adjustment and rectification times , again refer to the Man Hour Schedule.
---------------------------------------------

ROLLS•AOYCE SILVER SHADOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES .SERVICE BULLET·I_
N
No. SY/G~7
Circul ation - AJJ Distf'lbutors
and Reta .i lers
CATEOORY C
IBE FRONT HEIGJIT CONTROL SYSTEM
APPLICABLE TO:
All Roll s-Royce Silve r Shadow and Bent ley T Series cars produced prior to
the fol lowing car serial numbers:
SRX 7404 Sfan dard ears

DRX 74 ln Cnnv er· U b.l e
LRX 7378 Lon~ Wheelba1:;P 1'.ars
CRH 7433 2 dour Saloons
DE.SCRIPT ION
Current product ion cars are fi tted wi th automatic he ight control to the
rear suspension only as des cribed in Srrv ic~ Bulleti n SY/G33.
The detail ch anges to the front sus pens ion which made this
development possibl e can be applied t.o earlier cars to give unimpaire rl ride,
handl i ng characteris t i cs and improved se rviceab j lity .
It is, therefore, recommended th at should a defect de velop in the

front h eight control sy stem, t h e owne r shoul d be o ffered t he ch oice of
having the car modifiPd to the latest. specification or of ha ving the defect
repaired.
This Se rvice Bulletin g.ives t he co rrP-n. procedure to adopt when modify.ing

the front suspension on the above cars ro the current spec ification .
Included is t he procedure for th~ removal of the metal p.i.pe connected to
t he left- hand front he ight conLrol ram. Mod ified cars can be iden tified
by noting t he rtele tion of the p ipe connecting the roll restriction valve
to t he left- hand front hei git control ram.
PROCEDURE
1. Depressuri se the hydraulic syst.ems as described in Chap ter G -

Section G2 of the Workshop Mnnual.
Continued .••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM 'S LANE , CREWE, ENGLAND
BP/ECk. 24. 11.69 CHAPTER G

ROlLS•ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES .:SERMiCE-.
.--';:
:- --- -
BULLET IN
. ' .
No. SY/GJ7
- 2 -
IMPORTANT
2.(a) LEFT-HAND DRIVE CARS ONLY - Disconnect the uppermost orange sleeved
metal pipe from the lower connection block adjacent to the rear
accunrulator (see Fig. l(a)).
(b) RIGHI'-HAND DRIVE CARS ONLY - Disconnect the orange-sleeved metal

pipe from the side of the lower connection block adjacent to the
rear accumulator (see Fig. 1(b)).
3. Fit a steel ball into the open part of the connect..i..ng block; fit
the pipe.
4. Disconnect the uppe:nnost white sleeved metal pipe roll
restrictor valve.
Fig. 1. Lower connect.ion bloc.Jc adjacent to the rear accumulator

A. - Left-hand drive cars B. - Right-hand drive cars
1. Footbrake 1• Le~-hand body side member
2. Orange sleeved metal pipe 2. Connection block
3. Ball 3. Ball
4. Connection block 4. Orange sleeved metal pipe.
5. Accelerator linkage.
Continued •••
1
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
-·----------------------------------------
BP/ECk. 24.11 .69 CH~PTER G
ROLLS·ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
AND BENTL£Y T SERIES ·~-.-S:E:
:, • •
R VICE, rBULLETIN
No.SY/G37
- 3
5. Fit a steel ball into the open part of the valve; fit the pipe .
6. Locate and diconnect the white sleeved metal pipe connected to the
upper of t he three flexible hoses adjacent to the right-hand side of
the radiator.
7. Fit a steel ball into the pipe connector; fit t he pipe.
8. Remove both front rams as described in Chapter G - Section Gl7 of

the Workshop Manual. Exhaust all fluid from the rams.
9. Unscrew and remove the ram bleed screws. Fit blanking plugs to all
ram ports.
10. Fit a distance piece to each front ram as shown in Figure 2.
Fig. 2 - Showing the fitting of the spacers

1. Spacers
2. Ram
Continued •••
ROllS·ROYCE LIMITED, PYM 'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
BP~k 24.11.69 CHAPTER G

ANO BENTLEY T SERIES .·SERVl·CE BUL.LETIN
NoSY/G37
- 4 -
11. Remove and discard the feed pipe which connects the left-hand front
ram to the roll restrictor valve. Fit a blanking plug to the exposed
port of the valve.
-Note
All cars produced prior to car serial numbers SRH 1755 and CBH 1696
are fitted with a feed pipe and a return pipe to each front ram.
The return pipes are fitted between the front rams and the three-way
connecting blocks situated adjacent to the engine compartment scuttle.
The pipes must be removed and discarded as described in Service
Bulletin SY/G2. All the exposed ports should be fitted with blanking
plugs.
12. The solenoid valve signal pressure must be blanked off from the roll
restrictor valve. This is conveniently done under the car at the
connecting block by the left-hand side of the gearbox. It will be
necessary to ranove the brake actuation box shield on left-hand drive
cars to expose thJs block. Remove the forward end of the second
most inboard metal pipe from the connecting block as shown in
Figure 3. The pipe is identified by a yellCM' sleeve.
13. Fit a steel ball to the connecting block port; fit the pipe.
14. Unscrew and remove the nut and bolt clamping the operating ann to
the spindle of the front height control valve.
15. Remove the ball joint securing the front height control valve rod
to the stabil.iser bar bracket.
16. Remove and discard the valve operating ann and rod.
17. Check and adjust the mechanical standing height and the rear levelled
height, as described in Chapters H & G - Sections HlO, H20 and Gt5 of
the Workshop Manual and in Service Bulletin SY/33.
18. Adjust the headlamp beams as described in Chapter M - Section M9 of

the Workshop Manual.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED. PYM'S LANE. CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/ECk 24.11.69 G
, ·SERVICE. "BULLETIN
I. ·.
No,SY/G57
- s -
Fig. 3 Showing the cormecti.ng block adjacent to

the transmission.
1• Yellow sleeved pipe
2. Ball
3. Cormection block.
MATERIAL REQYIRE~ OOANTI1Y
Kit - N\nber 11 l
Right-hand drive cars 2.35 hours

Le~-hand drive cars 2.85 hours
-
NC1I'E
The above times do not include the checking and adjustment of the
mechanical standing height; the rear levelled height or the
adjustment of the headlamp beams.
The times for the above mentioned operations are detailed in the
Man Hour Schedule TSD.2251.
ROLLS•ROYCE LtMITEO, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/~k 24.. 11.69 G
_,. . . --..--~--::=:.•-----------.--••---'-,.*"!:..,--...__.:-· ·-• - . . __ .,.,. ., . _ . .,,.,,,.~- ~~T.-• .... _..._.. ( ~
ROLLS-ROYCE SlLVER SHi~OOVv ,v > • I
AND 8[N'ii.EY T Si:H!::s

--:.-::.-::..---=-..:::..-:'r.::=========--·----.. ----==:-------- ... . _. . . . . . . -··-- . . . . -.h,,.....,.........._..... _ .. _.......... _ ..~-...: ..........
f~o.SY/G 33
Circulation J\ll Distributors and
Retailers.
C'ATEGORY C
RIRKE. PUMP TO /\CCU1\1UL.:\TOR RIGID J'IPES
APPLIC'\BLE TO:
-----·-· --··- - --
All RolJs ...Rcyce Silver Shadow and Bentl'=Y T Series· cars.
'l'he flexible hoses which connect the hydraulic br:1ke pu.i11ps to the
accumulators are renewed as po.rt of the 4Bi000 miles ( 80000 km.) ,ecor.imcuded
service schedule.
Current production cars are now be.i.ng fitted with rigid pipes made
of mild steel in place of these flexible hoses. Th.ese rigid pipes do not
. need to be changed at any of the schedule services.
The flexible hoses and the rigid pipes are interchangeable and in
future the new pipes will be supplied for all replacement purpo~cs.
The rigid pipes may be fitted at the appropriate schedule service and should
always be fitted in pairs.
This Service Bulletin has been issued to advise the correct method of
fi ttlng the new pipes.
It is a feature of these steel pipes that the hydraulic 'knock.'

which may be audible on each pressure stroke of the broke pwnp may be
accentuuted. This feature is standard and no rectification work is necessnry.
Al though the front pwnp to accumulator steeJ pipe will fit all
cars 1 two different rear pipes are available to allow for the difference
in shape between the Rolls::-floyce four spce,1 gearbox and the torque converter
transmission.
PROCEDURE
NOTE
The seven cllµs which secur·e the rigid pipes are _i_denU.fied .in Figure 1
ano this should be used in ccn. )unction with the following text to ensure
that the clips are fltteci correctly.
...
-.......--.~ _,,, ______________________
ROtl$~ROYCI:: LIMITF.D, PYM'!i LAfif., CREWE, U·AGtANl)
continued •.•
·-------·. - ._ __
-- - -·--·---------------- •----·-----------·--w-••_ . ._.,. ___.,'
?.6. 1 • 70 CHAP"fl:R G
.CP/Eck
...:.
~---=-===:::::-:::~....:.__-.::-- ----··--- ·---=--~-- ~ -··,--- •r--···-..·---~-·:..- -'!.··~:-- .......

ROLLS-HOYCE SlUll:11 SHACOW ... i - t t: ,,,, •
l 1 l
---==========:.::--.=-..=:-----.:...-;:.::;::_-._-
_______-: :. -: . - -; :. -_-____
t
AND i"lENTU':f T $£RitS
• ..-,... , • .. _...., ._,.....:. , .... - ...... ~ , .... =.. .. ,•.,. ...... .• ..._1.. .......~ .......•.. ,;.:.; ..
- 2 -
1. Depressurise the hydraulic systems as described in Chapter G of the

Workshop Manual.
2. Remove and discard the brake pump to accumulator flexible hoses.
-FITIIXG OF R£-\R PIPE

- ---··-·
- ...-----
3. Attach three cl.i.ps (UR 16557, UR 16867 & UR 16858) to the rear pipe.
The clips should be fitted in the upper, central and lower positionci
respectively, as shown at. 5, 6, & 8 in figure 2.
4. Loosely attach the extension pipe sho,m at 7 in figure 2 to the pipe.
5. Loosely attach one of the larger brackets (UR 1G866) to the upper clip
as shO\m in Figure 3 - illustration I3.
6. Lower the pipe into position on the reaz· pump and accumulator holding
the pipe abOVP, the rear accumulator with the straight upper length of
the pipe pointing towards the radio. tor. Carefully lower the pipe
into place, simultaneously turnin~ the pipe unt.il the upper length is
correctly aligned with the re.:ir brake pwnp. This is a d i.fficul t
operation but .it should be noted that the p_i.pe cc.m be aligned with-
out the use of force.
7. Finger tighten the pipe seating nuts to the pump and accumulator.
At this stage the engine breather pipe may require moving .forwards
to clear the pipe being fitted.
8. Fit the lower clip to the rear accumulator securing bolt.
9. fe::ure the bracket at the upper end of the pipe to the cylinder head
as sho\m in Figure 3 - illustration B.
10. Loosely att..'lch the central clip (UR 16867) to the cylinder head as
shmm in Figure 3 - illustraLion A.
11. Tighten the pipe seating nuts onto the accumulator and brake pu:np
taking en re not to strain the pipes.
12. Tighten the extension pipe onto the lower end of the main pipe.
con ti nu ed •••
1 ---~------··---- --- ·---------·... .... . ,,
·----------- -----------·--"-··-·-_. ___ ·-·..... --·······-- ·--·

ROLLS-ROYCE UMITED, PYfli S L/t:'\!E, CH!:Wc, El'iGL!).JH)
.....
BP/Eck 26. 1. 70 G
:::,!;::.-....-~=========-= ·---- -~-=:::.::===============-.. .- .,. . . ;.,.,-.;"'------- ~~~~.-~.-.·-~-.··~"'
R.01.LS·f~i)iCt Sil\..'i::R SHADOW
._.. . ~ '" I • ''l (•.• •"
. .~:;:>,~:'C!·:,:t
... ; .;-·'T'~
f.f ·• ·n. (Y ·r 5r~1r s

t~{i)
=========..::::;--"~..:::.::-.::---::.::::;: .. ---...:.....=.:.·=======-··-----··---.. .. -~~-<!>>h•••...,...S#.::..... ... ~;.:.., ___ ..... -,A_• • ..t:..,...., ____::..-- ~ ••
- 3 -
1 -------·1-· - - -- -
USE OF Cl..IPS CLIP IDENT:FICATlON BRACKETS
...--- -··-·
1 oH
I
ll.j1-· . Si
0.312 in. (7,92 mml {'
R"''
---,-.- ----- - --t- - -----·
0.725 \n. !
-
' , /'ilfl0.41 rn"'I
·- - 1
Mone
Rear pipe to rear
accumulator
..-J=,·
~ "'•,J .
~,...,;.,.::,;-.,.er.,.
UR 16858 ·~ i.0 62 i t°', I

(26 .98 mn,j
3 off 0.312 in. (7,92 m m }

6''- ~
0 .7Z5i11
Use with lol'\ge~
l bracket UR16866
Upper end of front pipe ,..,."1 - -·;<c
1
~ . for upper end of rear
Upper end of rear pipe ~,ki~•ri~JI p,pe
Use with s:,ort bracket
Lower end of front pipe 1 0.812 in. I
UR 16857 13.!).62 mm) . UR 16863
0 562 ;,-,
1 oH
Front pi9e to rocker
0.312in. (7,92mfTll
tl..,. ~-- t' s .
1
~~,d...---
~ •· (-;.! 27mm) Use with !onger
bracket UR 16866
cover ?.£~~~~~I
:0.750 i:t,,
·---· I
l"~·· · ....., . ;"""°'' '
Uf\16854 119,0Smm)
2 off I e longete<l~ole £/::c.,. 0.5~~
Both p:pes to cylinder i ~ ..i

.1;.~·.>.=.~r.:.~.11
.=~
-J -~~~u·
a-.: ~ ..s-:¥
'" • mm None
,head
! 1.10 in. 1
..
I
I
-
...........
UR 16867
------· 127.94 mml .
,
L:'$25
-
Fig. Clip Identification.
---------·-t__ . ____________ ---------.. -----·"'· -~·---·------------·· ____.. . ._. ._,.

CIH:Wc.
ROU.. S-HOYCE L.IMffEO, PYF,f'S !.Ahl£. Ei'-lG!.AND
---------------·-------------,,,.. - . -.--~------ ··--- ---------·--··--·--
..:
Rolls-Royce fJ 8e111/ey Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation All Dis tr i~utors & Retailers Section G

Bulletin No SY/G 3 B
Page No 4 of 10
Date 31 8 72
1 2
L 251
Fig. 2 Position of rigid pipes and clips.
I. Pipe (UR 16925)

2. Clip (UR 16854)
3. Bracket (UR 16866)
4 .. Pipe (uR 16927)
5. Clip (UR 16857) and bracket (UR 16866)
6 Clip (UR 16867)
7. Pipe (UR 16926)
8. Clip (UR 16858)
9. Clip (UR 16857)
10. PiDP (UR 1G924)
Inset A - Cars wit 11 tlw f'lur sµt>ed aut,...mat.ic gearbox.

L Pipe (UR 16926)
2. Clip (UR 16867)
3. Pipe (UG 13331)
4. ('lip (UR 16858)
5. Clip (UR 16857)
/continued ••.••
ir."l R"tl<-Rov<:P. \l!otors L,..-,,teo 1972

- _:, ·-=~..:::::::--..:..-::::"""-~. --~-===----· ·-==:':';-..........-.,,::.. - ..,....- ' ...........- . ~ - ~ - - - . ~-~~--.-..··r~7y,~~~.(,.,..-~ ..··:,:,...·~~~--
ROLLS~ !,...1Y,'.:~ S!~.VE:~ SHA!);)\\' .;; ~ t.~ ~r. i~~~- ~,
Al,Hi ~-JE'NTLEY : ftf;'1:!;.;
========~====·-·· :--·===·-..-·-.:-:.-::::::::.-=========:::::.;.......__.;. ...,....;..·.)·1.- .......... ~......:...,;-v..s •.
No. SY/G 38
- 5 -
Fig. 3 · Clips and locations - Pipes· - Brake pump to accunrulator.
A. 1• Rear pipe 5. Cylinder head

2. Clips 6,. Crankcase
3. Tempera. ture transmitter 7. Transmission
4. Transmissicin oil
cooler pipe.
B. 1. Bracket 3. Ballast resistor

2~ C.l ip 4. Ignition Coil
c. 1. Bracket 3. Manifold (induction)

2. Clip 4. Carburetter
--FI'M'ING
-- OF FRONT PIPE
· -·-···--
13. Fit a clip (UR 16857) to each end of the front pump to
accumulator pipe.
14. Fit the smalJ bracket (UR 16663) to the upper-most clip on
the pipe and f .it the remaining large bracket {UR 16866} to
the rocker cover securing nut, as sho\,n in Figure 3
. illustration C, and Figure 2 respectively.
15. Lower the pipe into pos1.uon and finger t.ighten the extension
piece to the ma.i.n pipe.
16. Loosely attach the pipe seating nuts to the brake pump and
the accur.nula tor.
---··---- ·----------------·-·---.....··--
ROLLS-ROYC~ L:t·:JHH~, PYt,'t°S lt\NE, CRE\Vf., i:NGL~ND
·----·----..----......------- -- ---·---- ...
nP/Eck 26. 1 • 70 G
·---~- ..,._.;_____-.:;::"-·· ~ ..·..-===
Na. S'!/G 38
- 6 -
NOTE
In order to fit the pj_pe to the brake pump it may be necessary on
certcJin cars to move the refrigemnl deli.very hose wl1ici1 .i.s attached to the
ref!" igerant compressor. This j_s achieved by roU1 U. ng the hose on its sen ting
on the compressor, until sufficient cleu.rance is obt2tined. The hose shou]d
not be moved too far as a foul may occur vv.i th r,he spring pot. The hos(~
seating nut sr,cu.ld not /)(': slockened as this would allow an escape of refrigerant
pressure.
17. Fit the lowc1 c.1.io to th,~ rear accurru]at.or- seci.1rjng bolt using two
flat washers between the pipe clip and the wiring loom cl.i.p.
18. Fit t11e bracket on the upper clip to the bracket on the inlet man i.fold
as shown in Figure 3 - illustration C.
19. Fit the remaining clip (UR 168G7) to the front pipe and loose] y
attach i t to tJte cylinde, head as shown in Figure 3 -· illus tro tlon A.
20. Tighten the two end nuts of the pipe and tighten the extension pipe
to the main pipe.
21. F.it a clip (UR 16854) to the front pipe <:.1nd secure it to the bracket
ofi the rocker cover.
22, Tighten the two clips (UR 16867) securing both pipes to the cylinder
head.
23. Check that clearance exists between t.l'le front pump to accumulator pipe
and the following components:
(a) The refrigerant delivery hose.

(b) The rear end of the liigh tension cable conduit tube.
(c) The extension pipe and the cylinder block..
Check that clearance exists between the rear pump to accumulator pipe
and the follo·.ving components:
(a) The cng.ine breather p1pe.

( b) The heater coolant tube.
(c) The high tensi'Jn cable conduit tube.
(d) The extension pipe and t11e cylinder block.
continued •..
___________
..,._.
·-----···-··--- ---.,.,--------------------·~
.... ...
ROLlS-ROYIC!:. l.lMITEO, PYM'S l.h.}Jc, CHfW!:, H~GU1ND
·--- -~-·--·-
CMAPTEf~
RP/Erk 2G.l.70 G
-===...=-:..~...-::=.----------=---:--,--------
ROLLS-·f:OY:E SH.VJ.:H SHt. i:~nw ~·
(>
,.I
.'
=====---~·.::.=,..
!,f,!0 P.t'i,ffLF.Y T S~R!~S
.v--... -~....·.. -~,-· i:::..... ..,._.. • ..,_ • ...,., • -·- '··«S..:. ,.,.z.; .........· .,$•.,...._'... • • ·•
Mo.SY/G .38
- 7 -
24. Top-up and bleed the high pressure hydrauU.c sys ten;s as described
in Chapter G. Section G3 of the Worksl10p l\~an~ial.
~-1'\TERL\L RF.QUIRED
CARS FJTTED WJ'rll_ 11!E TORQUE CO;~VERTER TR\>/SMfSSION
PAR'[ NO.
-DESO! I PTT. ON
--·---- QTY
UR 16927 Rear· pipe
UR 1692;) Front pipe 1
UR 16926 Rear Extensicn pipe 1
UR 16924 Front Extension pipe l
UR 16863 Bracket l
KIT NO. 12
UR 16857 CHp 3
UR 1G866 Brack.et 2
UR 16854 Clip t
UR 16867 Clip 2
UR 16858 Clip l
CARS FITTED WIT!t THE FOUR SPEEO AUTm1:\ 1'IC GE,\RBOX
As above except that Renr Pipe UR 16927 is replaced by Rear Pipe UG 13331.
All necessary pzirts <1re contained in Kit Number 14.
IMPORTANT
Wl1en ordering parts ONLY KIT NUMBERS should be quoted.
TIME ALLOWED
Fitting rigid pipes on .left-hand drive cars 7 hours ( 8 hours on cars

fitted with Exhaust Emission Control) .
Fitting rigid pipes on right-hand drive cars G hours .

Topping-·Jp and bleeding the hydraulic systems-1.1 hour·s.
Continued •••
·--------·---·-··..,.·-~--...-·----------...-- ...·--~.. -.-

ROLLS··HOYCE U!v.lTED, PYM'S t.ANE, CHEVVE, Efl!GI.AND
----------------------------··-·-· ------ - - - - - - - - - - · - - · · · · · -.. •4
BP/Eck 26.1.70 CtlAPTER .,..,..,

.___.__- - ,.•---•• ... ...-._. . _...,_ _ _.., ..,~ -~,~.-.>i~h..._• • .. ..- • - -•,.. - ,.,.,.,__..._.,..,_._ ..c.----~.-.. .. _. . ,._, . .·.:.··'·· ...._., ,;, •,•~ ,: ,•., ·•,.'
~ •;~':-:""'"t•.> ..... I : , ' •
... ;'")"'· ...,

··--·---·-..--
_......,_ _____ ,,___ ,_....... _._ --,:&,·-·-··~ ····=· .........
......................--.~---·-·---··----~·""''"'··-----~----·-·.....-. .....
' - 0 .............. . . . _ ... - ..........., .................. - - - -- ... - " '•• -, . -
----·- · -
.~- · - - - ·· ·
No.SY/G ;52
- 8 -
ACCESSIBILITY
On cars f i tte<i with rigid pipes the accessibility of the twake

pump c1nd the ziccumuJator are affected, and before any s0rvj_ce work. cnn
he undertnken on eit!",er of these items, the rigid pipes will have to be
unclipped ond moved to nJ.J.ow access to these units.
The changes to the existing procedures arc I isted be.low;
BRAKE _PUMPS
1. If it is requjred to remove or gain access to either brake

pump it will be necessary to remove .:111 clips from that particuJar
pipe, excepting the lower c.l ip which secures the pipe to the
accumulator. This will release the pipe sufficiently to allow it
to be swung away from the pump. The· pump can then be removed i.n
the normal manner as descl'ibed in Chapter G of the Workshop Manual.
FRONT .J\CCU:VllJL'\ TOR
1. In order· to remove the f1'ont acr,umulator it. will be necessary

to remove only the extension pipe wllich connects the main front
pipe to the accumulator. The front accumulator can then be
removed as desc!'ibed in Chapter G of the Work.shop Manual.
REAR r'\CCU\'!JJL\ TOR
When removing r-he rear accumulator the following procedure should be

adopted:-
1. On left-hand drive cars the front accumulator should be removed.

On right:-hand drive cars the front accumulator bo.1 ts should b2
slackened.
2. Remove the front pip€ extensjon piece shown at 10 in Figure 2.
3. Remove the clips shown at G, 8, and 9 on Figure 2.
4. Remove the rear pipe ex.tension piece.
5. The rear pipe can now be moved away from the accumulator sufficiently
for the latter to be r€moved in the usual manner as described in
Chapter G of U1e Workshop Manual.
Continued •••
__....___ _.._... _.... . _______- ____ . ____________
.... ,, .._ , .,.
CHAPTER
OP/Eck. 26.1.70 G
. ;.:.._,
ROL!.S··f·-{OYCE SILVER 5H/i.DOV.I
f,,J\lr) EiNTLEY T SHrn:s
!: ' ~': r· \: t f l ' ~• • ~: I 'j 1
t • •,
=:;:.::,;:=====-:-::::.-:::::.---····
Mo. SY/G 38
- 9 -
To cat.er for the .increased work noted. pr2viously, the times quoted in
Service Bulletin SY/G31 and in the r,bn Hour Schedule have been amended AND THE
REVISED TIMES LISTED llELOW SHOULD BE L'SED FOR ALL Ct\l{S FI'ITED W!Tll RIGID PIPES.
l{!CHT-H:\ND DRIVE C\RS TIME /•-..I.LOWED
FRONT ACClli\lUL:\TOR ASS.Ei\mLY ONLY replace

Including blced.i.ng the sy8tems and fitting the
road wheel. 2.60 hours
REAR ACCUMULATOR ASSEMBLY ONLY 1·epJace

Including slackening the front sphere for access,
bleeding the system and fitting the rood wheel. 4.0 hours
-LEFT-H~~D
- ·· DRIVE CARS.
FRONT ACCUJ\lUL\TOR ASS.8\lBLY ONLY replace
Including bleeding the sys terns and fit ting ;,:he
road wheel. 2.60 hours
REAR ACCUl\.1UL\TOR ASSFMBLY ONLY replace

Including removing and flt.ting the front accumulator,
bleeding the systems and fitting the road wheel. 5.0 hours
ALL C/\.RS
To replace both accumulator assemblies i.n one operation.

Including bleeding the systems and fitting the road
wheel. 5 .o hours
BRI\KE PUMP replace

Including removal of corburetters, inlet manifold and
bleedir.g the systems. 5. 80 hours
(7.50 on cars fitted with
Exhaust Emission Control).
BOTH •BRAKE PUMPS replace

Including removal of carburetters, inlet manifold
and bleedj_ng the systems 6.20 hours
(7.90 on cars fitted with
Exhaust Emission Control).
Continued .• •
-...----- -------..·-----
ROLLS~ROYCf. UMffrn, PYM'S :...•Ulc, CREWE. ENGLAND
...~-·------··..-------·--·-- ..---..-···---·----------·---- ----·-·---.. ....
PO /r.~1, ')f'. 1 7() (:

•,'
> ,~., ,. ...... .
!fo. SY IG 38
10 -
BRAKE PUMP - renlace IO' rings

Including s.lacken :Lng c,f p.i.pe for access~
removal of pump body and bJ eedii-ig sys tcm. 'j • 8 hOU l'S
~·-----------------···- --·-----...- -·---..... -- ·~-------

______ ____
----·-···-..._......,., ·-·-.....·- ....---·----
RCUS-HO'lCf: LIMIT:::D, PYM'S UH·!E, CRt'.;'l//:, U{GV,.NO
... ---
.....
--------,,.
,.,...:,
BP/Eck 2G. t • 70
ROLLS•ROYC£ SILVER SHADOW
::.
No SY/G39
Circulation - All Overseas Distrlbutors
and Retailers
CATEOORY C
HYDRAULIC A<XlMULATOR - NITROGEN CHARGING
APPLICABLE TO:
All Roils~oyce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars.
DESCRIPTION
In Service Bulletin SY/G31 it is advised that the accumulators are
charged as described in Service Bulletin SY/G39.
The equipment required and procedure are as described below.

NITROGEN
High purity nitrogen is required and can usually be obtained in cylinders
of between 200 - 300 cu. ft. (5,66 - 8,49 cu.m.) capacity from the local
suppliers of industrial gases.
REGULI\.TORS
In order to control the flow of gas from the cylinder and to indicate
the pressure in the accumulator, a regulator will be required hav.i.ng
a working pressure of o· - 1 500 lb/sq. in. (0 - 105 ,46 kg/sq.an.) or
0 - 102.1 atmospheres. Usually these may be obtained either from or
through the local gas supplier.
PIPES AND FITI'INGS

To enable the regulator to be connected to the accwnulator, a length of
high pressure hose will be required. This hose should be of the armoured
type and must be capable of withstanding a gas pressure of at least 4 OCX)
lb/sq.in. (281,23 kg/sq.an.) or 275 a:tmospheres.
End fittings for this pipe must be capable of withstanding the same
pressures and should be obtained locally with the hose. To connect
the pipe to the accunulator, the end fitting can be made to fit
directly onto the accunulator or to fit the Rolls-Royce charging and
Continued •••

--· ROLLS•ROYCE SILVER SHAOOW
AND SENTLEV T SERIES
==============~~~====:..
No. SY/G39
- 2 -
discharging tool RH 7808.
PROCEDURE
It should be noted that the utmost care must be exercised when handling
this charging equipment and consequently the accumulator should be removed
from the car to enable it to be charged.
1. Before fitting the regulator to the nitrogen cylinder, the
cylinder control valve should be opened, such that the sub-
sequent discharge of nitrogen will remove any dust or grit
which may be present on the cylinder control valve seating.
2. Fit the regulator and the high pressure pipe to the nitrogen
cylindero
3. Remove the charging valve cap from the accumulator, ensuring
that the cap is fitted with a serviceable sealing ring.
On later cars an additional seal is provided by a nylon ball
which is fitted into the lower end of the charging valve
adaptor (see Service Bulletin SY/G14). Great care must be
exercised when ranoving the charginr. valve c~p from these
later cars; any gas which has escaped µ.,st the :charging. valve
may be trapped behind the nylon ball and can cause it to be
shot out with alarming force.
The nylon ball must be replaced with a new one when the
accunulator has been charged~
4." Open the regulator valve slowly to eliminate any residual air
and any dust which may be present in the high pressure pipe.
5. Connect the high pressure pipe to the accumulator.
6.. ?lace the accumulator in a corner of the workshop and surround

it with some fonn of shielding, preferably a ntm1ber of sacks
filled with sand or soil.
7. Open the main control valve of the nitrogen cylinder.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROVCE LtMrTEO, PVM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
7.7.70 CHAPTER G
BP/JC
ROU.S•ROYCE SILVER SHAOOW
.'.-'5:eRVlCE
. <~}".
. • •
.,•
·BULtETIN
C ' :. ~.: • •
No. SY/G39
- 3 -
8. Slo.vly open the regulator valve and allow the pressure

to build up until the gauge shows a reading of 1 ()(X)
lb/sq.in. (70,3 kg./sq.cm.) or slightly more~ This slight
excess pressure will compensate for the small pressure loss
which occurs when the high pressure pipe is disconnected.
9. Close the regulator valve, allowing the pressurised

nitrogen int.re high pressure pipe to escape and causing
the accwnulator charging valve to close.
10. Remove the high pressure pipe from the accwnulator and
quickly fit the warning plate, washer, nylon tall (where
applicable) and charging valve cap.
11 • Torque tighten the charging valve cap to between 22 lb. n.

and 25 lb.ft. (3,04 kg.m. and 3~45 kg.m.)
CHAPTER
BP/JC 7.7.70 G
SERVICE BULLETIN
=-=============================
NoSY/G40
and Retailers
CA.TEGORY C
ACOJMJIA10R VALVE OVERHAUL
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCR1Pl'I0N
The design of the accumulator valve bobbin and piston has been changed.
The new design provides a hardened seat for the unloading valve
and a shoulder on the piston taper to acconmodate any dirt that may be
present and which otherwise could .impair the functioning of the piston.
These new parts are supplied in sets for all replacement purposes.
The two types of ~ISTONS ARE 1'¥)1' IN'fERCl:11\NCPABLE BFIWEfN BOBBINS.
Under no circumstances should an early type of piston be fitted to
the new type of bobbin. This is MOST IMPORTANI' to ensure correct
functioning of the valve.
The two piston and bobbin assemblies are illustrated overleaf in
Figure 1.
PART NUMBERS FOR CCNPONENTS
EARLY IATE
UE 10387 Bobbin UE 35225
UE 10266 Piston UE 35226
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LfMITEO, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/JC 10. 7. 70 G
- - .,,.
ANO BENTLEY T SERlES ~.~gaVICE
;-
BULLETIN
No.SV/G40
- 2 -
Fig. Piston and bobbin assemblies

A Early design
B Late design
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE , CREWE, ENGLAND
.BP/ JC 10. 7. 70 CHAPTER G

Service Bulletin
SECTION G
Circulation _ All Distributors !~111 .. 1 i11 \n. SY/G41

and Retailers
Date: 27.8.70 :--11, ·(·t \n. l
CATEGORY C
HANDBRAKE C/;L!PE"t LEVER LUBRICATION
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls~oyce Silver Shadow and Bentley T series cars.
DESCRIPTION
When lubricating handbrRke linkages at the 6 000 miles (10 000 km.) service,
it has proved difficult to effectively lubricate certain of the caliper linkage
pivots using the conventional techniques.
Fig. 1 Lubrication points of handbrake caliper pivots
ArrONs indicate pivots to be lubricated

w.ith penetrating oil from an aerosol spray.
Continued •••
, R,,:1!, ~ •. ,.. ,, i ,·•:il,'r. 1970

Rolls Royce Stiver s.~adow It Rantlr.y I Sem1s Service Bulletin
SECT!C~~ G
Circulation - All Distributors and Retailers H:1llctin No. S ~
Date: Sheet iXo. 2

27.8~70
Trials have shown that this problem can be overcane by the use of'
penetrating oil applied from anaerosol spray. Therefore, when lubricating
the handbrake caliper linkages, it is reco.rrmended that the pivots arrowed in
Figure 1 be sprayed with penetrating oil such as 'Rocket I W.D.40.
Care should be taken to ensure that this spray is directed at the

pivots only and that it does not contact the brake discs and eads.
All other linkage pivots should be lubricated with an approved

lubricant as listed in the Workshop Manual T.S.D. 2476 - Chapter D -
Section D4.
1' Rolls. Aoycc~ Limit<-d 1970

_ _ _ _ _ _ __ 01i1_s-_fl_;_o,_ce_s_,1i_ve_, _s1,,_adi_o_
_ 11_ w _9_B_ell_l~....:.
ey_T_Si_e1,_ie_~ _ _ ____ _:s:..:8.'~!.!._B_uli_'A_'Bt_i_n
SECTION
Circulation -All Dis tributors and Bulletin No. SY/ G42
Retailer s
Date: :1-. 12 , 70. Sheet No. 1
BRAKE PAD IDENTIFICATION
APPLICABLE 10:
All Roll s-Royce Silver Shadow a nd Bent l ey T Series cars •
.Q!;OCRIPTION
The brake pads approved for use in the above cars have previous ly
been identifie d by a s eries of coloured paint spots on the outer
e~~e of the brake pad back plate. This method of identification
has now been di s conti nued and in future a ll brake pads will be
identified by a s eries of letters ard nwnbers painted on t he outer
edge of the frict i on mat erial.
The changes have been made for standardisation purposes only,

and there has been no change in brake pad dimens ion, part numbers
or friction material. This Service Bulletin is therefore issued
for infonnatlon purposes only.
The change s in ident ification markings are shown in

Figure 1.
BP/F.Ck Continued •••

- - - - - - - -- - - --------- - - - - -- - - - -Service Bulletin
Rolls-Royce Stiver Shadow 8 Bentley TSeries
. - -- . ··-
SECTION
Circulat ion - AU DisLributor s and Bulletin No. SY/G42
Retaile rs
Date: 4. 12. 70 Sheet No. 2
PAD TYPE DISPLACED PAD MARKING NEW PAD MARKING
Ferodo DCI ~ Cl
,.·i··I.· · 1 r ~j
' ( '..' EE ":...
: : FER -'~ DC
I
blue yellow
V \ blue
Mintex M69
:·...·• :..·' ,·,·.......d..
t ··'.'·.,.... ,. . . ...... . , . ··:~_f'h_x··,vi59 :·.FF. -::·; j
V I
green red
'
purple
M48
F.igure 1 Brake pad markings
BP/ ECk
Circulation All Distributors Section G

& Retailers Bulletin No SY/G43
Page No 1
Date 7 .6. 71
CATF.GalY C
CASTROI../GIRLING GREEN BRAKE FLUID
APPLICABLE TO
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Corniche motor cars, and all
Bentley 'T' Series and Corniche motor cars produced after Car serial
Number: SRH 11085 and CRH 11148.
DE~IPTICJIJ
The hydraulic systems of all cars produced after the above Car Serial Numbers
will have been filled with Castrol/Gi rling Green brake fluid.
This type of fluid meets and exceeds the British Standards

Specification SAE J 1703 which has superseded Specification SAE 70 R3.
As the name implies the new fluid is Green in colour. The fluid is
being used because it has a higher boiling point that the Castrol/Girling
Amber fluid previously used and as such gives greater protection
against brake fluid boiling.
The Green fluid is miscible with both Crimson and Amber fluids
and can therefore be used for topping-up purposes on cars already
filled with either of these fluids. However it is not advisable to
top up a hydraulic system filled with Green fluid witil any other fluid
as this would lower its boiling point, thus reducing its effectiveness.
It i s important that if a hydraulic system is drained arid

refilled with Green fluid, the warning plate on tile fluid reservoir
should be changed for one that recommends only Green fluid. A supply
of labels suitable for this purpose is enclosed with this Service
Bulletin.
It should also be noted that all brake fluid is hygroscopic,
i.e. that the fluid will absorb and chemically combine with water from
the atmosphere.
To eliminate t he possibility of contaminating the brake fluid
it is most essential that the brake fluid is not exposed to the
atmosphere more than is absol utely necessary. I t should always be
stored in and used direct from small sealed containerso When the
braking system is replenished immediately replace the covers both on
the brake reservoirs and the container.
Continued •••
I (C) Rolls- Royce Motors limited 1971

Circulation All Distributors Section G

& Retailers Bulletin No SY/G43
PageNo 2
Date 7 .6. 71
Label - To fit
To enable the label to be affixed to the hydraulic fluid reservoir
the following procedure should be followed.
1. Ensure that the surface to which the label is to be
adhered is perfectly clean.
2. I.11nerse the label in tepid water for 15 seconds.
3. Peel off the protective backing from the label.
4. Place the label on the cleaned surface of the hydraulic
fluid reservoir and apply even pressure until it has
adhered.
Arr/JCl/B;k
I
Rolls-Royce fJ Bentley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation: Distributors and Retailers Section G

in Australia only Bulletin No SY/G43 Addendum
Page Nol
Date 26. 1. 72
CATEGORY C
BRA.KE FLUID
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars and all
Rolls-Royce or Bentley Corniche cars.
DESCRIPTION
From Car Serial Numbers SRH 11085 and CRH 11148 the above motor cars
have their hydraulic systems filled with Castrol/Girling Brake Fluid
Green.
It is proposed by Castrol to begin supplying this fluid to the

Australian market in approximately July of 1972. Until that time the
nearest fluid to the Castrol/Girling Brake Fluid Green perfonnance
that is available for re-fill use in Australia is a fluid marketed
under the name of Castrol/Girlock Amber.
It is therefore recommended that until supplies of Castrol/Girling

Brake Fluid Green become available Castrol/Girlock Amber should be. used
for top-up and re-fill purposes. This fluid is miscible with
Castrol/Girling Brake Fluid Green and there should therefore be no
problems with its use.
Once Castrol/Girling Brake Fluid Green becomes available it

should be used for all top-up and re-fill purposes. It is not
necessary to drain the previous mixture of Castrol/Girling Brake
Fluid Green and Castrol/Girlock Amber from the system.
Arr/JCl
(e) Aolls-Rovce Morors Limited 1972

-------- ............ _______ ___ ..._._... Cars
/lo/ls-floyce ff Benriey Matar - .,,. _____ ____
_,

Circulation All Dis tributors and Retaile rs Sectio n G
Bulletin No SY/G14
Page No 1 of 2
Date 29. 7 . 7 i
CATEOORY C
--·---··
!f{DR.AULIC_PUMP SERVICING
APPLICABLE 1\1:
-------·-··
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Comici1e motor cars , and al l Bentley T
Series and Corn:lche motor cars.
DESCRIPTION
tool .is available for removing t he bydr&ulic pump s f rDm th2
A ,1e•.v
arove cars. Th.i.s new to o."L has been dev eloped to supersede the existing
tool \\ohich requ i red the carburetters and inl e t manifo ld to be removed ,
The new tool is so designed that it can be used to remove either

hyc!raulic pump after disconne cting only the hydrau lic pipes and the·
,:)
pu~p outer cover.
C:
2
0)
w
C The tool .is now available from Rolls-Roy ce Motors L.imited, the
,!: part number being RH 8428.
"a)
. C: I t should also be noted that it is unne cessary to r·e1nove a
ct . b~ake pwnp fran the engine i n order to replace leaking sealing rings
as these can easily be replaced with the pwnp in s itu by r emoving the
pipes and outer body and then ·removing the ~ealir,g rings with a
suitable tool.
When replacj_ng the sealing rings or the complete pump assembly

on cars fitted with Exhaus t Frn.i.s s lon Control, i t will be nece ssary to
remove the pipe between the gulp valve and the carbure tter 'T' piece
t o gain access .
TlME ALLOWED
To replace hydraulic pump sealing rings or to replace the complete

pump assembly -
CARS NOT FITTED CA.RS FITTED WITH
WITH EXr..AUST EXHAUST Fl~ISSION
Er.USSION CONTROL CONI'RDL
FR0;\;1' Ptr.1P t.8 hrs. 1.9 hrs.
REAR Pilli1P 2.0 hrs . 2.0 hrs.
BOTn PU:\'1PS 3. 8 hrs . 3 .9 hrs.
Continu ed,,.
·-----·----· llo/ls-Royce Bentley Mo!GT Cars
___ ........ft____ -......._. .... -~----- ----·-·-·· ---- .. ·-·-·· ....~.--.,.·--··-····
._._ ,,~ .... ..-.

Circulation All Distributors and Retailers Section G
Bulletin No SY/G44-
P,nge No 2 of 2
Date 29. 7. 7 l
L1cluding partial remova.l of r·igJd pipes to gain access 1 removal

of the pump outer body and including bleeding the systems as necessary
on completion.
The above times supersede those given in the Manhour Schedule

(TSD Publication 2251).
Arr/JCl/ECk
(0 Rolls-Royce Mo,o,s Limited 1971

Ro/ls-fioyce fl Bentley Motor Cars
Circulation All Di.s-tr ibutors Section G
and Retailers Bulletin Nosr/G45
Page No t
Date Z6. 7 ~ 71
gi._r_EGORY C
BRAKE. PUMP BLANKING. CAPS
APPLICABLE. TO
All Rolls~oyce Silver Shadow, Bentley T Series an<l Rolls-Royce

and Bentley Corniche mot.or cars.
New and l~econdi tioned brake pumps and those rer:tJVed clurJng serv:i.ce
always contain a cer.tain quantity of brr.,ke fluid, Such brake pumps
are fl tt.ed with blanking caps to prevent. th.e ingress of dirt.
Fitting a pump without first removing ti,e .blanking caps can

result in a hydraulic lock and it has been found that sufficient
pressure can be generated against the cap to da,11age the hardened
"'C
C surface of the brake pump cam.
"'
Cl
C
w
,5
It is therefore imperative that t..tie tilanklng caps are removed
"O
qi
prior to· fitting a brake pump.
·E
0::
-------·-·---·-
Arr/JCl/Hly
!lolls-Royce ft Bentley Motor Cars
---- -------·-----------
Circulation All Distrj_butors and Reta.ilers Section G
Bulletin No S\'/G46
Page No 1 of 1
Date 29. 7,71
C.O..TEC'.ORY C
:~-----··- ···-
All Roll s -Royce Si l ver Shadow , Bentley T serie s and Rolls - Royce
and Bentley Cornie he moto r c a rs.
DESCRIPTION
--·- ..·- --
~
The Ac cumulator/ Frame flexi.ble hose s c an be f:itted j_neorreetly by
allowing the ho se to twJ.~t. when t jght ening the fi t.tl ~gs. T!li~ causes
t he hose to be ro tate '! c!\~~c1_y from its correct p osi t J.on whid1 may r e~~l t
i.:1 premat 1..!re f'aiJ.ure in se rvice.
--PROCEDURE
-----
TJ fit the hoses, proce ed as folJcws:
l. Attach hose e nd fit tings to accumulators and frame connectors,

ensuri ng that the e nds are lo ose enough to allow the hoses t o
asslDI\e a natura l position as dictated by hose stiffne ss and shape.
2. Grip hose ends whilst tightening end fittings to ensure that the
ho se .is not rotated awrdy f rom its natural run.
Arr/JCl/GF
·~
.....,. ~ Rolls-Aovce Motors Limited 1971
Ro/ls-Royce Ii Bentley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributo rs and Retailers Section G
Bulletin No SY/G47 (Issue 2)
Page No 1 of 7
Date 28. 1. 72
CATEGCR.Y C
REAR HEIGHT CON'IROL VALVE NOISE
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series and all Rolls-
Royce and Bentley Corniche cars produced after t he following Car
Serial Numbers.
Four-door Saloon cars SRX 9393
Two-door Saloon cars ~ 9248

Convertible cars DRX 9247
Long Wheelbase cars LRX 9281
DESClUPTIOO'
Over the past fav months there has been an increase .in the incidence
of noisy· height control valves in service. This noise has occurred
in the form of a creaking or clicking noise lo.v down in the rear
quarters of the car.
It has been found that the noise follo.ved a change to the valve
installation to increase its sensitivity to wheel movements . This
change was introduced to reduce any loss of levelled height occurring
in service due to settling of various components.
This change increased the loads on the operating linkage and

als·o the rubbing speed of the internal moving parts resulting in copper
being deposited on the cross-shaft with increasing friction and
subsequent noise .
A bearing of improved material known as 'Fluorosint 1 has therefore

been developed as a replacement for the present phosphor bronze bearings.
Thes e bearings are now available for ritting to valves in service.
Because of the lower friction of these 'Fluorosint' bearings and

quicker action of the valve it is possible that hydraulic pipe knocks
may be produced. Therefore a nav type of inle t/exhaust valve has
been developed to provide the correct degree of damping on the action
of fluid flo.v in the valve. The new inlet/exhaust valve is of a
composite construction consisting essentially of a steel washer with
a nylon insert moulded in its centre.
Continued •••
C) Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1972

Page No 2 of 7
Date 28. 1. 72
It is important that whenever 'Fluorosint' bearings are used in

a valve, a new composite inlet/exhaust val ve is used also, as described
in the fitti ng instructions . In those cases where this modification is
the subject of a warranty claim please quote this Bulletin number.
Because of a pressure difference which can arise between the

inner and outer end fac es of the bush under certain conditions, it is
possible for the 'Fluorosint' bush t o be moved longitudinally in its
bore. This can result in the outer end of the bush pushing against
the shaft seal, thus dis torting the seal and allowing leakage at the
operating shaft.
This pressure difference i s increased by the reduction in

clearance between t he shaft and the bush such that fluid cannot
travel across the bush and thereby equalise the pressure.
In order to overcome this, a shallow slot should be cut across

the bearing face of the bush, thus ensuri ng that any pressure which
develops in the valve housing, i s felt on both end faces of the bush.
'O
~
o"' It is important that the slot is placed in the position shown

~ in Figure 2A •
.5
'O
~
C
·c
Q.. PROCEDURE
Before beginning this procedure i t should be ensured that clean

facilities are available for the valve overhaul.
1. Place the car on a ramp and depressuris e the hydraulic system

as described in the Workshop Manual T.S.D. 2476 Section Gl.
2. Disengage the lower ball joints of the height control valve

linkages.
3. Remove the f l exible hoses and steel pipes from the rear adaptors
of both height cont rol valves.
4. The pipes fr<.Ml the front end of t he valves are connected i nto
junction blocks on the sub-frame crossmember. The pipes should
be di sconnected fr<Xn the juncti on blocks.
5. Remove the nuts and bolts which secure the two valves t o the car.
6. Remove the valves , operating linkages and steel pipes from

the car as assemblies.
7. Remove the operating linkage fr<Ml one of the valves after first
marking the position of the lever on the shaft.
8. Remove the circlip and reservoir adaptor (see Fig. l).
Continued •••
•
11D
.J (t) Aoll•Rovce Motors Limited 1972

Rolls-Royce fl Bentley Motor Cars ServictJ Bulletin
CirculationAU Distributors and Retailers SectionG

Page No 3 of 7
Date 28. 1. 72
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 M 491
Fig. 1 Sectional View - Rear Height Control Valve

1. Adaptor-high pressure inlet
2. Inlet valve
3. Plunger valve
4. Plunger
5. Adaptor-reservoir connection
6. Operating shaft
7. Sealing ring
8. Circlip
9. Washer
9. Remove the two circlips from the operating shaft bore and
remove the backing washers and seals.
10. Remove the four nuts and washers which secure the two parts of
the valve together.
11. Rotate the operating shaft through 180° to disengage the
shaft from the plunger.
12. Withdraw the plunger.

13. Withdraw the operating shaft from the valve noting the
position of the shaft to facilitate re-assembly. Inspect
the shaft for any signs of copper being deposited on the two
bearing surfaces. Any deposits of copper should be carefully
smoothed with fine emery tape, but it will not be necessary
to remove the deposits completely.
14. Place a washer (Part Number UA 2051) on the inside edge of one
of the bushes and using a suitable piece of bar, carefully tap
the bush out of the housing. Repeat this operation on the
remaining bush.
Continued •••
!.., «:} Ao\1$-Royce Motors Limited 1972
Rolls-Royce ft Bentley Motor Cats Service Bul/stin
Circulation All Distributors and Retailers SectionG

Bulletin No SY/G47 (Issue 2
Page No 4 of 7
Date 28. 1 • 72
15. Remove the high pressure inlet adaptor, withdrawing the spring;
discard the inlet valve.
16. Fit the new inlet valve and spring ensuring that the spring is
correctly located on the valve.
17. Refit the high pressure inlet adaptor.

Note The following operations which detail the fitting of
the new bushes should be carefully followed. If the
bushes are damaged or misaligned the valve may leak
from the shaft seal.
18. .Place one of the new bushes into the housing (see Fig. 2),
ensure that it is square with the bore.
1 2 3 4
M490
Fig. 2 Method of Fitting New Bushes
1. Small washer (UA 6102)

2. Bolt (UA 118)
3. Large Washer (UA 2053)
4. Nut (UA 301)
Continued •••
I..... C) Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1972


Page No 5 of 7
Date 28. 1. 72
19. Take a washer (Part Number UA 6102) and after ensuring that it is
a free fit in the bore, place it on the outer edge of the bush.
Pass a bolt (Part Number UA 118) through the washer and fit a
washer (Part Nwnber UA 2053) to the other end of the bolt.
Using a nut (Part NurnberUAZDl) carefully draw the bush into
the housing until the washer (Part Number UA 6102) contacts the
end of the bore.
20. Reverse the bolt and the washers and carefully draw the
remaining bush into place.
21. Place the levelling valve housing with the studs pointing
downwards onto a flat surface.
22. Pass a hacksaw blade through the bore of both bushes and carefully
slot both bushes to a maximum depth of 0.020 in. (0,051 mm.) as
shown in Figure 2A.
23. Carefully remove all burrs and debris from the bushes.
1 2 3
_j[_
Fig. '2A Method of Slotting Bushes
1. Maximum of 0.020 in.

(0,051 rrm.) slot
2. 'Fluorosint' bush
3. Hacksaw blade
Continued •••
(C) Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1972

Rolls-Royce fJ Bentley Motor Cars Service Bullstin

Bulletin No SY/G47 (Issue 2
Page No 6 of 7
Date 28. 1 • 72
24. Thoroughly wash all parts with clean methylated spirits and
dry off the compressed air.
25. Remove all exposed rubber seals and fit new seals.
26. Fit the operating shaft to the valve noting that the position
of the shaft denotes whether the valve assembly will be left or
right-hand.
27. Fit new shaft seals, the backing washers and circlips. The
seals should be lubricated with brake fluid.
28. Insert the spring and plunger into the bore ensuring that it
moves freely. Allow the nose of the plllllger to pass the
. operating shaft then rotate the shaft through 180° to lock
the plunger into position.
29. Fit a new sealing ring to the adaptor. Fit the adaptor and
circlip previously removed.
"C
,:: 30. Fit the two parts of the valve together using new seals on the
'°
'6, housing face.
,::
U..I
.5 31. Repeat Operations 7 to 30 inclusive on the remaining valve.
"C
!!!
.5
ct 32. To identify the valve as having been modified apply a spot
of blue paint to the high pressure inlet adaptor of both valves.
33. Ensure that the valve linkage balls are free from cadmium
plate, are lubricated and are correctly adjusted. Fit the
operating lever in accordance with the marks previously made.
34. Refit the valves to the car, leaving the lONer joints of the
operating linkage disconnected.
35. Bleed the rear levelling system at the two rear bleed nipples.
It is not necessary to bleed al\Y of the braking system.
36. Distribute a weight of approximately 600 lb. (272 kg.)

equally between the front and rear seats.
37. Run the engine with the gear range selector lever in the Park
position and the gearchange thermal switch removed.
38. Check and adjust the levelled height as necessary; the

height from the ground to the centre of the reannost bottom
bolt which attaches the crossmember mollllting forging to the
body sill should be 0.875 in.+ 0.125 in. (22,22 nm.+
3,175 IJJTI.) less than the distance from the ground to the
centre of the reannost bottom bolt attaching the rear yoke
to the trailing ann (see Fig. 3).
Continued •••
...I (C
.., Roll5-Aoyce Motors Limited 1972
Ro/ls-Royce fl Bentley Motor Cars S1rvie11 Sulllltin
Circulation All Distributors and Retailers SectionG

Bulletin No SY/ G47 (Issue 2)
Page No 7 of 7
Date 28. 1. 72
Fig. 3 Car Height Chee.king Points - Rear
A. Datum to centre of forging se<?Iring

bolt
-0
C 8. Do.tum to centre of axle yoke
"'
Cl s ecuring bolt
C
IU
.!:
-0
~ Parts Required
"J:
a.
Kit Number - 16
Time All owed

3.50 hrs. This time is inclusive of removal, overhaul and refitting
the two valves, bleeding, r esetting levelled height and road testing.
Arr/JCl/.ECk
(0 Rolls-Rovce Motors Limited 1972

CHAPTER H
SUB-FRAMES AND SUSPENSION
RO L l S - RO V C E S.1l VER SHADOW
No.SY/ Hl
FOR INFffiMATION
fllONf SUSPENSION SHOCK DAMPERS
APPLICABLE TO:
Rolls-Royce Silve r Shadow Standard and Coac hbuilt Cars

Bentley T Series Standard and Coa chbuilt Cars
DESCRIPTION
On curre nt production cars , t he range of front wheel t ravel in the vertical

plane has been s ligh tly increase d . To accormnoda te this increas ed moveme nt,
certain modific at ions to the f r ont shock dampers and their connections have
been ne cessary.
These modifications also affec t ea rlj e r production car s which do no t have

the incre ased wheel t rave l, since the spare s replacements for them will, in
future, be the sarre as those fi t ted to current production cars .
With t he introduction of t hese rrodified pieces, the method of setting

the Front 'Showroom' Car He ight (i. e. with the levelling system inoperative)
requires revi sion, and it i s mainly f or this reason t ha t thi s Bulletin has bee n
i ssue d.
The front shock damper arrangement s hown in Figure 1 i s colMlon to produc -

tion cars built prior to the fo llowi ng c ar numbers - SBH 1433 and CRX 1583 .
The front s hock damper arrangement s hown in Figure 2 i s common to cars

produced after t he fo r e going car numbers with the exception of the following
cars which have t he arrangement s hown i n Figure 1.
1435 1437 1443 1445 1447 1449 145 1 1453 1455 1457 1459 1461
The arrangeme nt shown in Figure 1 prov i des a me ans of fine adjustment which
permits 0.46 i n. (11,51 mn. ) alteration to the ca r front height. This adjust-
ment is des cribed in Section HS, page H36 of the Worl<shop Manual.
Cont inued, .•
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREW£, ENGLAND
SB/MP t 4. 1o. 66. SECTION H

Printed In Entlano
=== =======-- -· = = ======= =-~,,-·-·-···
.. . ·=
RO LL. S- H OY CE !i l l Vt: R 5 rlADOW • .:...
:· :~o .. '
iJ
---
--~ - - · -· ·~
.' ..., . ' .
.AND S ENT t.f. Y T SE R I ES ....
===== ==::::-= ,=:.:.::.:.--=== =======
-.=., . _. -- -···· -.J'-,. .,~·:..,1o., .....:.;. ; ,.~ ... -...1.- .. ~ ~.J.. 'lo -
- 2 - !1/.;;i. SY/ Hl
I
,. L------4
r .---s
FIG.2 Front Suspens ion Damper Arrangeme nt-·

Current Type
SECURIN] r-.1JT 4 REP LACEMEl\"'f DA!ViPER

FIG. 1 Front Su~pension Damper 2 DISTAXCE PIECE 5 BALL JO ii\'T' HOUS IN:3
Arrangement - Earlie r Type 3 PACKINJ PIECES AS 6 BALL JOINT - CCT,t\!ON
REQUIRED TO BOTH f..RRANJEMF.:l\i~rs
Continued •••
- - -- - --ROLLS
--- - -- -L. IMITF.D,
- ROYCE
- --------------
PYM'S
- - - - -- ----·---
LAN E, CREWE , ENGLAND
- ----------- - - - - - -- --·------ -- ---- -- --·--- --
SB/ MP 14. 10.6G. SECYION H
f>rintr.d In Engi:a.nd
SERVICE BULLETIN
- 3 - No. SY/J-11
The arrangement shown in Figure 2 which supersedes the Figure l dispenses

with the fine screwed adjustment. However, fine adjustment can still be
achieved by utilising a new packing piece which is 0.064 in. (1,59 mm.) thick.
It is permissible to position a maximwn of six of these packings, if required,
with the existing thicker packings beneath each front spring seat.
lDENI'IfICATION
To determine which arrangement is fitted to a particular car, a visual check at

the lower ball joint housing will suffice. If there is a lock nut present
above the ball joint housing next to the shock damper casing, then the arrange-
ment is the earlier type as shown in Figure 1.
The absence of a lock nut denotes the current arrangeirent shown in Figure 2
y,hich means that no screwed adjustment should be attempted when setting the car
front height.
PROCEDURE
~'henever a current type shock damper is supplied as a replacement for the earlier
type, it will be necessary to utilise part of the ball joint assembly from the
earlier type damper which is to be rerroved; The part to be utllised is the ball
joint which will have to be unscrewed from within its obsolete housing.
When removed, the ball joint should be screwed into the new housing supplied
with the shock damper, and the assembly adjusted. The complete ball joint
assembly should then be screwed onto the end of the new shock da~er.
Instructions for adjusting the ball joint p~-load in its housing are detailed
in Section H4, page H22 of the Workshop Manual.
To fit the damper, use the distance piece and securing nut provided, con-
fonning· to the arrangement illustrated in Figure 2.
SB/MP 14.10.66. SECTION H

Printed In EnJllftd
AND BENTLEY T SERI E.S SERVICE BULLETIN
No.SY/H2
FOR INFORMATION
11\CREASED FRONf \\1-IEEL TRAVEL
APPLICABLE TO:
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow Standard and Coachbuilt cars

Bentley T Series Standard and Coachbuilt cars
DESCRIPTION
The increase in front wheel vertical travel, described in the previous Bulletin
sY/H1, has resulted in further detail changes now incorporated on cars from the
following numbers.
Standard cars 1529 less 1531 and onwards

Coachbuil t cars 1646 and onwards
'Ille securing arrangement at the top of the front suspension dampers fitted
to the above cars (see Fig.1 overleaf), varies from those illustrated in
Bulletin SY/H1. This means that three different arrangements may be observed
in Service, the two previously illustrated. and that which is common to all cars
after those with the above numbers.
~nenever the new arrangerrent is encountered, it is essential that

existing fittings are retained and utilised whenever a damper is renewed.
Under no circumstances should a distance collar and standard nut be fitted to
the damper spindle such as those illustrated in Figure 2 (items 1 and 2) of
the previous Bulletin.
Continued •••
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED• PYM'S LANE, CREWE• ENGLAND
SB/MP 28.10.66. SECTION H

Printed fn En,l&ftct
AND BENTLEY T SERIES ._$-E.i\lVI.CE _BUL_LET IN
- 2 - No. SY/H2
F.1.g.1 Front suspension damper arra~nt

Standard cars from number 1529 less 1531
and onwards
Coachbuilt cars from rrumber 1646 and
ifW I
onwards
1 REACH NJT
2 LARGE DIA\1ETER WASHER Fat ISOLATat.
LOCATION
3 BALL JOINT HOOSI~ - CCMdON TO FIGURE 2
OF PREVIOOS BULLETIN
4 BALL JOINT - C<MION TO B011f ARRAN:;EMENTS
OF PREVIOOS BULLETIN
-. ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
SECTION
H
Printed In E111l•nd
. .
' ANO 8£t~TLEY T SERIES
SERVI.CE
.
.
BULLETIN
.
.
.
No. SY/H 8
CATEGORY C
SUSPENSICN NOISES CN STEERING FULL LOCK
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCRIPTI~
Should the above cars be driven on a bumpy surface with the steering on full
lock it is possible that a 'grunting' noise will be heard from the area of
the front suspension. This will be particularly apparent if the car is
driven over a high kerb while turning on full lock, such as may occur when
the car is being parked.
The noise is caused by small relative movements which occur between the
abutting lock stop faces as deflections of the suspension take place.
Should this noise cause a custcmer to complain,the lock stop faces on both
sides of the car should be wiped clean and smeared with grease.
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 16.5.68 ii
. .
ROLLS•ROYCE SILVER SHAOOW
AND BENTLEY T SERlES SERVICE B~ii-1..IN
No. SY/H12
and Retailers
This bulletin cancels previous issue
of Service Bulletin SY/H12 dated 23.1.69
CATEOORY C
]'HE REAR HUB DRIVE-SHAFT NUI'
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCRIPTIOO
In order to increase the torque capacity of the rear hub drive-shaft taper, a
drive-shaft nut of a different specification is now available.
The purpose of this Service Bulletin is to infonn Distributors and
Retailers, that this new nut should be used as a replacement whenever it is
necessary to remove the existing nut from one of the above cars in service.
It should be noted that before fitting the new nut to any car the threads
and abutment faces of the nut and drive-shaft should be cleaned and sneared
with Molytone 265 grease; a portion of this grease is supplied with each new
nut. The new nut should be fitted so that the plain identification diameter
of the nut is away fron the yoke. The new nut can be identified by its greater
depth and by the plain identification diameter, the old nut being unmarked.
It is most important that the nut is torque tightened to the correct figure,
as detailed in Service Bulletin SY/H:7, and as shown below.
Cars Produced Prior to Car Serial Numbers SRX 1916 and CRX 1937
Part No. Torg4e Fieire
Displaced nut UA 360/Z 450 lb.ft. to 475 lb.~. (62,22 kgm. to

65,67 kgm.)
New nut and portion RH 2453 450 lb.ft. to 475 lb.ft. (62,22 kgm. to
of grease 65,67 kgm.)
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE. ENGLAND

,'
CHAPTER
SB/E:Ck 20.3.69 H
No. SY/H12
- 2 -
Cars Produced After And Includi ng Car Serial Numbers SRX 191 6 and CRX 1937
Part No. Torque Figure

Displaced nut UA 360/ Z 500 lb.ft. to 525 lb.ft . ( 69 , 10 kgm. to
72158 kgm.)
New nut and portion RH 2453 475 lb.ft. to 500 lb.ft. (65 ,67 kgJn. to
of grease 69,10 kgm.)
I ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
SB~k 20.3. 69 CHAPTER

H
----:::::::.:------.-
No. SY/H13
and Retailers
CATOOORY C
'MONITIJBE 1• SHOCK DAMPERS
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls~Royce 'Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars.
DESCRIPTIOO
The purpose of this Service Bulletin is to advise Distributors and Retailers
of certain precautions to be observed when handling or disposing of 'Monitube'
shock dampers fitted to the above cars.
The volune inside the damper tube is divided into two separate chambers
by a diaphragm. One of the chambers contains damping fluid, immersed in which
is the piston connected to the damper rod. The other chamber is pressurised
with nitrogen.
This means that a constant force is exerted on the piston and rod by
the nitrogen pressure. When a damper is removed from the car, this constant
force is contained by the damper rod guide which is retained in the damper tube
by a snap ring. Should the shock damper be gripped in a vice or struck a
heavy blow, it is possible that the snap ring could be dislodged, allowing the
piston and rod to be ejected from the damper tube with considerable force.
It is known that when changing a front damper, difficulty is sometimes

experienced in removing the suspension spring support sleeve from the damper and
that dampers have been held in a vice and the sleeve struck with a hammer. This
practice;is not reconmended and in future, if the support sleeve is seized it
should be left on the old damper and a new sleeve used.
As the 'Monitube' dampe!"~ cannot be £2poired they are not a Service Exchange
eart and Distributors ~nd Reta1lers should diseose of them. However, before
disposing of a scrae _'Monitube '. shock da.me_er a srna.ll hole should be drilled in
the dal!J>er outer tube, 1 in. (25 1 4 mm.~ from the closed end of the tube. This
will release the nitrogen p!'essur.e and re11der t,he· da'Tlper safe fo:. disposal.
-
,'
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED. PYM'S LANE, CREWE. ENGLAND
SB/ECk 9.6.69 CHAPTER H

' AND BENTUV T SER2ES
=·-
'?"'1::;~""~--
....~ ~:.------=;;;o,-_-----
.....
No,sY/H15
and Retailers
fATEGffiY G
REAR SU.SPENSICN D.AMP~. MOUNTS
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars produced prior to
car serial numbers:-
SRH 4168 Standard Cars

CBH 4160 Coachbuil t Cars
SRX 6122 Standard Cars ) Cars built to meet the American
CRX 6102 Coachbuil t Cars ) Federal Safety Standard requirements.
DESCRIPTION
Service replacement rear suspension dampers supplied by the factory are now
fitted with two metal cup washers and two rubber mounting bushes to each end
of the damper. This is because current production cars have a 01p washer
welded onto the isolator at the top and another cup washer welded onto the
support bracket at the bottom, in order to improve the damper noise isolation
properties of the mounts. However, although the cup washers and rubbers
supplied are suitable for fitting the damper to current production cars,
earlier cars which do not have cup washers welded in position require four
cup washers at each end of the damper.
Therefore 1 it will be necessary 'M"ten fitting a replacement damper to
one of the above cars to salvage four cup washers from the removed damper
and use these four washers, together with the four new ones supplied, to
mount the new damper. The correct arrangement of these washers and rubbers
is shown in Figure H36, Chapter Hof the Workshop Manual.
· In the case of cars fitted with the softer mounting rubbers at the
top and bottom of the damper, (refer to Service Bulletins SY/Hl1 and SY/H14),
the lower 'soft' mounting may be retained providing that it is arranged as
shown in Figure 1 of this Service Bulletin. NO attempt must be made to provide
the upper. mounting of the new damper with the-;'ofter rubbers. The upper mounting
should be reverted to the original damper mounting arrangement on that car using
two standard Girling rubbers and four cup washers as shown in Figure H36, Chapter H
of the Workshop Manual, the extra cup washers required being taken from those
supplied with the damper at its lower en:d.
Continued •••
-- ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM•s LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
BP/JC 14.11.69. CHAPTER H

AND BENTLEY T SERiES
: :z. --=========================
NoSY/H15
- 2 -
FIG. 1 Arrartgei:',!~t f'or the lowez.:. 1 sof~~.

mounting on the rear damper
1 Sealing boot
2 Ori ginal abutment washer
3 Damper lower support bracket
4 Rubber bush (RH 8134)
5 Olp washer (RH 8135)
6 Washer (RF 8917)
7 Existing distance piece
8 Rubber bush (RH 8140)
9 CUp washer (RH 8135)
10 Damper spindle
In all cases the nut and lock-nut on the damper mounting spindles
should be tightened such that the outer face of the lock-nut is flush with
the end of the damper stem threads.
---------:--::-:::--:-::-:::-::=::-:::::-::::
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANEt CREWE, ENGLAND
--------
8P/JC 14.11.69. CHAPTERH
Service Bulletin
SECTION
Circulation - All Distributors B:JlleUn \o. SY/H17

and Retailers
Date: 16.12.70 Sh<:ct :\'o. l
C<\TEGORY C
MOCHANICA.L STANDING HEIQ-IT
APPLIC.<\BLE TO:
All Rolls~oyce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars prior to

Car Serial Number SRH 8170.
DB3CRI PTION
For some time new motor cars leaving the Crewe factory have had their
mechanical st.anding height set higher than standard at the rear.
This extra height has been incorporated to allow for the settling which
is known to take place in the rear suspension during the first few
thousand miles of service.
The increase in mechanical standing height has been achieved
by the use of thick packing rings beneath the rear springs.
It JmJst be noted that this new increased standing height is

used C>."lLY on initial build in the Crewe factory and never for
re-setting in service. Whenever a car has to have its standing
height reset, the figures quoted in the Workshop Manual TSD 2476
Chapter H must be used.
To obtain the correct standing height, additional packing

washers may be required up to a maximum of 20. However, in certain
circumstances 20 may not be sufficient. In such a case it is
pennissible to use one of these new thick packing rings as detailed in
'-" the following procedure.
NOTE.
Selecting the correct arrangement of packing washers and resetting
the rear mechanical standing height is a stmple, straight-
forward process once the procedure is understood. This Bulletin
must, therefore, be read very carefully in order that a full
understanding may be obtained of how to choose and arrange the
packing washers required. A chart is attached to this Service
Bulletin to assist in the procedure.
PROCEDURE.
THE REAR MECI-l<\N1CAL STANDING HEIGHT - TO CHOCK AND SET
1. The car should first be run some distance on the road to remove
flats from the t.yres and 'loosen' up the suspension. After this
no time must be lost in putting the car on the checking surface
and carrying out the following procedure.
2. The car must be in its 'showroom' condition, that is, unladen
with 10 gallons (12 u.s.· gall., 45 litres) of petrol in the tank and
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow fl Bentley TSeries Sen1ice Bulietin
SECTION
Circulation - All Distributors Bulletin No. SY/H17
and Retailer·s
should be positioned on a ramp or over a pit with a suitably

prepared level surface.
3. Do not apply the handbrake.
4. These checks and settings must be made with the automatic height
control system inoperative, i.e. with either the hydraulic
system valve linkages disconnected and the rams discharged or the
hydraulic system depressurised.
Cars fitted with front height control should be loaded with

150 lb. (68 kg.) between the front seats and those not fitted
with front height control with 300 lb. ( 136 kg.) between the front
sea.ts.
5. To measure the rear height of the car the distance fran the level
surface on which the car stands to the rea miost bottom bolt which
'O
,,,
C secures the forged brackets of the rear suspension cross-member
0,
C
to the body sill must be measured. This measurement must be
w
subtracted from the height above the level surface of the rearmost
,,
C
bottom bolt which secures the rear hub assembly to the trailing
!!!
C ann (See Figure 1).
~
6. The difference in heights must be between 0.625 in. and 0.875 in.
(15,875 mm. and 22,225 mm.) for the rear mechanical-standing
height to be correct. If this measurement is found to be incorrect
then pac:t<,ing washers will have to be fitted above the rear springs
to correct it.
TIIE MECHANICAL STANDING HEIGi-IT - TO ADJUST
1. Remove the rear road springs as described in t~e Workshop Manual

TSD 2476 Chapter H Page H42.
2. Ensure that the rubber/canvas seatings are in good condition -
renew if necessary.
3. Detennine the number of packlng washers necessary to correct the

standing height and their arrangement at the top and bottom of the
spring.
METiiOD Of DETERtlO:NI!'K; NUMBF.R AND TYPE OF PACKI~ WASHERS REQUIRED
1• The rear standing height measurement must lie within the range
0.625 in. to 0.875 in. (15,875 mm. to 22,225 nnn.) for it to be
,.,.. correct. A nwnber of packing washers will have to be added or
subtracted to the rear springs to bring the height measured
into the correct range.
contin!J<!d •••
Ro/ls-Royce Silver Shadow. fl Bentley TSeries Service Bulletin
Ci rculationAll Distri butors Section H
and Retailers Bulletin No SY.M 17 l ssue 2
Page No 3
Date 19. 1• 71 •
To detennine thi s number, a simple fonru.ila can be us ed where 'h 1 represents

the height measured on t he c~r prior t o adjustment. 0.75 in. (19,050 mm.)
is the middle of. the range f or correct s tanding height and 0.08S in.
(2,1~ nm.) is the effec t of one pa cking washer on the standing heigtlt.
The number of washers required to the nearest whole number greater
than or equal to:
(h - 0.75) ( 1 h' in inches ) (h - 19,050} (•h' in nm.)

0.085 . 2, 16
The nwnber· or washers required to correct the s~nding height 111Jst
then be added to the number of washers already fitted with the spring.
2. If the total number of t hese washers is greater than 20 a thick packing

ring IIUJst be used. One thick packing rlng and lts rubber/ canvas seat
is equivalent to 12 packing washers. When 7 or more packing -washers
are to be used with a spring, with or without a thick packing ring,
then an extra rubber/canvas seat will have t o be used at the top of
the s pring. This rubber/canvas seat r eplaces two packing washers.
The remaining washers are used at tne top of the spring.
To assist with t he selecti on of packing pieces a Chart is

included wit~ thi~ Servi ce Bull etin which gives details of t he packing
pieces to be added or subtracted from those packings already in use
with t he spring. The measured height 'h', measured prior to
adjustment, i s given in the left-hand column of the chart.
Arrang6Jlent of t he Spring and Packing Washers (see Figure 2(a) and 2(b))
1. Fit the lower rubber/ canvas seat ( 5) UR.15076 into the spring pots on
the tralling anns.
2. If a thick packing ring is to be used it must be fitted at this stage.

Fit t he thick packing ring (6) UR~ 16872 into the rubber/canvas
seat already fitted and then fit a second rubber/ canvas seat UR.15076.
3. Where two canvas seats are required at the top of the sprlng first
fit the one with the shallower spigot (2) UR.14568 over the ah«ilder
of the metal spring seat (1) UR.13754.
Continued ••• ,
I () Rolls-Royce limited , 971

Ro/ls-Royce Silver Shadow & Br'Jlilfr.y TSefles Service Bt11/etin
SECTION
Circulation - All Distributors B:.11let.in ~o. SY/Hl 7
Date: and Retailers
16.12.70 Sheet ;\o. 4
4). Then fit the packing washers to be used at the top of the spring
onto the canvas seat {2) before fitting a standard upper
r~bber/canvas seat (4) UR 13760 over the shoulder of the metal
springs seat (1).
5). If only one canvas seat is to be used at the top of the

sp~ing then the standard upper rubber/canvas seat (4} should
be first fitted over the shoulder of the metal spring seat (l).
TI1e washers to be used at the top of the spring are fitted
over the spigot of the rubber/canvas seat.
6). To prevent the packings moving during assembly, they should
. J be clipped together with 3 equally spaced thin pipe clips
X 9027/R.
7). Fit the spring and spring isolator into position.

8). Pass the damper through the spring and lock it in position
at the top end only.
Refit the ram to the isolator and spring housing as

described in the Workshop Manual TSD 2476 Section H 12.
C
M 78
Figure 1 Car rear hei~ht checking points
A Datum to centre of forging securing bolt

B Datum to centre of axle yoke securing bolt
Continued •••
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow fr Bentley TSeries Service Bulletin
SECTION
Circulation -All Distributors Bulletin No. SY/H17

and Retailers
9). Lower th~ car and connect the rebound straps, the lower
ends of the dampers and the drive-shafts.
10). Check the mechanical standing height.
11). It is advisable to now check and reset if necessary the

hyr:l.raulically levelled height using the procedure described
in Lhe Workshop Manual TSD 2476 Chapter G Page G 37.
§_l!!l\-tARY OF L\1PORTA...1\'T POINI'S :
The standing height measurement - 0.625 in. to 0.875 in.

(15,875 mm. to 22,225 nm.)
Number of packing washers

al.lowed 20 maximum
C
Increase given by one washer 0.085 in. (2,16 mm.) approx
Nt.nnber of packing rings allowed (in the lower spring pot

with its own canvas seat)
1 thick packing ring and seat is

equivalent to 12 washers
When 7 or more washers are fitted, an extra spring seat

UR 14568 must be used at the top.
The extra spring seat UR 14568 is equivalent to 2 washers.
Continued ....
Rolls-Royce Silver Sh!idow ft &111:r?y ! Seoes Service Bulletin
,,,.-....
~
---------------
SECTION
Cj rculation - All Distributors B:dlcU.n i\o. SY/Hl7

and Retailers
Dnte: 16 .. 12.70 Sheet No. 6
A car has been checked and the following found.
LE.Ff-HAND SIDE RIGHT-HAl'iD SIDE
Standing height 1.25 in (31.75 mm.) 1 • 1 25 in ( 28 • 58 rrm. )
No. of packing
washers already
fitted 10 !6
No, of washers 1. 25 - o. 75 1.125 - 0.75

required to correct .085 .085 ·-
standing height
= 5.9 = 4.4
approx.6 washers approx.5 washers
TOTAL NUMBF.R. OF
WA3HERS TO BE
FI'rTED WITH SPRING .16 21
This nurnbe r is This number is Nor

pennlssib.le permissible
It is greater than It will be necessary

1, therefore an tJ use a thick pack-
extra rubber/ ing ring.
canvas seat will This ring with its
be used at the top. canvas seat is equal
This is equal to to 12 washers.
2 washers
14 washers and an 1 packing ring will

additional rubber/ be used at the bottom
canvas seat will bl.'! of the spring.
u:Y~d at the top • 7 washers and an
additional rubber/canvas
se8t will be used at
the top of the spring.
Continued •••
Rolfs.Royce Sliver Shadow ft Bentley TSeries Service Bulletin
SECTION
Circulation - Bulletin No. SY/H17
Date : 28.12.70. Sheet No . 7
1 2 3 4 1
If?- -I~
·-t !., ~-
1 --
~~I {J J I
ct-~---
-
-- D
- a-___.._,--o
I
•
II
A B
"C
I
C
<II
ti I
C
w '
C
I
...
"O
r:
·e
Q.. 0--- --- I
. -- -=---=--1) n
' ) - -- - - 11
,_ -------
~-=-~.j
5 6
L.2-~ ,~ ~ /
3
M 76
Figure 2 - Spr ing se~ti ngs in position

A - Showing the arra ngement of spring, spring and packing pieces when a packing
ring and 7 or more packing wa shers clre being fitted with spr.ing.
1. Metal s pring seat (UR .13754)
2 . Shallow can·,as/ru bber sea t (UR. 14568 )
3. Pa cking ,Nashers
4. Standard canvas/rubber seats (UR. 13760)
s. Lower rubber/canvas seat (UR. 15076)
6. Thick packing ring (UR.16872)
B - Showing the arrt:ngemen t of spring, s pring sea ts, rubber/canvas seats and
packing ,rashers when less that 7 packing ;,as hers are being fi t ted wi t h the
spri n g .
t. Metal spring s eat (UR.13754)
2. Standard canvas/rubber se&t (UR. 13760)
3 o Lower rubber/canvas seat (UR . 15076)
continued 4 ..
I'
PACKV PIECES ALREADY Fl1TED WITH SPRING
( I ~
ls ls ls ts ls ls ls ls ls t1 s 1s ls ls 1s ls 1s
1w 2w 3w 4w Sw 6w Sw 6w 7w 8-n 9w 1~ l lw 12w 13w 14w 15w 16w 17w 18w 19w 20w
lw lw lw 3w 3w 3w 3w 3w 3w 3w 3w .3w 3w 3w 3w 3w -7w -7w -9w ("')
0~9375 3w 3w 3w ls ts ls -ts -ls
(28,812) lr lr lr
- •
1.(()0
• (25.399)
3w 3w 3w
IW
ls
tw
ls
TW
ls 3w 3w 3w 3w 3w 3w 3¥{ 3w ~w 3w 3w 3w 3w -ls -ls
-7w -7w -9w
- lr lr 1r
$'
~ ',lW '.lW 2w -Gw -6w -8w -8w
1.Q625 4w 4w 2w 4w '1w 4w 4w 4w 4w 4w 4w 4,v 4w 4w 4w -ls -ls
(26,986) Is ls ls ls tr tr 1r lr
-Sw -sw -7w -7w -7w
1.125 5w 3w 3w 3w 3w 3w 5w Sw 5w Sw 5w Sw Sw Sw 5w Sw 5w -ls -h
( 28.573)
1.1875
ls ls ts ls ls
-
l r 1r lr lr __1£,.
-4w -4w -6w -6w -6w -(iw
~--
4w 4w 4w 4w 4w 4w 6w 6w 6'N 6w 6,,v 6w 6w 6w 6w 6w -ls -ls
(30,160) 13 ls ls ls ls ls lr lr lr lr lr J.
-4w -4w -6w ..:i:;w -6w -{iw
1.250 4w 4w 4w 4w 4w 4.v 4w 8w 6w 6w 6w 6w 6w 6w 6w 6w -15 -ls
(31,749) ls ls ls ls ls ls 1r lr lr 1L ...!.r.. lr
i----·
-3w -3w -sw -sw -5w -Sw -Sw
l.3125 Sw 5w 5w 5w 5w 5w 5w 7w 7w 7w 7w 7w 7w 7w 7w -1 s -ts
(33,336) ls ls ls ls ls ls
-zw
lr lr lr 1r Ir tr Ir
-2w -4w -<lw -4w -4w 4'v -·tw --
1.375 6w 6w 6w 6w 6w 8w 8w 8w 8w 8w 8w 8w 8w 8w -ls -ls
(34,924)
t.4375
ls
7w
ls
7w 7w
ls ls ls
1w ·7w
ls
7w 9w 9w 9w 9w 9w
tr lr lr tr lr -11. ·. -- lr lr
-lw -lw -3w -3w -3w ..;3w ..3w -3w
9w 9.v -ls -ls
-3w --
(36t511) ls ls ls ls ls 1s lr lr lr lr lr lr lr lr lr
-lw -lw -lw -3w -3w -3w -3w -3w -3w
1.500 7·N 7w 7w 1w 1w 1w 9w 9w 9w 9w 9w 9w 9w -ls -1 s
(38,099) ls ls ls ls ls 1s lr lr lr lr lr lr 1r lr Ir
1.5625 8w 8w 8w 8w 8w aw 10w l(Mr 10N 10.V 10w 10.V -ts -ls -2w -2w -2w -2w -2w -2w -2w -2w
(39.686) ls ls ls ls ls ls lr lr 1r lr lr tr lr lr 1r lr
-!w -lw
l .625 9w 9w 9w 9w 9w 9w 1 lw llw 11w llw I hv -lw -ls
(41,274) 1s ls 1s ls ls ls lr 1r lr 1r lr Ir tr lr 1r lr 1r
1.6875 10w IOw 10w 10W 1~ 10w 12W 12w 12w 12w tr lr lr tr lr 1r lr 1r tr 1r lr lr
(42t861) ls ls ls ls ls ls
1.750 lOW 10w 10w 10.V 10w 10W 12w 12w 12w t2w Ir lr lr 1r lr lr lr lr 1r lr lr lr
(44.449) ls ls ls 1s ts 18 ....__ ---- -
Rolls-Royce /J Bentley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation - All Distributors & Retailers. Section H

Bulletin No SY/H.18
Page No l of 7
Date 22 11 72
CATEOlRY C
Amer,dmer.t 1.
LCWGER FROOT SHOCK DAMPERS.
APPLICABLE TO:
I
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and corniche cars and a 1 L Bentley 'T Series and
Corniche cars from car serial number SRH 11~66 onwards.
DESCRIPTICN:
Longer front shock dampers have been introduced on the above cars to reduce the
damper bearing side load. This reductjon in load is effected by increasing the
span of the rod guide and piston bearing.
At the sarre time the opportunity has been taken to simplify the upper mounting
point, deleting the ram and the isolator, etc. The longer shock damper now mounts
directly into a top cover plate bolted to the spring pot tower (See Fig.l). The
~ methods of attaching the spring to the shock damper and the shock damper body to
('C)
ci, the lower triangle rerr,ajn unchanged.
C:
UJ
C:
It is possible to replace a short shcck damper by a long shock damper provided:
(a) The new top cover (lJR 17050) is used to replace the old top cover, ram and
isolator.
(b} Earlier cars fitted with front height control have the levelling syst€:m
blanked off as described in Service Bulletin SY/G.37.
NOTE:
The replacement of short dampers by long dampers constitutes a change to
specification and as such must not be undertaken without prior approval from
Rolls-Royce Motors Limited.
PROCE OORE:
Long t:vpe shock damper - To remove
1. Position the car on a ramp, firmly apply the handbrake and chock the rear
wheels.
2. Remove the gear range selector thermal cut-out switch.
/continuE:d•••
I_, (C} Rolls-Royce Meter$ Limited 1972

Ro/ls-Royce [J Bentley Motor- Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributors Section H
and Retailers Bulletin No SY/Hl 8
Page No 2 of 7
Date 2/9/71
3. Position a hydraulic jack and extension fitted with a

protective hardwood block beneath the pivot points of the
lower front triangle l evers; rai se the car.
4. Position suitable bl ocks to support the shaped wooden
beams (RH 8920) placed beneath the sill of the body just
rearward of the front wheels.
S. Carefully lower t he car onto the sill boards.
6. Remove the nut, washer and spigotted bush from the top of
the shock damper push rod.
7. Fit the road spring compress ing tool (RH 7889) (see Fig. 2)
in position, It is most important that each long bolt
of t he conpressor is screwed fully into the base plate
of the tool.
"C
C: 8. Secure the halves of the base plate by fitt.ing the 5/16 in.
<'O
~
C
UNF setscrews provided.
w
,5.
,, 9. Using the nuts, thrust races and special washers provided
-~ compress the spring sufficiently to enable the split
it adjusting washers to be removed.
10. Remove the split pin, castel l ated nut and washer which secures
the shock damper ball pin to the lower triangle levers.
11. Use the extractor tool (RH 8100) to separate the seal between
the taper of the shock damper ball pin and t he taper of the
ball joint housing.
12. Re,D:>ve the bolt which locates the lower triangle levers
adjacent t o the lower ball joint lever.
13. Slacken the dowel bolt which also s erves to align and secure
the lower triangle levers to the lower ball joint lever.
The lower ball joint lever will then swivel clear .
Continued •••
·I..... (0 Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971

Circulation AU Distributors Section H
and Retailers Bulletin No SY/1-118
Page No 3 of 7
Date 2/9/71
A B M 525
Fig. 1 Displaced and new shock dampers

A. Displaced shock damper arrangement
B. New shock damper arrangement
0 Rolls-Rovce Motors Limited 1971

and Retailers Bulletin No SY/H18
Page No 4 of' 7
Date 2/9/71
14. Push the shock damper upwards until the ball pin is clear of
the mating bore in the lever, then lower the shock damper
from the car by moving it sideways and downwards to clear
the lever, retain the split washer(s).
Long t;Yl?e shock damper - To fit

T~ fit a new shock damper reverse the procedure for its removal
noting the points in the Workshop Manual TSD 2476 Chapter H,
Section H2 - Front Shock Damper - To f'it.
Fitting a l~ng type shock damper in place of a short shock damper

In the event of it being necessary to replace a short damper
with a longer damper the following procedure should be
followed.
1• Remove and dismantle the front road spring assembly as

described in the Workshop Manual TSD 2476 Chapter H, Section
H4 - Front Road Spring - To remove.
Retain the spring and the spring support assembly.
If the spring support assembly is seized onto the shock
damper it must be renewed. Examine the spring seatings
and renew if necessary.
2. Fit the spring seating onto the new top cover.
3. Using the compressing tool (RH 7909) compress the top

cover, spring and spring support assanbly to enable the
road spring c<Jlll)ressing tool (RH 7889) to be fitted.
Continued •••
.... «;) Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971

Circulation A.ll Distributors Section H
Page No 5 of 7
Date 2/~/71
4. Place the shock damper washer and non-spigotted rubber on

the shock damper stem. Slide the shock damper sleeve over
the shock damper body and push the shock damper through the
spring support assembly until the end of the spindle
protIUdes through the top cover; fit the spigotted rubber
(spigot downwards) top washer, nut and tighten.
5. Inspect the bottom ball joint as described in the Ylbrkshop

Manual TSD 2476 Chapter H, Section H2 - Shock Damper Ball
Jo.int - To maintain; Renew the ball joint if necessary.
6. Fit the ball joint to lower end of the shock damper and
torque tighten.
7. Lo\lter the entire assembly into the spring pot tower and
bolt down the top cover.
8. Bolt the bottom ball joint housing to the lower triangle

"O
C
ti)
lever attactunent.
a.
C:
w Fit the split adjusting washer (s) and decompress the spring.
9•
.E
When fitting the spring assembly the following points should
...
'O
GI
C be noted:-
if
(a) Care should be taken to avoid al\Y side loading when
fitting the shock damper and the assembly to the car,
ar, this could result in permanent damage to the
piston rod and seal.
(b) It is important that the front rebound stops are in
position when fitting the road spring assembly.
Over-travelling the suspension ball joints can result
in damage to the ball joint seals.
(c) After fitting the assembly the car should be 'bounced'

to settle the spring.
( d) The mechanical standing height must then be checked
as described in Workshop Manual TSD 2476 Chapter H,
Sec~ion HS - Suspension Settings.
(e) The circlip, which is fitted to the front shock dampers,

carries the lower spring support sleeves. When
assembling these sleeves, liberally coat the mating
surfaces of the sleeves and shock dampers with an
approved grease. This will assist fitting and any
subsequent removal of the sleeves.
Continued •••
~ Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971

Rolls-Rorce 8 Bentley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributors . Section H
Page No 6 of 7
Date 2/9/71
0 0
0 0
0
0
"1'
~
C
0
Q)
C
1M
,S
0
,,
·E 0
I· 0
0
0
M647
E!~· 2 Spring compressing tool in position
Compressing tool comprising long studs and split base plate
Continued •••
·I
Rolls-Royce eBentley Motor eats Ssrviee Bulletin
and Retailers Bulletin No SY/kt8
Page No 7 or 7
Date 2. 9. 71
(f) Cars fitted with front levelling which has not yet been
blanked off should have the front levelling deleted as
d·?scribed in Service Bulletin SY/G37.
(g) The existing parts should be replaced by the parts given
in the following list, when replacing shorter shock
dampers with the new longer shock damperso
Description New
Bolt (8 off) UA 156/Z

Bolt (8 off) UA 104/Z
Cover (2 off) UR 17050
Shock damper (2 off) UR 17051
Heavy duty shock damper (2 off) UR 17406
Spiggoted rubber (2 off) UR 17646
Note:
It would aR[!ear from past experience that shock drunpers have been
changed in an attempt to rectify canplaints of suspension noise
and soft suspension. On inspection the displaced shock dame_ers
have been found to be operating satisfactorily and were obviously
not the source of trouble.
It is therefore stressed that in such complaint cases all
possible s2.,urces of trouble should be inyestigated rather than
imnediately asswnins: the fault to lie in the shock dampers.
After Car Serial Nwnber SRH 11466 shock damper changes

will,.not be accepted under Warranty without prior authorit.j'.
fr__2m either the Factory or the Service Representative.
TIME ALLOVED
To renew one long front shock damper - 2.25 hrs. (4.25 hrs. for two).
To replace two short shock dampers by two long shock dampers - s.5 hrs.
Arr/JCl/Hly
·I.. C) Rolls-Royce Motors Limi.ted t971

Rolls-Royce fl Bentley Motor Cars
Circulation All Distributor s and Section H
Retailers Bulletin No SY/ Hl 9
Page No 1
Date 9. 9. 71
CATEGORY C
FRONT AND REAR SHOCK DMlPER MOl.Jt'-li ING RUBBERS
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-:Royce Silver Shadow and Corniche cars, an d all Bent ley
T Series and Corniche cars after Car Serial N~'llher LRX 116(().
DESCRIPTIO~
A ne.v spigotted shock damper end rubber ha s been introduced on

produc tion. Its intr oduction coincided with t he advent of the
longer fron t shock dampers . However it is al so fitt ed to t he rear
s hock dampers. This rubber replaces the 1 0 1 ring (Part No. CK 612/3)
and the present end rubber (Girling Part No . 64540l-78) in order to
el.iminate t he metal-to-metal foul caused by t he 1 0 1 ring becoming
tra.pp ed beneath i ts adjacent end rubb er.
In the event of a compla int of a metallic noise, as a r esult

of the ' O' ring having become displa ced, the off ending s hock damper
should be identified and the outer most end n.ibber and 1 0 1 ring
should be removed. In their place the ne'll spigotted n.ibber s hould
be fitt ed.
~: It is not possible to fit spigotted rubbers in

place of the rubbers where the mounting arrangement
employes t he use of four cup washers . It is
therefore only possible to fit a spigotted rubber
in place of a plain rubber ~ ' O' r_ing.
The spigotted rubber s hould ahrays be the
outermost n.ibber fitted to the shock damper with
the spigot facing towards the damper body.
PARTS RE(&rrRED
Descripti~ Pa r t No. No. required
Spigotted rubber rn..17646 1 off per front damper

2 off per r ear damper
Arr/JCl/Hly
.... (?;) Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971

CHAPTER J
FINAL DRIVE DIFFERENTIAL UNIT
CHAPTER K
FUEL SYSTEM AND CARBURETTERS
No. SY/K.2
Circulation - North America only.
CATEGORY C
FLEXIBLE F1JEL HOSE
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars built to comply with
the Federal Safety Regulations produced from Chassis Number SRX 6(X)1 and
onwards.
DESCRIPTION
This Service Bulletin has been issued to advise Distributors, Retailers and
Service Personnel that should it be necessary to disturb the flexible fuel hostt
which runs between the engine and the body, it is most .important that the hose
is refitted in the correct position as shown in Figure 1-
The dimension tA' shown in Figure 1 is measured from the weld line on
the underside of the floor vertically downwards to the centre of the fuel pipe.
This measurement should be 3.0 in. (7,62 an.).
Fig.1 Flexible fuel hose

Continued •••
SB/EC.k 28.3.68 CHAPTER
. ,, .
·SERV:ICE BULLETIN
- 2 - No. SY/K2
The rear end of the hose should be vertically below the swage line of
the floor as shown by arrow 'B' in Figure 2.
Should it be necessary to alter the run of the hose to obtain the correct
position, this can be achieved by adjusting the position of the forward end of
the hose.
ROLLS- ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 28.3.68 K
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERMt:ce• •' '4, • :
BULLET IN
• •
·N°·SY/K3
and Retailers
(Re-issue)
This Service Bulletin cancels
all previous Bulletins
numbered SY/K3
CATEGORY C
S.B.N. FUEL TANK Il\HIBITORS
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and BPntley T Series cars.

All Rolls-Royce Phantom VI cars.
DESCRIPTION
During recent checks a number of cars have been found with small quantities of
water in the fuel tank: which had entered from the commercial fuel supplies.
It is a known chem1 cal fact that, when water and fuel are mixed, a
slightly acid solution is fonned due to the effect of the additives present
in modern fuels. In order to prevent this solution affecting the component
parts of the fuel system, S.B.N. inhibitors are now available which can be
placed in the fuel tank during a nonnal service operation.
The S.B.N. inhibitors normally lie dormant in the fuel, but in the
event of water entering the fuel tank the inhibitors disperse and prevent
the fonnation of an aci.d solution.
Four (4) S.B.N. inhibitors should be placed in the fuel tank on the
first occasion the car is seen, either during a servjce schedule or customer
complaint work. This quantity should then be sufficient to inhibit the fuel
system for its service life.
If excessive quantities of water are present in the fuel sysLem then

the fuel tank should b~ drained and four more inhibitors added.
Excessive quantities of water in the fuel system arc usually denoted by

eng .ine running problems or water in the fuel filter.
Continued •••
BP/rek 29.8.69; CHAPTER

K
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SE-RV.ICE BULLETIN
No.SY/K3
(Re-issue)
- 2 -
Since the amount of water which becomes present in fuel tanks is entirely
dependent upon the water present in the commercial fuel supply, any work involved
in draining and cleaning fuel systems should be charged to the customer. It
should also be noted that as fitting S.B.N. inhibitors to the fuel tank is a
no1mal service operation, this too is chargeable to the customer.
MATERIAL REQUIRED
PART NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

M8/262 S.B.N. Inhibitors 4 off per car
(Pack of 100)
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMIT£D, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/ECk 29.8.69. K
CHAPTER L
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
•
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVIC'E BULLETIN
No.SY/L4
and Retailers
CATEGORY C
COOLING SYSTEM - THERMOSTATS
APPLICABLE TO;
DESCRIPTION
This Service Bulletin has been issued to advise Distributors, Retailers and
Service Personnel that the wax operated thennostats fitted to the above cars,
have a service life of two years.
These thermostats should therefore be replaced every two years, the

cost being chargeable to the owner.
PROCEDURE
It is recommended that the thermostat should be changed at the 2 Years Service

Schedule, as this schedule calls for the removal of the thennost.at to enable
the cooling system to be reverse flushed.
When a thennostat has been replaced 1 one of the labels provided with the
thermostat should be completed to show the date of the next change, and attached
to the engine in a conspicuous position. These labels are available from the
Spares Department at Crewe, part number RH 8147 1 and read as follows.
Replace thermostat every

two ye~rs
Next change due:
ROLLS~ROYCE LIMITED
Continued •••
SB/ECk l.8.68. CHAPTER L

ANO BENTLEY T SERIES SERVIC'E BULLETIN
No. SY/L4
- 2 -
It is emphasised that the 2 Years Service Schedule will only be carried

out at the request of the owner and it is the responsibility of the Service
Manager to advise the owner that the Service is due.
The part number of the thennostat which should be used for all replace-
ments in the T series cars is UE 34003.
IMPORTANT Should an engine be suspected of overheating it is

essential that the thennostat be changed.
ROLLS-ROYCE LtMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
SB/F..Ck 1.8.68. CHAPTER

L
ROLLS•ROYCE StlVER SHADOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULLETIN.
- .
- - - -
No.sY/L8
Circulation - United Kingdom Distributors
and Retailers only
CATEOORY C
ENGINE COOLANT ANTI-FREEZE
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars •

DESCRIPTION
The Ford Motor Company have recently begun to market a new anti-
freeze solution under the trade name 'Ford Anti-freeze•.
Only anti-freeze solutions conforming to British Standard

Specification 3150: 1959 are approved by Rolls-Royce Limited and
since the Ford anti-freeze does not confonn to this standard, it should
NOT be used in the cooling system of any Rolls-Royce or Bentley
manufactured car.
BP 24.11.69 L
CHAPTER
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERV'JCE BULLE.T.IN I ., '• .I
No. SY/L9
and Retailers except those in
the U.S.A. and Canada
CATEOORY C
ANTI-FREEZE MIXWRE STRENGTH
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shade,,,; and Bentley T Series cars. All Rolls-Royce
Phantom VI cars.
DESCRIPTION
All cars are no,,; being delivered with a 5~ anti-freeze mixture strength
in the engine cooling system. This gives a slightly higher coolant boiling
0
point and gives protection against frost down to a temperature of -36.s c.
( -33. 7°F. ) •
It is reconrnended that a 50'/o anti-freeze mixture is used in the

cooling system of all the above cars in service whenever the coolant requires
to be replaced, either during repair work or when the coolant system Seasonal
Service is being completed. It should be noted that the additional anti-
freeze is chargeable to the customer, who should be advised of these
recorrrnendations before the coolant is changed.
Rolls-Royce Limited only approve anti-freeze mixtures conforming

to British Standard Specification 3150: 1959 and this specification nwnber
will be marked on the container.
BP 3.12.69. CHAPTER J.
Rolls-Royce {J Bentley Moro, Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributors Section L
and Retailers Bulletin No SV'/L 11
Page No 1
Date 9.9.71
CATF.GORY C
FASTER RliNNING COOLING FAN
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls~Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars after
car Serial Numbers
SRH 11224 (Four-door Saloons)
m.x 11288 (Long Wheelbase Saloons)
All Rolls~oyce and Bentley Corniche cars after Car Serial Number
CRX 11284.
All Rolls~oyce and Bentley Corniche cars fitted with the increased
performance engine.
DE&:JUPTION
A faster rulUl.ing fan has been introduced to improve the perfonnance
of the cooling system at low engine speeds. The fan speed at idle
has been increased in the ratio 1,2: 1 by fitting a smaller
diameter water pump pulley.
The fan is still fitted with a viscous drive unit to reduce
fan roar at high engine speed, and to improve the wann-up rate of
the engine, but the viscous unit .ls now larger to cope with the
increased speed.
A smaller water pump impeller is used to prevent cavitation
at the higher speeds.
The method of mounting the pulley on the coolant pump has been
changed to a four bolt fixing and the fan is slightly modified to
accon:rnodate the larger viscous drive unit.
Thus it may be seen that none of these parts are interchangeable.
However it is physically possible when reconditioning a coolant pump
t~ fit a smaller .impeller to an earlier pump or a larger impeller to a
later pump. It is essential that great care is taken to ensure that
this does not occur since severe damage will result from inadequate
cooling du~o insufficient coolant flow or cavitation.
Obviously the smaller coolant pump pulley necessitates the use
of different drive belts from the crankshaft to the coolant pump and
coolant pwnp to the alternator.
Continued •••
·I © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971
Rolls-Royce r, Bentley Mo101 Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributors Section L
and Retailers Bulletin No· 5Y/L 11
Page No 2
Date 9.9. 71
The new belts required are:
Description Part No.
Cranksha~ pulley - coolant pump pulley - 'vee' belt UE.36361

UE.37810
coolant pump pulley - alternator - 'vee' belt UE.37079
•Coolant pump pulley - air pump - 'vee' belt UE.36360
UE.36363
*Cars fitted with Exhaust Emission Control System only.
Arr/JCJ/Hly
·I~· C) Rolls-Rbyee Motors Limited 197\

CHAPTER M
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
' . .
AND BENTLEY T SERIES S'ERVl~
.
. CE-. ~ BUL:L'f TIN
"
No. SY/Ml
FOR INFORIVfATION
- - -- -- - -
ELF.CTRICAL FAILURES
APPLIC.Al3LE TO:

Bentley T Series
DESCRIPTION
A number of electrical complaints have occurred in Service due to u poor

connection or an open circuit between the toeboard sockets and plugs. This
Service Bulletin is issued to advise Retailers of this possibility.
The failures occur because the wires to the plugs and sockets are
constantly in tension and due to road shoe!<., vibration or carpet moveirent,
plugs and sockets can pull out. Up to nine different circuits are dependent
upon a good electrical contact between any one socl(et and plug and as will
be realised, complaints of this nature are extremely difficult to locate and
would make a roadside diagnosis and repair virtually imposs i.bJ.e.
When an electrical failure in Service is encountered and the reason is

not apparent or the cause is an open circu.i. t in the feed wire, the relevant
toeboard socl<et should be examined to ensure that an efficient electrical
contact is being made. If the spcket is under stress or not pushed fully
home the loom should be repositioned within the confines of the clips to
relieve the stress and the socket pushed home.
The twelve different sockets and the cjrcuits they serve arc noted in
the followinz list. The position of the sockets on the car is shown in
Figure 1.
Continued ..•
CHAPTER
SB/EC 26.5.66. M
'·SERVICE BULLETIN
- 2 - No. SY/M1
______ /
Fig.1 Position of electrical sockets beneath facia - Rlght-hand drive cars
t Socket group No.1 2 Socket group flb.2
SOCK.ET GROUP Ill). 1
Socket (G)
Actuators
Socket (H)
Actuators Flasher repeater lamps
Socket (J)
Starter override switch Side lamps Main beam

Flashers Wiper rootor
Socket (K)
Air conditioning system resistances Wiper Jll)tors
Continued •••
SB/EC 26.5.66. CHAPTER M

ROLLS•ROYCE SJLVER SHADOW
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES .',.SERVtC·E:s·U LlETIN
- 3 - No. SY/Mt
Socket (L)
D.ip beam Horns Blower rrotors

Height control switch Wiper nvtor
Electric gearchange mechanism
SCX:XET GROUP N0.2
Socket (a) 60 a~. connection rigbt~hand·valance
On left-hand drive cars this socket is positioned on the left-hand side of the
car.
Upper connection Charging system

Centre connection Ammeter
Lower connection Fuse board
Socket (A)
Right-hand tail lights Front flasher lamps Blower motors

Windscreen wnshe rs Flasher repeaters Stop lamps
Socket (B)
Ignition warning light Ccolant level indicBtor Horns

Headlamp flick relay Interior lights
Socket (C)
Fuel pumps Horns Headlarr,p flick

Blower crotors Headlnmp safety relay
Socket (D)
Water tap relay Heflter and demister Parking lights

control system
Continued •••

- T'j,,..,,,,..:"......~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
·-----~·---------------
SB/EC 26.5.66. CHAPTER M.
AND BENTLEY T SERIES ~ SERVf6E:i~. B'Ull ET IN
1
• '\ ..
~
• , •. -r·
. . -
- 4 - No. SY/Ml 1
Socket (E)
Refrigeration system Gearbox control circuit Alternator

( if f'i tted) (GM40) left-ha~d dr.ive ·. ( if fitted)
cars only)
Socket (F)
., Ignition coil Coolant temperature inc,Ucator Oil pressure switch

Sump oil level indicator 011 pressur.e trrmsmilteI' Drake pressure relay
CHAPTER
SD/F.C 26.5.66. M
Ho. SYft,I2
Cl\TIDORY 2
COOLANT LEVEL INDICATOR
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls~oyce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars prior to chassis
numbers SRH 1286~ SRX 1285 and CBH 1355.
DESCRIPTIOO
It is possible for the coolant level warning lamp to be illuminated each time
the ignition is switched on, even with a correct coolant level. This is
caused by the output transistor of the indicator unit being damaged by the
high voltage surge currents which can be induced into the inductive components.
A modification has now been introduced to prevent induced surge currents

from passing through the coolant level indicator unit. This modific~tion
comprises a diode fitted in the coolant level indicator feed cable.
Cars produced prior to chassis nwnber SRX 1114 and CBX 1149 (see Fig. 1~ ~
stage 1) have the coolant level indicator unit feed cable incorporated in the
fuseboard branch loom, whilst cars produced after these chassis numbers
(see Fig. 1, stage 2) have a link cable breaking out of the fuseboard branch
loom.
Both stages shown in Figure 1 are applicable to left-hand drive cars;

right-hand drive cars are symmetrically opposite.
All cars produced prior to the applicable chassis number should be

modified at the earliest opportunity, service schedules etc., or in complaint
c8ses.
PROCEDURE
Before any work is undertaken, it should be ascertained whether this modif-

ication has been carried out previously. This can be checked by lowering the
fuseboard and tracing the fuseboard branch loom upwards; the diode, if fitted,
will be taped to the fuseboard branch loom as shown in Figure l.
Check the coolant level and top-up i f necessary, then disconnect the
battery.
R OLLS -ROYCE LI M ITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAN D
SECTIO N
SB/EC 30.5.66.
Printed In England
M
~ .
..
S.ERVICE
~
. .
-
BULLETIN
.- . _,
No. SY;MZ
-2-
\
\
/ (!)
{ ~ -1-~,~
STAGE I
1 Instrument branch loom 3 Diode assanbly

2 New terminal of green 4 Fuseboard branch loan
feed cable 5 Instrwnent loon
t (( ( ? , ;.
H Ill
STAGE 2
1 New terminal of upper 2 Fuseboard branch loom
link cable 3 Diode assembly
Fig. l Modified circuit for coolant level indicator
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED• PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
SB/EC 30.5.66 .. SECTION M

Printed In Eniland
. .
ROLLS~ROYC E SILVER SHADOW
. .
BULLETIN .
No. SY/M2
-3-
Stage 1
1. Lower the steering column by removing the two Allen screws then remove
the centre faci.a panel and the panel surrounding the instruments.
2. Remove the wnrning lamp cluster. If the coolant level warning lamp
remained illuminated with the coolant level correct, renew the coolant
level indicator unit.
3. Connect the green and black coolant level probe cable to the larger
terminal of U1e coolant level indicator unit.
4. Ranove the original terminal and sleeve from the existing green feed
cable and replace with a UD 5406 Lucar and a UD 6119 sleeve (2).
5. Lower the fuseboard and tape the diode assembly (3) to the fuseboard
branch loom (4) with the smaller terminal uppermost.
6. Lead the diode loom up the fuseboard branch loom (4), along the instru-
ment loom (5) and down the warning lamp loom (1), taping as shov.n in
Figure 1.
7. Connect the larger terminal of the loom to the new connector of the
green feed cable (2) using a UD 6074 double blade connector.
8. Connect the smaller loom terminal to the smaller terminal of the coolant
level indicator unit.
9. Fit the warning lamp cluster.
10. Fit the facia panels.
11. Fit the steering colunm support.
12. Connect the battery.
Stage 2
If the coolant level warning lamp remained illuminated with the coolant level
correct it will be necessary to renew the coolant level indicator unit as
described in the Procedure for Stage 1 modification and then re-connect the
original cables.
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LAN£, CREWE, ENGLAND
SB/EC 30.5.66. SECTION M

Printed fn En1latlcl
AND BENTLEY T SER I ES SERVICE BULLETIN
No. SY;M2
-4-
After renewing the coolant level indicator unit, fit the warning lamp
cluster, facia panels and steering column support then carry out the following.
1. Lower the fuseboard and locate the link cable which breaks out of the
fuseboard branch loom (2).
2. Disconnect the link. terminals and replace the uppermost terminal with a
UD 12235 Lucar and a UD 2100 sleeve (1).
3. Tape the diode assembly (3} to the fuseboard branch loom (2) with the
smaller terminal uppermost.
4. Connect the new link terminal (1) to the smaller connector of the diode
(3).
5. Connect the original link terminal to the larger connector of the diode
(3).
6~ Secure the fuseboard.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Stage 1 RH 7944 Diode assembly

RH 7945 Loom assembly . 1
UD 5406 Terminal 1
UD 6119 Terminal sleeve 1
UD 1740 Black P.V.C. tape As required
Stage 2 UD 13632 Diode assembly 1

UD 12235 Tenninal 1
UD 2100 Terminal sleeve 1
UD 1740 Black P.V.C. tape As required
ROLLS -ROYCE LIM.TED, PYM•s LANE, CREWE• ENG LANO 1

SB/EC SECTION M
30.5.66.
Prll\tllld fn (R,aa,.d
ROLLS-ROYCE S l LVER SHADOW
No. SY/M3
This Service Bulletin
cancels Serv.ice Bulletin
No. SY/M:3 dated Z.6.66.
CA'IffiORY C
ELEC1RICAL COONECTIOOS TO GM 400 'IRANSMISSI~
APPLICABLE TO:
tolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars fitted with the GM 400
transmission.
DESCRIPTI~
The GM 400 transmission unit incorporates two solenoid valves, one for stator
control and one for detent control. The two feed cables for the solenoid
valves enter the transmission casing via a plastic moulded plug which ls
0.625 in. (1.59 cm.) in diameter and is located on the left-hand side of the
transmission casing. Passing through this plug are two identical blade
connectors at right angles to each other, the uppermost connector being
horizontal. A loom consisting of two cables is routed down the side of the
transmission casing; a white/brown cable is connected to the upper
horizontal terminal which serves the stator solenoid, and a white/purple
cable or, on later cars, a white/green cable, is connected to the lower
terminal which serves the detent solenoid.
,vhenever it is necessary to disconnect the two cables in Service (e.g.

during removal of the transmission unit) care must be exercised when
reconnecting since the similarity between the terminals permits the
possibility of an incorrect connection.
If the cables are incorrectly connected the transmission upchanges will

be delayed and kickdown will occur at half throttle, also, engine braking
will not be available in top gear.
If a car exhibits these symptoms it should be checked for correct

connection of the solenoid cables.
ROLLS ... ROYCE LI Ml TED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
13..;l .67. SECTION M

SB/EC
Printed In Eniland
. ~
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULLETIN : . .l
No. SY;'l\,17
CA.'IEGORY A
INTERIOR LAMP CIRCUIT
APPLICABLE TO:
H.J. Mulliner,. Parle Ward Llmi ted Coachbuil t Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and
Bentley 'T' series cars produced prior to car number CRH 1612.
DESCRIPTION
l)Je to the inter-connection between the interior lamp circuit and the fast
levelling solenoid circuit, switching on the interior lamp using either one
of the two facia control switches, will cause the car to be in a condition of
fast levelling, even when the car is in gear. This is an undesirable feature,
particularly when the car is in motion, and corrective action has recently
be<;;n taken to eliminate this on cars after the above mentioned number.
Cars produced prior to CRH 1612 should be modified by fitting two

diodes into the interior lamp circuit; these diodes will prevent the
operation of the fast levelling solenoid when the interior lamp is operated
from a facia control switch. It should be noted that if a bulb of higher
wattage than is recommended is fitted to the interior lamp, the dio<les may
be damaged.
Before any work is undertaken, it should be ascertained whether the

modification has been incorporated previously. To check, sit in the car, and
with all the doors closed and the ignition switched off, operate the interior
lamp using one of the two control switcl"1es mounted on the facia board. If the
car is urunodified the fast levelling solenoid will be heard to click each time
the switch is operated. TI1c solenoid is located beneath the car on the
forward member of the rear sub-frame.
PROCEDURE
l. Disconnect the battery.
2. Withdraw the right-hand ashtray which is located below the facia board
on the right-hand side.
Continued •••
ROLLS -ROYCE LI MI TED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENG LANO
SB/EC 7. 12. 66. SECTIO N M

PrintAld In England
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULLETIN ;
- 2 - No. SY;i,17
3. Remove the six screws which secure the ashtray support brad:et to the
facia board and withdraw the bracket. It will now be possible to draw
the right-hand interior lamp switch loom downwards.
4. Locate the purple and ,vhite cotton covered cable which is connected to
the interior lamp switch and is interrupted approximately three inches
from the switch by Lucar terminals and a connecting blade.
5. Remove the Lucar terminals of the purple and white cable from the blade
connector.
6. Connect the Lucar terminals to the terminals of one of the diode assemblies
provided such that the blue sleeve of the diode assembly is nearest to the
switch.
7. Fit the ashtray suppart bracket and the ashtray.
8. Apply the procedures 2 to 7 to the left-hand ashtray and interior lamp

switch.
9. Connect the bottery.
MATERIAL REQUIRED
RH 801 l Diode assembly 2 off
TTh1E ALLOVED
0.75 of an hour per car.
ROLLS -ROYCE LI M ITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, EN G LAND
SB/EC 7 .12.66. SECTIO N M

Printed In En,land
No.SY;M9
C'ATIDCR.Y C
IGNITICN SYSTEM
APPLIC'ABLE TO:
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series produced after car number 1838 -
left-hand drive cars, 1948, leBi31949, 1954 and 1975 - right-hand drive cars.
OESCRIPTIOO
The ignition coil and starter switch solenold have recently been changed on
current production cars. 1he ignltion system has also been modified by the
W/G
N
W/G
w
A ~©~
i t© ©~. t 3
w
e@S
~©~~ 2
4 5
H53~
Fig.1 B.A.7 coil and ballast resistor (plan view)
A 'A' bank of engine

B 'B' bank of engine
1 Distributor
2 B.A.7 Coil
3 Note new positions
of terminals
4 Ballast resistor
Top terminal : W/G to engine loan
W/G to coil '+'
Lower terminal: Twin W to engine loom
(dotted)
5 Engine loCBn
Colour Coding N - Brown
W/G - White/green
W - White
Continued •••
SB/EC 12.1.67. M
SECTION
Printed In En.eland
- 2 - No. SY;M9
introduction of a ballast resistor. These changes have been made to enhance

the perfonnance of the ignition system and the purpose of this Bullet.in is to
inform Service Personnel and Retailers of the changes in detail.
The new ignition coil can be identified by the twin blade tenninals and
the mark.ings '+'and'-', as opposed to the previous coil which has stud
tenninals and the markings 1 SW' and 'CB'. It should be noted also that the
terminal positions of the new coil have been rotated through 1800 such th.at
the contact breaker terminal of the coil (marked 1 -•) is now on the left-
hand side of the coil, away fran the distributor.
Mounted adjacent to the left-hand side of the coil is a wire wound

ballast resistor (see Fig. 1). This resistor takes the form of a white
porcelain block with two blade terminals.
The new starter switch solenoid (see Fig. 2) is similar in appearance

to the previous unit, except that the single stud tenninal has been replaced
by two separate blade terminals.
W/G
Fig. 2 2ST starter switch solenoid
1 Additional blade connector and

cable
2 2ST starter switch solenoid
s Engine loan
Colour cod.ing W/G - White/green
N - Brown
R;W - Red/y,ni te
B - Black
Continued •••

Printed In England
I
SERVICE BULLETIN
- 3 - No. SY,IM9
Important It should be noted that the ignition coil and the starter
switch solenoid of the current system are not interchangeable
with those previously fitted.
Under no circumstances should a car fitted with the current

system be run with the ballast resistor disconnected.
For full details of the new part numbers see Spares Information Sheets
4.L.38. and 4.L.21.
ROLLS -ROYCE LI Mt TED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
SECTION M
SB/EC 12. J .67.
Printed In En,sland
No.SY/M10
Circulation - Countries with This Service Bulletin can~els
left-hand drive cars Service Bulletin SY/MlO issued
on 2.2.67.
CATEGORY B
MANUAL OPERATION OF TI-IE STARTER SWI1CI-f SOLENOID
APPLICABLE TO:
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars produced between the following
tv.-o series of numbers
Standard cars - SfU-I 1838 to SRX 2180 less SRX 1916, SRX 1949, SBX 1053, SRX 1959,
SBX 2013~ SRX 2018, SRX 2030, SRX 2032, SBX 2037, SRX 2049,
SRX 2057, SRX 2059, SRX 2063, SRX 2076, SRX 2083, SRX 2085,
SBX 2093, snx 2094, snx 209s, SBX 2102, SBX 2108, SRX 2110,
SRX 2114, SRX 2117, SRX 2118, SRX 2119, SRX 2134, SRX 2145,
SRX 2159, SRX 2160, SRX 2162, SRX 2164, SRX 2166, SBX 2167,
SRX. 2170, snx 2112, SBX 2175, SRX 2176
Coachbuil t cars - CRX 1865 to CRX 2273
DESCRIPTION
The ignition coil and start.er switch solenoid were changed on production cars some
time= ago, and the ign.i tion system was also modified by the fotroduction of a bal-
last resistor. These modl fications were to enhance the performance of the igni-
tion system.
The starter switch solenoid is capable of being manually operated by depres-

sing the rubber boot which shrouds the end of the solenoid plunger but, it should
bP noted that due to the manner in which this solenoid is connected into the
ignition and starter motor cl rcui ts, manual operation of the solenoid wl 11 cause
the engine to start and run as long as the plunger is depressed irrespective of
whPther the ignition is switched on or not.
In view of this, the starter switch solenoids which are being fitted to
present production cars, have been rrodlfied by the introduction of a metal cap
fj tted inside the rubber boot which shrouds the end of the solenoid plunger.
This metal cap prevents the solenoid plung-er from being manually depressed. The
purpose of this Service Bulletin is to advise Retailers and Service Personnel
that all cars fitted with the 2ST solenoid which hus a plunger capable of being
Continued •••
SB/EC 28.4.67. CHAPTER M

- --========
R~O~LL~S~-~R:o!vc~E~S~IL~V~ER~S~H~A:o!o:w~======,111111111••••
.ANO BENTLEY T SERIES
::>t:K· ·;l'.C;t ',, BULLET IN
.· - . _...·_. :.:4-:_,
.•! - x. '
- 2 - No.SY/M10
Circulation - Countries with
right-hand drive cars
operated manually, should be modified by the introduction of a blocking cap

'The work should be carried out on the next occasion that the cnr comes in for
a normal scheduled service or, to have any other work carried out on it.
PROCEDURE
1. Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the rubber boot which is fitted to one end of the starter switch
solenoid.
3. Ensure that the internal surface of the rubber boot is clean and dry.
4. Apply a coat of Dostik. 1261 adhesive to the internal surface of the

rubber boot and to the external surface of the blocking cap ( UD 14915)
provided.
5. Fit the blocking cap inside the rubber boot.
6. Fit the rubber boot to the starter switch solenoid.
7. Conn,ect the battery.
PARTS REQUIRED
UD 14915 Blocking cap 1 off
TIME ALLOWCD
0.2 of an hour
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED. PYM'S LANE, CREWE I ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SD/EC 28.4.67 • M
- . - - -
No. SY/1vI12
This Service Bulletin supercedes
Circulation - All Retailers Bulletin SY/Ml2 dated 8. 6. 67.
CATEGORY C
FLASHING OF THE COOLANT LEVEL WARNING LAMP
APPLICABLE TO:
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series Standard and Coachbuilt Cars
DESCRIPTIQ\I
A small number of complaints have been received of the coolant level lamp
flashing when the car is negotiating o sharp bend in the road.
The coolant level lamp is a warning device, to provide an indication

should any coolant be lost, and is activated by an electronic probe which is
fitted into the cooling systen expansion tank. The probe has two electrodes,
the circuit between which is normally completed by the coolant but, should the
forces set up by cornering cause the coolant to surge away from these
electrodes, the warning lamp will flash momentarily.
In order to overcame this feature a capacitor is now available which

can be fitted into the coolant level warning lamp circuit. This additional
component will prevent the warning lrunp from flashing during cornering without
interfering with the normal operation of the device. The capacitor can be
fitted to the flange which forms the base of the relay box cover.
It should be remenbered however, that if an OWner complains of the

coolant level warning lamp flashlngt this could well be caused by either a
minor loss of coolant or, by normnl usage. The system should, therefore,
be refilled and all hoses and connections checked for leaks. If the flashing
persists then modify the coolant level warning lamp circuit.
PROCEDURE
2. Remove the front cover of the relay box as described in Section MlO,
Page M60 of the Workshop Manual.
Continued •••
ROLLS .. ROYCE LIMITED, PYM·S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
SB/EC 26.6.67. SECTION

Printed In England
~ . -· - • • J • • - •

·, SER.VICE BULLETIN
- 2 - No. SY/M12
3. Using the mounting clip provided (RH 8057), mount the capacitor to the
underside of the fla~e which forms the base of the relay box cover.
4. Connect one terminal of the capacitor to a good earth point using a

suitable length of 14/.012 black cable.
5. Using a length of green/black 14/.01~ cable temporarily connect the

remaining terminal of the capacitor to terminal C3 of the coolant/
probe relay, which is shown in Figs. M55 and M.57 in Section MlO of the
Workshop Manual.
7. Operate the fuel/oil level switch. Should any delay occur in the
illumination of the coolant warning lamp, the green/black cable should
be removed from terminal C3 of the coolant probe relay and connected
to terminal C2.
8. Using the connector (UD 11874) and sleeve (UD 8888) provided,
permanently conne1..:t the existing cable and the new cable to the relay
terminal.
9. Flt the relay box front cover.
PARTS REQUIRED
RH 8049 Capacitor off

UD 11874 Connector off
UD 8888 Sleeve 1 off
RH 8057 Mounting clip 1 off
TIME ALLOWED
0.5 of an hour

Printed In Enaland
AND BENTLEY T SERIES ./SERVICE : BULLE_
T-IN
No. SY,IM15
CATEGORY C
CAUSES OF BATIERIES BECOMING' DISCHARGED
APPLIO\BLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bertley T Series cars.
DESOUPTI<N
A small number of cases have occurred where a car hns suffered ''ran a flat
battery although the battery and its charging system have been free from fault.
In these instances the flat battery was ~aused by the presence of a constant
current leakage fran the battery when the car was parked with the ignition
switched off.
Although the various items of electrical equipment which are not control-
led by the Lgnition switch have a fuse in their own circuits it is possible
that a current leakage can occur through some of these componentst should they
become faul·y.
The pu-·pose of this Service Bulletm is to advise Retailers and Service

personnel o the checks which should be carried out i f a car is suffering
from a flat battery and the normal c·1arging system and battery checks reveal
no faults.
The components which are not controlled by the ignition switch and through
which it is possible that a current -; eakage could occur are as follows:
The window li_

f t switches and looms
2. The cigar lighters
3. The boot and interior lamps
4 The starter motor soleno1d
ELECTRICAL CHOCK OF TiiE WINOOW LIFTS
The electric window lifts should be checked to ensure that no current leakage
is present, This could occur due to faults such as a chafed or trnpped _loom
or a sticking window lift switch.
Continued .••
· ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/ECk M
AND BENTLEY T SERIES • .· SERVICE ·-·BULLEl:IN
- 2 - No. SY/M15 I
Should a damaged loom be found this may be repaired by binding the

affected nrea with a suffJcient amount of tape in order to afford extra
protection against a recurrence of the damage.
A sticking window lift switch can be cured by fitting a length of

sponge rubber between each side of the swltch spindle and the mounting bracket
of the switch, such that the rubber assists the return action to the off posi-
tion. The instructions necessary to fit this rubber are detailed in the
following prooied~re.
PROCEOORE
Rear Door Looms
1) Open a rear door and locate the window lift loom 'Which passes from the
body centre pillar to the door.
2) Remove the grommet which loca.tes the 10001 in the body centre pillar.
3) Ease the loom and grommet out of the body pillar as far as possible.
4) Examine the loom for damage, paying particular attention to the under-
side of the loom. Rectify any damage if necessary, replacing any cut
cables and re-taping the loom with sufficient tape to prevent further
damage.
4a) Replace the loom and gromnet in the body pillar.
5) Repeat the foregoing for the other rear door.
Front Door Looms
6) Ranove the trim pad and the dust cover from one of the front doors.
7) Trace the route of the window lift loom from its connection block
forward to its point of exit from the door.
8) Examine this area of the loom for any signs of damage, re-taping the
loom ;f necessary.
9) Replace the dust cover and trim pad.
l 0) Repeat the foregoing for the other front door.

Continued ••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM•s LANE. CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 10.8.67. M
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES .-SERVICE ~eu·L·LE-r 1·Ni
- -
- 3 - No. SY/M15
Window Lift Switches
11) Check the window lift switches for signs of sticking in either of their
'On' positions, any that are not positive in their return action should
be modified as follows:
12) Remove the window lift switch escutcheon plate.
13) Fit two lengths of foam rubber strip to the switch between the black
plastic knob and the switch mowtt.ing bracket as shown in Figure 1.
Secure the rubber strip with a suitable adhesive.
14) Fit the window lift switch escutcheon.
F.i.g.l E~~ctric Window Lift Switch fitted

with rubber strips 1
Continued •••
CHAPTER
SB/ECk M
AND BENTLEY T SER1£S SERVICE BULLETIN
-4- No. SY/?\U5
MATERIAL REQUIRED
UB.15971 Rubber strip 2 off per

single switch
UB.15970 Rubber strip 2 off per

master switch
ELECTRICAL CHECK FOR THE CIGAR LIGHTERS
111e cigar lighters can be operated with the ignition switch in th~ 'Off' position
and therefore should a cigar lighter remain in the 'On' position a continual
current discharge will take place which may in time cause the battery to be
discharged.
PROCEDURE
1) Operate each cigar lighter in turn. The lighters should retuJ n to the
outer position within a period of t\velve seconds. Should a lighter remain
in the 'On' position for a longer period, the cigar lighter holder should
be replaced.
2) Remove all the cigar lighters and check the holders for the presence of
foreign matter which may be causing a partical short circuit between the
spring blades which feed the lighter element and the casing of the holder.
ELECTRICAL C:11ECI< OF 1liE BOOT AND INTERIOR LAMPS CIRaJIT
The interior lamps and the boot lamp may also cause a drain on the battery should
they be inadvertently left switched on or the switches become faulty.
PROCEDURE
1) Check that the boot lamp is extinguished before the boot lid reaches its
closed pos.' tion. 1i1is can be done by lying in the boot and slowly
lowering the boot lid, noting the point at which the boot lamp switches
off. Should the boot lid be too close to its closed position before the
lamp is extinguished, the boot lamp switch should be repositioned to co··-
rect this.
2) Check that the interior lamp switches on the facia panel are in the 'Off'
position,.
ROLLS-ROYCE LtMtTED. PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 10.8.67. M
. -·
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE e·u tLETIN
. . .
- 5 - No. SY/M15
3) Open one of the car doors and ensure that when closing the door the roof
lamp is extinguished before the door lock mechanism comes into contact
with the striker plate.
4) Repeat procedure number three for the other car doors.
ELECTRICAL CHECK OF TilE STARTER MOTOR S0Lf.NOID
In the unlikely event of water finding its way into the starter solenoid which
is bolted to an extension of the starter motor casing, it is possible that
electrolytic corrosion of the solenoid positive contact will occur, as this
contact is connected directly to the battery positive terminal. Should this
corrosion be particularly severe, sufficient debris may be produced to form a
conductive path between the positive terminal and the interior surface of the
solenoid casing thus providing a means for a constant current leakage from the
batteryo
This current leakage may be sufficient to completely discharge the

battery should the car be parked for any prolonged period of time.
A 500 volt J\,Ieggar or a O to 50 M/A ("2

amp) anmeter may be used to check
the solenoid for the effects of corrosion; a separate procedure being provided
for each instI'Ument.
PROCEOORE (with ammeter)
1) Remove the cables and the battery positive lead from the positive
terminal of the starter solenoid. The positive terminal is the one
which has one cable connected to it.
2) Connect the negative tenninal of the armieter to the positive terminal of

the solenoid.
3) Connect the positive terminal of the ammeter to the battery positive

lead ..
4) Should any reading now be observed on the ammeter, this indicates the
presence of a leak path, and the solenoid should be replaced.
Continued •••
SB/ECk CHAPTER
10.8.€7. M
..
AND BENTLEY T SERIES 1S£RV.JC;~1BU-l L'ETfN
- 6 - No. SY/M15
PROCEDURE (with 500 volt Meggar)
l) Disconnect the cables and the battery positive lead from the solenoid
positive terminal and ensure that the exterior surfaces of the solenoid
are free from water, oil or road dirt.
2) Connect one of the Meggar leads to the solenoid positive tenninal.
3) Connect the remaining Meggar lead to the solenoid casing ensuring a good
electrical connection is achieved.
4) Operate the Meggar and observe the reading. Should this be less than
one meg-ohm, the starter nntor solenoid should be replaced.
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 10.8.67. M
ROLlS•ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES r.Sffl\/.lCE:~·'Btl Lf.Ey IN
, --: r '" I •. r ~
No. SY/A,I1 7
Circulation -All Retailers
CATF.GORY C
IGNITICN COIL CONTACTS
APPLICABLE TO:
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars produced between the
following numbers
Right-hand drive cars SRH 1948 and SRH 2971

Left-hand drive cars SRX. 1838 and SRX 2968
DESCRIPTICN
A small number of ignit·on coils have been discovered on which the two low
tension contact blades have not been securely anchored to the bakelite
moulding.
The contact blades are riveted to a contact post secured in the bakelite
moulding, but in some cases the riveting operation has not been sufficient to
prevent the blades from moving on the ·ivet.
In the absen e of an efficient joint between the rivet and the blade,
an electrical res1stan- 7 will be present which will reduce the output of the
ignition coil and may cause a complete ignition failure.
The purpose of this Service Bulletin is to inform Retailers and Service

personnel of this defect and to advise that any c~r which ~s suffering frcm
ignition troubles should be checked for loose ignition coil contacts.
Should a loose contact be encountered a remedy can be effected by

thoroughly cleaning ··he rivet head and the adjacent area of the contact
blade and soldering the blade to the rivet.
ROLLS-ROYCE LtMlT£0, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 21.8.67. M
ROLLS"ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
No. SY/Ml8
CA'l'E.GORY ~
PROTECTION OF ELEC'IRICAL CIRa.JITS
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley 'T" Series cars.
DESCRIPTICN
There are a number of el'7ctrical components fitted ·:-_0 the above cars which
can be damaged or destroyed by , ol tages in exces.::. of r.he normal worldng
voltage of the car.
Excessively high V•">ltages can be induced by disconnecting one of the

battery terminals wirh the 1.gnition switch in either of the 'CN' positions
or, by using a. battl:'ry bO()~t charger without d1sco11necting the battery or~
any form of electric welding equipnent with the battery connected.
The purpose of t.hi~ Service Bullet..i II is! therefor~~ t.o advise

Retailers and Service Per:a:orme I that when c:harging o.r ! using electric
welding equipnent on the ca.r, the battery must be disconnected.
ROLLS•ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LAH£, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/ECK ~2.i0.67.
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE·
.
-BtJ'
-.
LL·ETIN
' . '
No.SY/M20
Circulation - North America only
CATF.GORY C
BEZEL PLATE M:>UNTlNG SCREWS
APPLICABLE TO:
;11 Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T series cars built to canply with
f\.h e Federal Safety Regulations produced from chassis number SRX 6001 and
onwards.
DESCRIPTION
The switches and warni.ng lamps on the above cars are fitted to the instrwnent
board by bezel plates secured with screws. The eight screws on the two bezel
plates as shown at 1A' in Fig.l are fitted with distances pieces and should
these screws be removed on cars produced .inmediately after the above chassis
n\Dllber, the distance pieces must be supported, otherwise they may fall behind
the instrwnent board, and can only be retrieved by ranoving the board.
By pressing the bezel plate towards the .instrument board the distance
pieces will be held and the screws can then be removed and replaced with
suitable lengths of stiff wire. It will then be possible to remove the
switches, bezel plate and distance pieces by sliding them along the wires.
A similar procedure can be used to refit these components.
On later cars the distance pieces have been adhered to the .instrument
board and the bezel plates can therefore be removed leaving the distance
pieces in place.
rr
Fig. t Instrument board. with facia remo1?~<1
SB/Eek 14.3.68 CHAPTER M

=-- -================ .. - . ' ~

SERVICE BULL~
.. E,
...
T...,]N ~ ,
No. SY/M21 1
(Re-issue of Pages 1 and 3)
This cancels all previous
issues of Pages 1 and 3 of
this Bulletin · ,
CATEGORY B
STARTER MOTOR SOLENOID MODIFICATION
APPLICAl~LE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars produced prior to car
numbers SBX 2951, less SRX 2957 and SBH 2955 - Standard Cars and CRH 3094 -
Coachbuilt Cars~
DESCRIPTION
It is possible that water may enter the engagement solenoid of the starter
_motor on cars produced prior to the above car numbers.
Should the ingress of water cause corrosion of the solenoid contacts it

is possible that an electrical leak wlll occurt resulting in the battery being
discharged, and severe contact corr.osion may cause starter motor fail~re.
The purpos~ of this Service Bulletin is to infonn Distributors, Retailers

and Service Personnel that the starter motors of these cars should be modified
on the next occasion that the car ls serviced or receives other attention.
The modification consists of a drain slot across the solenoid mounting face
of the starter motor and fitting an improved type of solenoid.
PROCEDURE
1. Disconnect the negative lead from the battery and remove the starter
motor from the car as described in Section M4 of the Wo'rkshop Manµal.
2. Remove the solenoid and the feed strap from the starter motor.
Disconnect the solenoid plunger from the engaging lever.
3. Clamp the starter motor ln a vice such that the nose cone ls pointing
downwards.
Continued •••
- ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED. PYM•s LANE. CREWE, ENGLAND
SB/ECk CHAPTER
16.5.68 M
- .~. -· -
. .,~ ......... ..
BULLET-IN - :
- 2 - No.SY;M21
Fig.1 Starter~~£!.:
with slot
1 SOLENOID MOUNTING
FACE
2 DRAIN SLCJI'
3 ENGAGEMENT LEVER
1<103
Fig. 22howjng plunger

fitted to engagi!!8 1
lever
1
2
3
4
5
PLUNGER
SPRJNG :.tJJ~)ED PIN
ENGAGEMENT L.2\/.S"t
BOSS
BAR
cl1- 5
K 104
Continued •.•
SB/F.ck 21. 3.68 CHAPTER M

--==================== - I :_ I ~ • .,,.. • '

AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVI CE BUit:L E:PIN
,.,..,~.;..!~. -
- 3 - No. SY;M21 I
(Re-issue)
4. Push a clean piece of cloth into the solenoid mounting boss such that
the engaging lever will be protected from filings.
5. Using a 0.250 in. (6,40 mm.) round file, cut a slot 0.250 jn. (6,40 mm.)
in depth across the solenoid mounting face, as shown in Figure 1.
6. Remove the cloth from the mounting boss and ensure that no filings have
entered . the boss.
7. Clean the solenoid plunger and fit it to the engaging lever ensuring
that the lever ls gripped between the bar and the spring loaded pin
of the plunger, as shown in FLgure 2.
8. Fit the new solenoid provided to the starter motor, such that the blade
tenninal of the solenoid is adjacent to the starter motor casing.
9. Fit the new feed strap between the motor terminal post and the nearest
~.o lenoid tenninal, tightening the nuts to 20 lb. in. (0,23 kgm.) only.
-Note Do not disturb the nuts which secure the stud tenninals
to the solenoid ~nd casing.
10. Check that the pmion engagement travel is correct, adjusting if

necessary as described in Section M4 of the Workshop Manual.
11. Fit the starter motor tq the car, and connect the brown cable fitted
with a Lucar tenninal to the blade tenninal of the solenoid, using a
suitable length of 28/0.012 brown cotton covered cable as a link lead.
12. Connect t.he brown cable(s) followed by the battery cable, to the upper
stud teiminal, tightening the nut to 20 lb.in. (0,23 kgm.) only.
Ensure that the battery cable is clear of the sub-frame and that the
brown cable( s) are clear of the steering cohnnn bonded coupling.
PARTS REQUJRED
CD 5145 Starter Motor Solenoid 1 off

CD 5146 Feed strap 1 off
TIME ALLOWED
1.30 hours.
SB/ECk CHAPTER
16.5.68 M
· ROLLS•ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
No. SY/M24
Ci rculat.too - All
Di stributo1.·s .ond Retailers
CATEGORY C
QUARTZ IODINE HEADLAMP UNITS

APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow nnd Bentley T Series cars.

DESCRIPTICN
A'number of customers have requested that Quartz Iodine headlamp units
be fitted to the above cars. Suitable Marchal Quartz Iodine lamp unit.s
ere now available as o replacement for the existing lamp unit.s.
This Service Bulletin has been is::ued to cdvise Servie.:e Personnel

of the correct method to fit these units, such thct the headlamp safety
circuit is retained.
It should be noted that these lrunp units should be fitted at the
Custaner's expense only ~nd that no allownnce will be given in respect
of the displaced lamp units. The Marchal headlamp unit is not available
fr<Xn Rolls-Royce Limited and should be obtained from an Official Mar~hal
Stockist.
PROCEDURE
1. Disconnect the battery and remove the existing four lamp units
as described in 'Section M9 of the Workshop M.anualt.
2. Remove 4.0 in. (10,16 cm.) of cable from both the black and the
white flying leaC:s attached to each of the new lamp units, and
attach a snap connector nipple, Rolls-Royce part number UD 11977,
to each of the flying leads.
3. Re.move the socket from the loom in each of the four headlamp
backshells by cutting the cables as close to the socket as
possible.
4. Locate the blue/white coble in each of the outer backshells end

tape these cables to the looms, ~s they nre not required.•
Continu.ed.....
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 30.5.68. M
.
SERVl'CE BULLETIN
NoSY/M24
- 2 -
I 1 .-----' 0 0 0
0
0 0 0
28-U-P
--- F.i ~· l Rela~ box viewe<l on
28-UR-P
underside
2
i- 1 SOCKET T
® @) ® 2 SOCKET U ( PRIOR TO
© IDDIFICATIOO)
® Q) 3 SOCKET V
: o
!Q
I ·__ ... o 0
0
0 ~I K 175
28-U-P
,E.g_. 2 Socket 'U 1 after modification A 28-UR-P

r
A NEW CABLE 28-lJR-P
\ @ @
G)
- ~ -®- -
(I)
'
Continued ,.
CHAPTER
SlYECk 30.5.68. M
No. SY/M24 1
- 3 -
5. Fit a snap connector nipple, Rolls-Royce pr:rt number l1D 11977,

to the two cables in e~ch of the four bnckshells.
6. Using snap connectors, Rolls-Royce part number RD iC50,. join

the four new lrunp units to the backshells.
7. Replace the headlamp rims, seals ond surrounds.
8. Remove the headlamp safety relay from the relay printed circuit.
boo.rd as described in 'Section M 10 of the Workshop :rv1nnuf:il '.
9. Remove the blue plo.stic covered cable and the blue/red plastic
covered cable fran. cavities 1 and 6 respectively in the relay
board soclret 'U' as shown in Figure 1.
10. Prepare a new cable 3.0 in. (7,62 cm.) long using 14/.010
blue/red plastic covered cable. Link tte end of the cable
removed from cavity 6 of socket •u•
to one end of the new
cable, using a terminal, Rolls-Royce part rlumber UD l i 87•~.
Fit this tenninal to cavity 6 of socket 'l'' o.s shown in
Figure 2 ... ·
11. Using a t.::.nnino.l, Rolls-Royce part number UD 11874, connect

the other end of the new cnble to the cable removed from
cavi~y t of ~ocket 'U'. Fit this terminal to co.vity l of
socket 'U' as shown in Figure 2.
12. Replace the relr.y box cover aE described in 'Section M 10 of

the Workshop Mtmual '.
Mil.terial Required
Part Number Description ~umber Required
UD 11977 Snap Connector Nipple 16 off
RD 7050 Snap Connector 8 off
lJD 11874 Lucar Tenninul 2 off
Continued ....
CHAPTER
SWF.Ck 30.5.68. M
- '
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE s·u tLETIN
No. Sy/lVI24
Re-issued
This sheet cancels previous
issue of sheet 4 dated 30.5.68.
- 4 -
Part Number Description Number Required
5239/222 J\!larchal Optique .Main Unit - All Cars 2 off

5538/222 TG Marchal Optique Dip Unit - R.H. Drive Cars
Only 2 off
5538/222 TD Marchal Optique Dip Unit - L.H. Drive Cars
Only 2 off
NOTE The numbers quoted for the lamp units are Marchal part numbers
as the lamps are not available from Rolls-Royce Limited.
BP/ECk 30.7.69 CHAPTER M

ROLLS• ROYCE SilVER SHADOW
·-'.~SERVl'CE·,,'BULLETIN
', I
No.SY/M25
andRetailers
CATEGORY C
THE WINDSCREEN WIPER MOI'OR MJUNTINGS
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars produced prior to
mmtbers:
SRH.4231 - Standard Cars
CRH.SCOS - Coachbuilt Cars
SRX.6158 - Standard Cars ) Cars built to meet the American

) Federal Safety Standard
CRX.6149 - Coachbuilt Cars ) Requirements
DESCRIPTION
The windscreen wiper motor is fastened to its mounting bracket by four studs
which pass through four rubber gromnets in the bracket. Cars produced prior
to the above numbers are fitted with either two or three washers between the
wiper motor casing and the grorrm.et whilst later cars have only one washer in
this position. The numb{µ' of washers fitted will affect the stiffness of the
monntings.
Fig. l Wiper motor to

mounting bracket secur.ing
arran~ement
1 RUBBER GR.OM\1ET
2 MOUNTING BRACKET
3 WASHER
4 WASHER
(four mounting points
as shown in inset)
Continued •••
ltOU.S-ROYCE LIMtTED, PYM•s LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
SB/ECk 27.6.68. CHAPTER M

No.SY;M25
- 2 -
The purpose of this Service Bulletin is to advise Service

Personnel that in the event of a customer complaint of excessive
wiper mechanism noise on an early car a considerable reduction in
motor noise level can be made by reducing the number of washers
fitted between the motor casing and the grommet to one, as shown
in Figure 1. This will increase the flexihility of the mountings
and reduce the noise level.
CHAPTER
$3/ECk 27 .6 .68. M
No. SY/M26
Circulation - Ali Distributors
and H.etailers
CATEGORY C
SETTING THE NEUTRAL START SWITCH
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCRIPTIOO
The control switch which prevents the starter motor fran being used unless the
gearbox is in the Neutral or Park position, is mounted on the side of ti1e
gearbox and is operated by a cam attached to the gearbox actuator linkage.
On early cars a boss was provided on the side of the neutral start switch
housing to enable.the cam to be set accurately. This boss has now been
deleted from production cars.
The purpose of this Service Bulletin is to inform Distributors, ....

Retailers and Service Personnel of an accurate method that can be usf.'d to ;;et
the neutral start switch cam on both early and late cars.
PROCEDURE
1. Ensure that. the gearbox actuator lever is in the Neutral position.
2. Remove the clevis pins from the neutral start switch operating lever.
3. Cormect a 12 volt test lamp between a positive supply and the white/
black cable connected to pin number 4 of socket P.1. which is located
beneath the brake fluid reservoir. This action will cause the test
lamp to be illuminated when the neutral start switch is on the peak of
the cam.
4. Push the switch operating lever forward and note the posJ.tion at which
the lamp is extinguished. Move the lever rearwards and again note
the position at which the lamp is extinguished.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE UMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND .
CHAPTER M
SB/ECk 27.6.68
.· ..
ROUS• ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES .SE·
. R
:
. VJ.CE
. ·'..
BULLETIN
. .
- 2 - No. SY/M26 I
5. Set the switch operating lever to a position midway between the two
points at which the lamp was extinguished.
6. Adjust the length of the rod connected to the cam operating lever,
until the clevis pin can be fitted wi tt,out disturbing the lever
setting.
7. Tighten the 2 B.A. locking nut and fit a new split pin to the clevig
pin.
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 27.6.68
.SERVICE BULLETIN
, '
No. SY/M 271

Circulation - Ail Distributors
and Retailers except U.K.
CATEGORY C
Tiffi NEUfRAL START SWI1CH HOUSING
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars fitted with the Torque
converter transmission unit and produced between the following car numbers:
SRX 4014 and SRX 4339 - Standard cars

CRX 3941 and CRX 6315 - Coachbuilt cars
SRX 6066 and SRX 6294 - Cars built to meet the American Federal Safety
Standard Requirements
DESCRIPTION
There have been some reported failures in service of the 'neutral start' and
'fast levelling' control switches. This Service Bulletin is issued to point
out the possible cause of the failure of these switches, and the actlon tc be
taken by Service Personnel to prevent a recurrence of the failure.
The 'neutral start' and the 'fast levelling' control switches are mounted
in a cast aluminium casing, the cover of this casing being bolted:to a bracket
attached to the left-ho.ncl side of the torque converter transmission casing.
The cover is secured to the switch casing by eight setscrews and the h~ads of
these setscrews, although being countersunk, may protrude above the surface of
the cover. Therefore, when the housing assembly is bolted to the support
bracket, the cover will be distorted. If the cover is distorted in this way
it will then be possible for watler to ent.e r the housing, thus causing the
switches to fail.
Continued •••
SB/ECk 23.8.68. CHAPTER M

AND BENTLEY T SERIES .SERVICE
'
BULLETIN
- 2 - NoSY/M 27
Fig. The Neutral Start Switc11

Housine;
1 COVER TO HOUSING SOCURING SCREW

2 WASHERS ADDED AS DISTANCE PIECF.S
3 M)UNTING BRACKET
4 COVER
5 HOUSING
PROCEDURE
Should either or both of the switches ·fall, on any of t he cars listed, due to
the ingress of water the switch housing should be rebuilt with new switches
installed. Two 0.250 in. (6,35 JIiii.) plain washers should be inserted between
the cover and the support bracket., as shown in Figure 1 (one was her in each
position).
These washers will act as spacers end so preyent distortion of the
cover.
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM 'S LANE , CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/OCk 23.8.68. M
AND BENTLEY T SERIES : sERVlCE
. .. BULLETIN
.
No.SY;M29
and Retailers
CATEGORY C
BATTERY CHARGING
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow, Bentley T Series and Rolls-Royce Phantom VI cars.
DESCRIPTION
The time taken between a new car leaving the factory and delivery into the
Customers hands can in certain cases be quite considerable and without regular
attention the battery may suffer enough to result in an early failure.
The following procedure is to be adopted by all Distributors and

Retailers on receipt of a new car to ensure that the battery is in its best
condition when the car is handed over 'to the Customer. To aid this procedure
all cars will be fitted with a label insfde the boot by the charging socket and
on the label will be written the date the battery condition was last checked
by Rolls-Royce Limited.
PROCEDURE
I. On receipt of a new car the Distributor or Retailer should check the

specific gravity of each cell. The readings taken for a fully charged
battery will lie within the ranges quoted below.
Note Due to the recessed position of the battery; care must be taken
to avoid spillage of the acid when checking the specific gravity.
If ambient air If ambient air

temperature is temperature is
generally below frequent!~ above
32°c. (90°F.) 32°c. (90 F.)
figures as belaw figures as below
Specific gravity of the acid in a

fully charged batter.v t .270 to 1.280 1 • 240 to l • 255
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMtTED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

AND BENTLEY T SERIES 'S ERV.I CE BULLETIN
,' '".l
No. SY/M29
- 2 -
In cases where the specific gravity reading is low when compared with the
above figures the battery must be recharged. This can be done by connecting
directly to the battery or by recharging through the two pin socket at the
normal charging rate of 7 amp. The battery top must be left off during the
charging period.
JMPORTANT All electrical systems in the car must be switched OFF to

avoid any damage to switches and contacts during charging.
If the battery is recharged at more than the nonnal 7 amp.
charging rate the battery leads must be disconnected.
On completion of the recharge the specific gravity of the acid should be

in the ranges quoted.
The acid levels must also be checked and the battery topped-up i f
necessary with distilled water.
This check on the state of charge of the battery and any necessary
corrections MUST BE CARRIED our WITHIN 28 DAYS of the date shown on the label
and thereafter must be repeated every 28 days whilst the car is in storage or
in the showroom.
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE , ENGLAND

ROU.S~ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES ·-tSE..RVfC;E1 ·BULLETIN··
• • ' • <I - r 'r
No.SY,M29
Addendum
and Retailers
CATEGORY C
BATIERY CHARGIOO
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shado.v and Bentley T Series e~rs.
DESCRIPI' ION
Would all Distributors and Retailers please note that the information contained
in Service Bulletin SY/M29, concerning checking of batteries whilst cars are
in storage or standing in showrooms, also applies to cars already in service
and which are standing for long periods for any reason.
If it is known that a car will be standing for a long period, for

example whilst undergoing repair or whilst standing in a sho.vroom, the battery
should be checked on receipt of the car and at regular 28 day intervals. In
those cases where the specific gravity readings are low when compared with the
readings of a fully charged battery, the battery MUST be re-charged. The
above remarks apply whether the battery leads are connected or disconnected.
IT IS MOST JMPORTANT that these instructions are carried out since, if

a battery is allowed to stand in a half-charged state for a long period,
sulphation of the battery plates will occur resulting in failure of one or
more of the battery cells.
It is the Service Manager's responsibility to ensure the Sales and

Workshop staff are aware of this problem and that these instn.ictions are
carried out.
ROU..S•ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
BP 3. 12.69 CHAPTER .M
.- ' ~
No. SY/M30
and Retailers
CATECX)RY C
THE MODEL 1fM WIPER MJTOR
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars fitted with the
M)del l&V permanent magnet wiper motor.
DESCRIPTION;
A number of complaints have been received regarding incorrect operation of

the blade parking mechanism on the 16W wiper motor. This motor can be
identified by the circular motor housing as opposed to the flat sided
housing fitted to earlier motors.
Incorrect operation of the parking mechanism results in one of the
following conditions.
A. When the wiper switch is turned to the toff' position, the
motor continues to run.
The tag breaking off the upper drive plate of the
parking mechanism is the cause of this condition. The tag is
shown in Figure 1.
B. The wiper blades strike the windscreen surround at the end of each
wiping stroke.
This condition is usually caused by a foul occurring between
the detent lever and the parking mechanism as shown in Figure 2.
The friction caused by the foul will be sufficient to prevent the
eccentric from turning~ causing the blades to strike the windscreen
surround at the end of each wiping stroke.
This Service Bu Uetin has been i.~sued to advise Distributors and

Retailers that replacement drive plates are now available and should a
complaint be received of a wip~r motor continuing to operate when switched
off, as described in (A)~ the upper drive plate should be replaced.
Continued .••
ROLLS•ROYCE LIMITED. PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
BP/Eck 28.5.70 CHAPTER M

ROl.LS•ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
No. SY/M30
- 2 -
The Service Bulletin also details a corrective action which should

prevent the blades from striking the windscreen surround as described in
(B) •
It should be noted that there is no adjustable parking switch on

this type of motor. Any adjustment to the parking position of the wiper blades
must be carried out by adjusting the wiper blade position on the splined boss
of the wheelbox.
PROCEDURE A
To rectify the condition of the wiper motor not switching off.
1. Remove the plastic cover from the wiper motor.
Do not remove the metal cover, for if the motor is

operated with this cover removed, severe damage to the
parking mechanism and rack will occur.
2. Retrieve the tag which has broken away fran the upper drive plate.
The tag is likely to be found in the grease surrounding the crank
gear.
3. Remove the wiper blades to reduce the load on the wiper operating
rack.
4. Switch on the ignition and allc,,v the wiper motor to operate until
the crankpin and connecting rod are in the position shown in
Figure 1. Switch off the ignition.
5. Turn the eccentric assanbly by hand in an anti-clockwise direction

to the extended or park position as shONn in Figure 1.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMJTED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

AND BENTLE\' T SERIES SERVICE BULLETIN
No. SY;M30
- 3 -
5 l378
Fig. Crank.pin~ connecting rod and eccentric

in correct position for upper drive
plate renewal.
I• Detent lever 5. Tag on eccentric

2. Connecting rod 6. Crank gear
3. 'Wipe' position of 7. Tag on upper drive
eccentric plate
4. Wave washer 8. Crankpin
6. Remove the circlip from the top of the crank.pin.

Remove the plain washer, spring and broken drive plate; leave
the brass bush in position on the crank.pin.
7. Fit a new drive plate to the brass bush ensuring that the
tag protrudes downwards through the recess in the wave washer
and rests against the left-hand side of the tag on the
eccentric as shown in Figure 1. Ensure that the drive plate
and brass bush are adequately greased and that the drive plate
is free to slide axially on the flats of the brass bush.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PVM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

-
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BUL-:L ETIN
• , , .-_ r;i:._ - !
No. SYjM30 I
- 4 -
Note Care should be taken when positioning the connecting

rod and the eccentric and when fitti~ the new drive
plate as the drive plate tag will be broken when the
motor is operated if the relative position of these
three items is not correct.
8. Fit the spring~ plain washer and circlip to the top of the
crankpin.
9. Fit the plastic cover to the motor.
The wiper blades should be fitted as follows:
Note The prucedure given is for right-hand drive cars on

which the blades park towards the left-hand side.
Left-hand drive cars are similar but are a mirror
image, with the blades parking towards the right-hand
side.
10. Switch on the wipers without blades and arms fitted, allow them
to complete four cycles and then switch off.
11. Fit the wiper blades to the splined shaft::; so that the tips
of the right-hand blade, and the outboard tip of the left-hand
blade, just contact the rubber windscreen surround. If the
splines do not line up in this position, the nearest position
for neat parking should be selected.
12. Having checked that the screen is clean, the wipers should be
operated for four cycles~ with the windscreen washer operating
continuously.
The wiper blades should not contact the rubber surround

while in operation.
1J. Switch the wiper motor off; the blades should return to a neat
parking po2-ition, with the blades either in light contact with
the rubber surround, or just above it.
14. If the blades touch the rubber during their sweep, or park
incorrectly~ the offending a.rm should be rotated one spline
in the appropriate direction~ and the above checks repeated.
Continued •••
ROLLS•ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE. ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/Eck 28.5.70 M
No.SY/M30
- 5 -
M!\TERIAL REQUIRED
PART NO. DESCRIPTION
CD 5429 Drive plate 1 off
TD;IE ALLOVED
.
To replace upper
.
drive plate 0.5 hours
PROCEDURE B
To rectify the blades striking the windscreeen surround at the
end of each wiping stroke.
1. Ensure that the wiper blades are in the parked position.
2. Remove the plastic cover from the motor.
2 L379
Fig. 2 Windscreen wiper motor detent

lever and eccentric
1. Detent lever
2. Eccentric
A = Inset shows point at which
foul may occur Continued •••
CHAPTER
BP/Eck 28.5.70 M
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULLET.IN
No.SY;M30
- 6 -
3. Examine the upper edges of the detent lever for signs of

fouling as shown in Figure 2.
Should there be any signs of fouling, the upper edge
of the lever should be carefully filed until clearance exists
between the lever and the upper plate of the eccentric as
shown in Figure 2.
Care should be taken not to allow metal filings to
enter the motor.
4. Fit the plastic cover to the motor.
5. Test the operation of the wiper blades on both a wet screen
and a drying screen. If the blades still strike the windscreen
surround this is caused by excessive friction within the
eccentric assembly and as this cannot be rectified the wiper
motor should be replaced.
MATERIAL REQJI~
TIME ALL()VED
To correct defective eccentric 0.5 hours

SERVICE .B·U.L-(: t T-IN '.
. .. . . .
No. S\:/M31 . I
CJrculation - u. S.A. and

Canada only
CATEGORY C
TIIE IDFAL CORPORATION FLASHER UNIT
APPLICABLE TO:
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley 'T' Series Cars built to comply
with the American Federal Safety Standards.
DESCRIPTION
A new type of direction indicator flasher unit is now fitted to all cars
manufactured for use in North America. This flasher unit is the model
550 manufactured by the Ideal Corporation and is identified by two
circular indentations on the top 'Of t'he unit.
This unit will in future be supplied for all replacement purposes

on the above cars.
If the Ideal flasher unit is not held squarely when being pushed
into the fuseboard socket, it is possible that damage will occur to the
protective lacquer with which the fuseboard is coated. To prevent
possible damage from happenir:ig, a protective washer is fitted between the base
of the flasher unit and the fuseboard.
Before fitting the flasher unit ensure that the protective washer
is in good condition and correctly fitted to the flasher unit.
PART Nl.MBERS
Ideal Flasher Unit - UD 17601
Protective washer - UD 17655
I
·1
.
CHAPTER
BP/ECk 10.6.70 M
Rolls Royce Silver 5Mdo:,,.: fl b'r:l!tll!y / S{!rif!S Service Bulletin
SECTION M
Circulation - All Distributors lh Ller.in i\o. SY/M33

R2ta i.J.ers
Date: 15.9.70
CATEGORY C
RADIO INTERFERENCE
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars built from Car
Serial Number 6000.
DESCRIPTION
Criticism h.1s been received of radio interference induced by electrical

components fitted to the car·. Current production cars are being fitted with
additional suppression to prevent radio interference. A kit of parts is now
,:::;
C
available containing the necessary components to prevent radio interference
r,
to cars already in service.
The kit of parts comprises a Filter unit, a Capacitor and an Earth
bonding strap (see Figure 1). The components should be fitted as described
under the appropriate headings, and only in the event of customer criticism.
However this additional suppression does not eliminate radio

interference from sources external to the car such as other vehicles,
overhead electricity cables and other electrical installations. The degree
of external sources of interference will be amplified if the radio selector
k:wb is turned away frcm a station. These factors should be considered when
assessing the degree of interference.
It should be noted also that if an F.M. (Frequency Modulated) radio

receiver is fitted to the car, the quality of reception will depend upon
th<~ local signal strength and the type of terrain through which the
c~r is moving. Any sounds or alterations in signal quality due to these
facts should not be confused w.ith interference.
Continued •••
BP/£ck
:i~ Rolls Royce Lirr.itr.d 1970
Roils /ioycu S:lvf!r Shadow I: i-H;t !:;- I .~·l·r11:.~ Service Bulletin
SECTION M
Circulat ion - Di stributors

AJ. l II: sl I e Li n [';o . SY/M33
and Retailer s
Date: 15.9.70 She et No. 2
1 3
; ·'
I
//
I
/
I
I
/
,:;
C
..,
r:;,
C
Fig. - Contents of kit
L&.1
1. Capacitor
"O
Q) 2. Earth Bonding Strap
.S 3. Filter Unit
0:
PROCEDURES
Filter Unit - To fit
On cars which do not have the radi o fitted in the s tandard posit ion in
the centre console, the filter unit must be electrically connected as
described in the following procedure. The filter unit must be attached
to sane convenient position as near as possible to the radio. Ensure
that the filter unit casing is properly earthed.
2. Remove the triangular shaped trim pads situated eit her side
of the centre console by using a thin flat tool and prising the
pnd away from the console. Take care not to mark the trim.
3. Attach the f i lter unit to the left-hand side radio mounting

bracket with a self-tapping s crew as shown in Figure 2. Ensure
that a good earth is made between the filter casing and radio
bracket.
It, is imperative that when fit ting th e filter unit, that

the earthed ends of the three red capacitors are fi t ted to the
rd.d.io input cables. The ear-thed ends of the three red capacitors
are those soldered directly to the body of the filter unit as shown
in Figure 3.
BP/ Eck Continued •••

'•'· Rolls- Ruy ct' Lirnited 1970
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow ft Br:NIP.y TSe11Hs Service Bulletin
SECTION M
Circulation - All Distributors lb I let. in No. SY/M33

an1 Retailers
Date: 15.9.70 :--hcet No. 3
RADIO FILTER MJUNfI!'l; COLOUR CODE
Feed - Yellow
~
Blaupunkt
__ J
(c:::::1 ~, Output - Grey
IL..---- - -
0.187 in (4,762 mm)
r"t:-;;;;-~-- 0.625 in (15,87 mm}
Phillips Feed - Grey

Output - One Blue
and one Black
- - - - 0.625 in (15,87 mm)

r:-7::-t=::\--- 0.500 in (12,70 mm)
l
Radiomobile Feed - Purple
Output - One Black
L 790 arH1 one White
Fig. 2 - Mounting points
Note When carrying out the next three procedures, it is

important that t.he following points are noted.
{a) The cables from the filter unit to the radio should be kept
as short as possible.
(b) When soldering the cables to the filter unit avoid the excessive
build up of heat, otherwise the capacitors will be irreparably
damaged.
4. Cut the two radio output cables to a suitable length and solder
them to the filter unit as shown in Figure 3.
5. Cut the radio feed supply cable to a suitable length and solder
to the filter unit as shown in Figure 3.
6. Solder the remaining three cables to the opposite end of the

filter unit. Ensure that matching colours are soldered opposite
each other e.g. red to red, as shown in Figure 3.
7. F.it the centre console triangular trim pads, by aligning each

clip opposite its socket and firmly pressing into position until
a positive click is heard.
Do not re-connect batterv at this point.

Continued •••
,~•, Rolls- Royce Limited 1970
Rolls Royce Sliver Shadow ft Bentley I Sl•r,l!s Service Bulletin
SECTION M
All Distributors lh I lct.i.n No. SY;M33

C.i rculation -
and Retailers.
Date: 15.9.70. Sheet No. 4
<=
Fig. 3 - Fitting cables to filter unit
1. output 1 5. Output 1
2. output 2 6, Output 2
3. · Radio feed 7. Radio feed
4. Earthed end of
capacitor
Caeacitor - To fit
The capacitor is fitted to the underside of the fuseboard, and is
connected into the gearchange thermal cut-out switch feed cable as
shown in Figure 4.
On early cars the electrical connection is made into the cable entering
the five-way socket on the underside of the fuseboard.
On later cars the electrical connection is made into the same cable,
which does not enter the socket (see Fig. 4) •.
1. Lower the fuseboard, and remove the six screws securing the
printed circuit.
Continued •••
BP/Eck
Roi ls· Rover. I. irnited 1 970

Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow ft Bent/Dyl Series Service Bolletin
SECTION
M
Circulation - 11:l I I el.in \o . SY/MJ3
AH Distributors
aad Reta Hers Sht~ct ;\o. 5
Date:
15.9.70
2. Locate the two Brown/Black cables on the underside of the fuseboard.

On early cars, these will be located in the five-way socket
between the indicator flasher unit and the gearchange thermal
cut-out switch. Later cars have the Brown/Black cables looped
\
beneath
I
the fuseboard and are each fitted with an in-line
Lucar connector.
3. Using suitable terminals, connect the positive (+) red end of the
capacitor to the t}:\inner Brown/Black cable. Keep the capacitor
lead as short as possible.
4. Using suitable connectors and a length of Black cable, connect
the negative end of the capacitor to the nearest 0.250 in. (6,35 nun.)
diameter bolts adjacent to the fuseboard pivot pins. Ensure that
a clean contact is made.
5. Tape the capacitor and its two cables securely to one of the
larger fuseboard looms. This will ensure that the capacitor
connections are not stressed.
-c;
C
"'
O' 6. Fit the fuseboard printed circuit, and close the fuseboard.
C:
w
C
"1:)
Q)
i:
ct
Bonding st1·ap - To fit
1. Fit one end of the bonding strap to one of the screws securing
the top cover of the windscreen wiper motor.
2. On Right-hand drive cars connect the remaining end of the

bonding strap to the uppermost bolt securing the windscreen
wii>er motor mounting bracket to the scuttle.
On Left-hand drive cars the bonding strap is connected to

the uppennost bolt securing the windscreen wiper motor mounting
bracket to the valance.
~TERIAL REQUIRED
Kit Number RH.8352 1 off
Continued •••
BP/Ed<
f-) Rolls-Royce Lirnited 1970

Rolls-RtJyce Sliver Shadow fJ Benllr.·r f Scf!es Service Bulletin
SECTION M
Bal I c L.i.n :'io. SY/M33

an d Retailers
Date: 15. 9. 70
I=-~
I
I ,
'O J ; '
!ii
~
O>
c::
w
C
'O
a,
.s
ct
I~~ ----..
A
-. -- B
l 784
Flg. 4 Fitting the capacitor
A. Early cars
B. Later cars
Continued •••
BP/Eck
(() Rolls- Royce Limited 1970

Ro/ls-Royce Sliver Shadow ft Bwt!q r Sr.r,fJs Service Bulletin
SECTION M
Ci rculation - All Dist r i butors !.i:J lletin No . SY/M33

and Retailers
Date : 1 5, 9. 70 Sheet No . 7
1 2 3 4
,t-- - -- - -- - - 1
1
'
0
--z
0)
0
cO
C\J 14 N 8.C.
--
Cl)
7
ti)
N
- -,
+, I
- - --1
I
I
I I
l BJ __ - - l-~
6 5 6 5 4 L 782
Fig . 5 Theoretical Wiring Diagrams showing the

Capacitor fitted.
A. Early cars B, Later cars

l. To gear change actuator 1• To gear change switch
2. Fuse panel printed 2. To gear change actuator
circuit 3. Loom
3. 5-way connector plug 4. Capacitor
4, To gearchange switch 5. In-llne ' Lucar' connections
.
5. Capacitor 6. Fuse panel printed
6. Therma l switch circuit.
Conti nued .•.
BP/Eck
1f'., Roll s- Royce Limited 19 70

Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow & 8tJ,r1rley TSe11es Service Bulletin
SECTION M
Circulation - All Distributors Bulle tin 1'0. SY/M.33

a.nd Retailers
D<1te: Sheet No. 8
T L'VIE ALLOWED
Fltting the complete kit 2-4- hours
BP/Eck
!1:°) Rolls- Royce Limited 1 970

''
ANO BENTLEY T $£RIES ·SERVICE
. . .
BULLE-T'I
.... . ,..,
No. SY/M34
and Retailers
CATEGCRY C
SPECIAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls~Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars.
DESCRIPTION
A nwnber of items of special electrical equipment are being fitted to
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T series cars at customer request.
These items which include television receivers, cassette tape players and
radio telephones are not warranted by Rolls-Royce Limited and arc, therefore,
subject to the manufacturers warranty.
Should trruhle be experienced with any of this equipment it should be

returned directly to the manufacturer or official Dealers for repair and
warranty consideration
In territories other than t~ United Kingdom the local Dealer
of the equipment manufacturer should be consulted or if there is no local
Dealer the manufacturer should be contacted at the address shown in this
Service Bulletin.
If service facilities are required for equipment other than that
mentioned overleaf, the appropriate manufacturer should be contacted
directly.
'nle information given in this Service Bulletin is to the best of
our knowledge correct at the date of issue. It is not intended to keep
the list of service Dealers up to date and Distributors and Retailers are
recoillllended to check details from time to time with their local Dealers
for special Eletric Equipment.
Continued •••
ROLLS - ROYCE L JMITEO, PYM 's LANE, CREWE. ENG LANO
CHAPTER
BP/ECk l7.8.70c M
· ANO BENTLEY T SERIES
'SERVI CE BUL·l.'e-T'I
• • ,:, • f ....
No. SY/tv'134
- 2 -
SLOT STEREO CASSETTE PIAYERS
These are marketed and serviced by.
Metro-Sound Group of Companies,

Audio Works ,
Cartersfield Road,
Waltham Abbey, Essex.
Telephone Waltham Cross 31933
Service Manager Mr. H. Cackett

Any 8 track cartridge player needing repair or serv1c.l.flg should be
removed from the car and sent to the above address after prior notification.
Service exchange sets are not available.
SONY TELEVISION RECEIVERS

Thes.e are manufactured or serviced by.
Sony (U.K.) Ltd.,.

11 Ascot Road,
Bedfont,
Feltham, M'iddlesex.
Telephone Ashford 50021/8

Service Manager Mr. G.A. Frewin.
BELGDJM FRANCE
SYMA. S.A., TRANCHANT ELECTRONIQUE,

419 Avenue Louise, 19-21 Rue de Madam Sanzillon,
BRUXELLES 5. Clichy (SEINE),
France.
GERMANY HOLLAND
ELF.CTROACOUSTIC, G.M.B.H., BRANSTEDER ELECTRONICS,

Westign 425-429, Parnassusveg 210-212-214,
KIEL 23. · AMSfERDAM Z.
Continued •••
BP/ECk 17. 8. 70. M

CHAPTER
'
.SERVICE
,·.
. .
.
BULLETf
.. ..... ·.
; . ' . . . . \. . ·, . '.' .
No. SY/M34
- 3 -
NORTH AMERICA SPAIN

SONY OF CANADA LTD. , KOS!VDS ELECTRICA S.A.,
~069 Universal Drive, Rosellon 283,
Cooksvi 11e , BARCELONA 9.
Mississauga,
ONTARIO,
Canada.
S.VEDEN SVITZERLAND
GYLLING HEM-ELEKTRONIK AB, SEYFFER & CO. A.G.,

Fack, · Badenerstrasse 265,
S-161 11 Bromma 11. ZURICH 8040.
In the event of a receiver needing repair or servicing one of the

following actions should be taken.
( I) Remove the receiver from the car and send it by rail to one of
the addresses listed, having previously notified Sony Ltd., of
all relevant details.
(2) Contact Sony Ltd., and arrange for the receiver to be collected.
(3) Take the car and receiver to one of the addresses listed by prior
appointment.
PYE TELECOM!\f.JNICATIONS EQJIPMENT
These are serviced by.
ABERDEEN BELFAST
Pye Telecomnrunications Ltd •. Pye Telecommunications Ltd.7
Craigshaw Road, ABERDEEN AB1 4AP. Lislea Drive, BELFAST BT9 7JG.
Telephone Aberdeen 54821 Telephone Belfast 665250

665259
BIRMINGHAM BRIG~~ Sub Unit of South London

Pye Telecommunications Ltd., Pye Telecommunications Ltd.)
Birmingham Road, 9,10 & 12 Lion Mews 1
Rowley Regis, Warley, Worcs. Richardson Road,
HOVE, Sussex.
Telephone Blackheath 2552
T,~lephooe Brie;bton 724689
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND Coot i nued •••
"'
BP/ECk 17. 8. 70 CHAPTER M
. . . .. .
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULlE-T'I
.. .. ":' ,, ,.
No. SY;M34
- 4 -
BRISTOL C.4MBRIDGE
Pye Telecommunications Ltd., Pye Telecamnunications Ltd.>
66-68 Gloucester Road North, 56 Arbury Road,
Filton, BRISTOL. CAMBRIDGE, CB4 2JE.
Telephone Bristol 694285 Manager Mr. C.M. Prouse.

Telephone Cambridge 59592
CARDIFF CHANNEL ISLANDS
Pye Telecorrununications Ltd.~ Pye Telecorrnnunications Ltd.,
25a, Severn Road, Canton, 5 Newgate Street,
CARDIFF. St. Heller,
JERSEY.
Telephone Cardiff 28284
Manager Mr. R. Green
Telephone Central 23847
CHELMSFORD - Sub Unit of Cambridge COVEN1RY
Pye Telecommunications Ltd.,
Russel Way, Pye Telecornnrunications Ltd.~
Widford Trading Estate, 4, Brindley ~oad,
CHEI.MSFORD, Exhall, Nr. Coventry.
Essex.
Telephone Bedworth 4747
Telephone Chelmsford 57761
DUNDEE - Sub Unit of Edinburgh EDINBURGH

Pye Telecorrununications Ltd., Pye Teleconnnunications Ltd. 1
231, King Street, Dunedin Street,
Broughty Ferry, DUNDEE. EDINBUROI •
Telephone Dundee 79759 Telephone Waverley 3421
Continued •••
CHAPTER
BP/ECk 17.8.70. M
. . '.
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE
. ..
BULLET'I
. .. ....
. . . .. . ~ .,.
No, SY;M34
- 5 -
EXETER - Sub Unit of Bristol GLASGOV

Pye Telecommunications Ltd. 1 Pye Telecommunications Ltd.,
53/54 King Ect.vard Street, Bal.more Industrial Estate,
St. David's, Glentanar Road,
EXETER, Devon. GLASGO,V, N.2.
Telephone Exeter 54090 Telephone 041 336 7711
041 336 7755
GRIMSBY - Sub Unit of Nott~ngham HULL - Sub Unit of Leeds
Pye Teleconmunications Ltd.; Pye Teleconrnunications Ltd. 1
Wragby Street, Wiltshire Road,
GRIMSBY. Dairycoates, HULL HU4 6PA
Telephone Grimsby 2777 Telephone Hull 37339
LIVERPOOL
Pye Telecomnunications Ltd.)' Pye Telecommunications Ltd.;
5, Brown Place, 3-5 Norman Street,
Brown Lane Estate, London Road, LIVERPOOL 3 L3 8JZ
LEEDS 11.
Telephone Royal 3117
Telephone Leeds 72926 (3 lines)
LOOOON
NOR1H LO~ g)UTH LCND~

Pye Telecommunications Ltd., Pye Telecommunications Ltd.~
111-113 Highgate Road, 34, Gladstone Road,
London N.w .5. CROYD~ CR9 '2JY.
Manager Mr. M. Goodall Manager Mr. C.J. Chamberlain,

Telephone Gulliver 8771-8
Telephone Thornton Heath 9621
Continued ....
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED', PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/ECk 17.8. 70, M
===--·=======================================
. .
AHD BENTLEY T SERfES

SERVICE BULLET.I
..... ':.·
No. SY;M34
- 6 -
WEST LONDON MAOCHESTER.

Pye Telecormnunications Ltd., Py.e Telecommunications Ltd.?
Colham Mill Road, 140, Kingsway,
WEST DRAYTON, MANOfE STER 19.
Middlesex.
Telephone Rusholme 2912
Manager Mr. J. Newman
Telephone West Drayton 2126
MEUVAY MIDDLESBROUGH - Sub Unit of Newcastle

Pye Telecommunications Ltd.:- Pye Telecorrmunications Ltd.J
Conunercial Road, 136 Waterloo Road,
Strood, MIDDLESBROUGH.
KENT.
Telephone Middlesbrough 47478
Manager Mr. R.W. Mills
Telephone Medway 77674
NEWCASTLE NOTTINGHAM
Pye Telecommunications Ltd.¥ Pye Teleco111nunications Ltd.,
Cremona Park, 615, Woodborough Road,
20 Benton Road, NOTTINGHAM.
NEWCASTLE-ON-TYNE
NE7 7DT. Telephone Nottingham 66146 (4 lines)
Manager Mr. G. Gibson
·Telephone Navcastle 666231
READil'K] - Sub Unit of Southampton_ SHEFFIELD - Sub Unit of Leeds

Pye Telecommunications Ltd., Pye Telecommunications Ltd.,
51, Milford Road, 103, Rutland Road,
READING~ SHEFFIELD.
Telephone Reading 580640 Telephone Sheffield 22604
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIM•TED. PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
BP/ECk 17 • 8. 70, CHAPTER M

=----=======================
· AND BENTLEY T SERIES S~RVIC.E
....... .
·. .
BULLETI
..
.,, - .. . . .....
No. SV/M34
- 7 -
SOlJI'HAMPTON SOUTII EAST AREA
Pye Telecommunications Ltd.~ Pye Telecommunications Ltd.~

8, Brickfield Lane, 56 Arbury Road,
Chandlers Ford Industrial Estate, Cambridge, CB4 2JE.
EASTLEIGH,
Hants 505 3ZW. Regional Manager Mr. T.A. Pearson
Telephone Chandlers Ford 2265 Telephone Cambridge 56530
All types of Service Spares available from:-
SPARES SECTION
Pye Teleconununications Ltd.,
Gwydir Street,
CAMBRIDGE CB1 2LQ.
Manager Mr. J. Vtbod
Telephone Cambridge 62121
Should seI"'Vice .facilities be required the equipment can be sent

by prior appointment to one of the addresses listed, or aA appointment made
for a Pye Service Engineer to come and attend to the installation.
RADIOWBILE srEREO TAPE PLAYERS
Service facilities for this equipment is available from.

Radiomobile Ltd.,
Goodwood Works,
North Circular Road,
London N. W.2.
Telephone 01 452 0171
SeI"'Vice Manager Mr. M.G. Stoot

Service is also provided by any Radiomobile Dealer in addition to the .
following Voxson Dealers.
Continued ••.
BP/ECk 17 .S.'70. CHAPTER M

ROLLS~ROYCE SILVER SHAOOW
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES ·sERVICE· BUL"LETI
. ..
. ~ ,•
No. SY/M34
- 8 :--
OVERSEAS DEALERS
W.H. Lowe & Co. Pty Ltd. 1 Inelco Belgium S.A.

P.O. Box 13, 20/24, rue de l 'Hoptial,
Balwyn - Victoria Brussels,
Australia. BELGilM.
Auto Recambios Gols's, Italcar S .A.

Leon y Castillo, 102-104, Calle de Goya 2,
Las Palmas, Santa Cruz,
Canary Islands. Tenerife, Canary Islands.
R.E.S. Trading House, Voxson France,
P .o. Box 2336, 49, Av. Klaber,
Nicosia, CYPRUS. 75 - Paris XVI,
FRANCE.
Psiktemboriki Athinon S.A~ Inelco Holland NV
49 3rd September St·. A.J. Ernstraat 801,
Athens, Amsterdam Zuid II,
GREECE. Holland.
S.I.R.E. Dindar Confort,

Via Fabio Filzi, 8, BP 12.,
34132 Trieste, Saint Denis,
ITALY. La Reunion
Hussein Nouman Soufraki, Nani,

SC Istiklal 240, 27, South Street,
TRIPOLI, Valetta,
Libya. Malta.
F. Pigna!, La Mure,
Bd/Girardot, 43, Bd. Ibn Tachfine,
Angle rue J Cartier, Casablanca, Morocco.
Casablanca, Morocco.
Radiauto, Young Electric Electronics SA,

Avenida Columbano, 24/26, av. de la Gare des Eaux-Vives,
Bordalo Pinheiro 94/A, GENEVA, Switzerland.
Lisbon, Portugal.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED' PYM Is LANE I CREWE. ENGLAND
BP/F.Ck 17.8.70. CHAPTER M

·sERvrce ·sui.i. . E-i-·1
. . . . .~,. ~ ,::..·
NoSY;twf34-
- .g -
Henna.nos Antor S .A.

Apartado Postal, 40200,
Nueva Granada,
Caracas, Venezuela.
UNITED KINGDCM DFALERS

Zenith Motor & Eng. Works Ltd., Car Radio Services (Finchley) Ltd.,
585-593, Commercial Road, 905/925, High Road,
London, E.1. North Finchley,
London, N. 12.
Hamilton Radio Services, Cli~ons Service Station Ltd.,

18, Lodge Road, 59, Sidrup Road,
London,N.W.8. Lee,
London9 S.E.11.
University Electrics Ltd., Atkinson Battery Services Ltd.,

209, Balham High Road, 27, Pembridge Villas,
Londort,S.W.17. London,w.11.
J. Davy Ltd~-, Nicholls & Sons Ltd.,

241 , North End Road, 1 , Kingsway ,
London,W. l4. ,edford,
Beds.,
Hewens Garages Ltd;, Mid-Bucks Automotive Services Ltd.,

128; Bridge Road, Buckingham Road,
Maidenhead, Aylesbury,
Berks. Bucks.
Car Sound Ltd. , Kenning Specialised Services,

80, Watergate Street, Brook Street,
Chester,, Derby,
Cheshire CHt 2LF. Derbyshire.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED. PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLA.ND
BP/ECk 11.8.10. CHAPTER M

-··========================== . . . .. . .
SERVICE
.
BULl-,E·T'i
.. ... . .. · · ,
=---============================ :.,,
No. SY,1M34
- 10 -
Prideaux ( Barnstaple) Ltd., Motor Macs (Exeter) Ltd.,

Bear Street, Paris Street,
Barnstaple, Exeter,
Devonshire. Devonshire.
Enoch & Co. (Torbay) Ltd., Turnbulls Garage Ltd.,

Imperial Garages, Breton Side,
Paignton, Plymouth,
Devonshire. Devonshire.
F .W.B. Saunders l;td., Murray & Charleton Ltd.,

Digby Road, Chain Bridge Road,
Sherborne, Blaydon-on-Tyne,
Dorset. Dur.ham.
Wheatley l\\>tors Ltd., Lamb's Ltd. 1

102 Yarm Lane, Standard House,
Stockton-on-Tees, Southend Road,
Durham. Woodford Green,
Essex.
Ray Powell Ltd. , Steel's Accessories Ltd.,
Roding Lane North, 2, Brighton Street,
Woodford Green, Bristol,
Essex. Glos. BS2 8XB. .
Cheltenham Car Mart Ltd., Steels Basingstoke Ltd.,

Radio Div is ion, The Hatch,
Cheltenham, London Road,
Glos. Basingstoke,
Har1'.lpshire •
Gaedore Limited, Carey & Lambert Ltd.,
4, Bloomfield Avenue, Austin House,
Winton, The Avenue,
Bournenouth, Southampton,
Hampshire, BH9 lUB Hampshire, 509 1WN.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LtMtTED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
BP/ECk 17 .. 8.70. CHAPTER M

·sERVICE
. .
·sut.·t·e.,.,1
.. ....
. -~ ~
No. SY;M34
- 11 -
Henlys (Hereford) Ltd., Stevenage Motor Co. Ltd.,

Widemarsh Street, Morr is House,
Hereford, Stevenage,
Herefordshire. Herts.
Russell's Auto Electric Co., Murkett Bros. Ltd.,

13-27 Loates Lane, 52, St. Gennain Street,
Watford Herts. Huntingdon,
Hunts.
Russell's of Chatham Ltd., George Fitt Motors Ltd.,

Medway Street, Tankerton Garage,
Chatham, Tan.kerton,
Kent. Kent.
Caffyns Ltd. , J. Davy (Liverpool) Ltd.,

150, High Street, Woodend Avenue,
Tonbridge, Speke,
Kent. Liverpool, 24,
Lanes.
ti verpool Mobile Radio Ltd. , W. Watson & Co. (Liverpool) Ltd.,

1-3, Warrenhouse Road, Oldham Street,
Blundellsands, Liverpool,
Liverpool, 22, Lanes.
Lanes.
The Car Radio Centre, Lookers Ltd.,

Globe Works, Chester Road,
Boundary Street, Stretford,
Manchester, M12 5WR. Manchester, Lanes.
Lanes.
Tom Garners Motors Ltd., Frank Chapman, A.M.A.E.T.,

P.O. Box 400, Lansdowne Buildings,
'Olympia', Bare;
Chester Road, Morecambe,
Manchester, M15 4GA, Lanes.
Lanes.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE L IMITEO, PYM'S LANE, CREWE. ENGLAND
BP/ECk. 17.8.70. CHAPTER M

ANO BENTLEY T Sf:RIES
- 12-
Southport Electrical Services Ltd.,

Car Radio of Preston Ltd., 7-11, Yellow House Lane,
290, Blackpool Road,
Southport,
Preston) Lanes.
Lanes. PR2 3AE.
H.A. Browett & Co. Ltd., Castle's Motor Co. (Leicester) Ltd.,
60-66 Granby Street, 9'1 , Abbey Lane,
Leicester, Leicester,
Leics. Leics. LE4 5QW.
Holland Bros. Ltd;, Fred W. Wood Ltd • .,

Wide Bargate, 24a, Bull Ring,
Boston, Grimsby,
Lines. Lines.
C.F. Parkinson (Lindsey) Ltd., Transcar Radio Ltd.,

outer Circle Road, 7 1 , Heath Road,
Lincoln, Twickenham,
Lines. Middlesex.
Mam Egerton & Co. Ltd., Grose Ltd.,

s, Prince of Wales Road, Queens Park Parade,
Norwich, Kingsthorpe, ·
Norfolk. Northampton.
Atkey's of Nottingham Road, Hartwells of Oxford Ltd.,

Nottingham, Oxford Road,
Notts. Kidlington, Oxford.
iWinkworth & Co. , Peppers of Hanley Ltd ••

7, Penel Orlieu, 63, Piccadilly,
Bridgwater, Hanley,
Somerset. Stoke-on-Trent,
Staffs.
Charles Clark & Son Ltd., Botwoods,

Chapel Ash, Majors Co mer,
Wolverhampton, Ipswich,
Staffs. Suffolk.
Continued •••
BP/£Ck 17.8.70. CHAPTER M

ROLLS-ROYCE s,LVER SHADOW
·sERvrce BuLi·~ . 'E-T'I
. . .. ./ .,·
No. SY;M34-
- 13 -
Turners (Croydon) Ltd., F.W. Mays & Co. Ltd.,

95, Windmill Road, South Street,
West Croydon, CR.9 2SU, Dorking,
Surrey. Surrey.
Adcocks Garages Ltd., Caffyns Ltd.,

East Street, Meads Road,
Chichester, Eastbourne,
Sussex. Sussex.
Car Radio Services, R.J. Evans & Kitchen Ltd.,

136, Old Shoreham Road, 56, Bromsgrove Street,
Hove, Birmingham, 5,
Sussex. Warwicks.
George Heath Motors Ltd., A.T. Gittins & Son Ltd.,

P.O. Box 263, Coventry Road, 114--116, Irving Street,
Small Heath, Birmingham, 1 ,
Bj_nningham, 10, Warwicks.
warwicks.
Gordon March Ltd., F. Guyver & ··Sons Ltd.,

1, Broomfield Road, Rother Street,
Earlsdon, Stratford-on-Avon,
Coventry, Warwicks.
Warwicks.
Henlys (Wessex) Ltd., Steels (Swindon) Ltd.,
Southampton Road, Drove Road,
Salisbury, Swindon,
Wiltshire. Wil.tshire •
Stour Valley Motor Co. Ltd., Eyre Bros. (Barnsley) Ltd.,

Hagley Road-, Huddersfield Road,
Stourbridge, ~amsley,
Worcs. Yorks.
Continued •••
BP/ECk 17.8.70, CHAPTER M

="" "'====================
ROLLS- ROYCE SILVER SHAOOW
"SERVICE BUL:l.·E-T'I
. ~-· ..,
. ~
No. SY,/M34
- 14 -
Cornelius Pariah Ltd., Cox & Co. (Leeds) Ltd.,

Anlaby Road, Regent Street,
Kingston-upon-Hull, Leeds, 2,
Yorks. Yorks.
Car Radio Services of Otley Ltd., Tesseymans of Scarborough Ltd.,

15, Crossgate, Valley Bridge Road,
Otley, Scarborough,
Yorks. Yorks.
Allan Urquhart, Moorwell Motors Ltd.,

297/299 Ecclesall Road, Machen Place,
Sheffield, 11, Cardiff,
Yorks. Glam.
C •.K. Andrews. Ltd. s- F.N. Morgan & Co. Ltd.,

Uplands Garage, 57, Chepston Road,
Swansea, Newport,
Glam. Mon. NPT 8WL.
McQuiston's Garage Ltd., Macrae & Dick Ltd.,

18, Beresford Terrace, 36, AcadeJl\Y Street,
~r, Inverness,
~rshire. Invemesshire.
Melvin Motors Ltd., Auto Radio Services,

93, Lauderdale Gardens, 230, Hamilton Road,
Glasgow, w.2. Motherwell,
Lanarkshire.
Eastern Car Radio, Car Radio Services,

Russell Road, 45, Kinnoull Causeway,
Edin.burgh, EH12 5LZ. Perth,
Perthshire.
Westfield Autocar Ltd., Roy Thomson Ltd.,

Shell Park , 130 Gt. Western Road,
Drip Road, Aberdeen.
Stirling, Stirlingshire.
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE llMtTEO, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
BP/ECk. 17.8.70. M
CH.APTER
"'===========================
ROLLS ROYC£ SILVER SHADOW
SERVICE BULl·E·T'I
4
AND BENTLEY T SERIES . . ~-· ... ,
No. SY/M34
- 15 -
VOXSON STEREO 8 TAPE PLAYERS
Service facilities in the U.K. for this equipment is available from.
Radianobile Ltd.,
Cooctwood Works,
North Circular Road,
London N.W.2.
Telephone 014520171
Service Manager Mr. M.G. Stoot

Service is available overseas from the Voxson Dealers listed on Pages 8 and
9.,.
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE I CREWE I ENGLAND
BP/ECk 17.8.70, CHAPTER M

ANO BENTLEY T SERfES
No.SY;M35
Circulation~ All Distributors
and Retailers
CATEOORY C
ENGINE ICNITION TTh1ING
APPLIO\BLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley •T 1 Series cars from Car Serial
nwnber SRH 8742 onwards.
DESCRIPTION
Current production cars are fitted with the Lucas 35 D8 type of distributor
which has only one set of contact points.
The ignition timing on these cars is 50 B.T.D.C. set at 800 rpm.
Those cars after the above Car Serial Nwnber built to comply with
1970 American Federal Safety standards are fitted with a Vehicle Emission
Control information plate on which it is stated that the ignition timing
is T.D.C. at 500 rpm with the vacuum retard disconnected.
Although correct, the infonnation is now superseded by this Service

Bulletin because it has been found that more consistent results can be obtained
i f the ignition setting is made at the higher engine speed.
Both the settings represent the same advance curve on this distributor.
When setting or checking the ignition timing on any of the above cars
the following procedure should be adopted.
PROCEDURE
l• All cars a~er Car Serial Nwnber SRH 8742 other than those built
to comply with the American Federal Safctx Standards.
a) Examine the condition of the contact points and clean or renew as
necessary.
Continued •• ;
ROLLS - ROYCE L tMtTEO , PYM'S LANE , CREWE. ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/JC 7.8.70 M
ANO BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULLE·TI •••• ,.,"...y·.:..
No..SY/M35
- 2 -
b) Start the engine and allow to idle.

c) Using an impu se tachometer,fdwell angle meter set the dwell angle
5
to between 26 and 28° by means of the adjusting screw.
d) Run the engine until the normal operating temperature is reached and
the choke is fully open.
e) Switch off the engine.
f) Connect a stroboscope and start the engine.
g) Set the engine speed to 8CX) rpm by means qf the throttle stop screw.
h) Adjust the distributor to set the ignition timing to 5 0 B.T.D.C.
Tighten the clamp bolt and check the timing.
2. Cars built to comply with the 1970 American Federal Safety Standards
a) Examine the condition of the contact points and clean or renew as
necessary.
b) Start the engine and allow to idle.
c) Using an '.impulse tachometer/dwell ~le meter set the dwell angle of
the distributor points to 16° and·28. by means of the adjusting screw.
d) Run the engine until the normal operating temperature is reached
and the choke is fully open.
e) Switch off the engine.
f) Disconnect the vacuum pipe from the vacuum retard tap and blank off
the connection on the tap.
g) Connect a stroboscope and start the engine.
h) Set the engine speed to 800 rpm by means of the throttle stop screw.
i) Adjust the distributor to set the ignition t.iming at s0 B.T.D.C.
Tighten the clamp bolt and check the timing.
Continued ....
BP/JC 7.8.70 CHAPTER M

.SERVICE BULLE-·T·1
.· .......
- 3 _.
j) Recormect the vacutml pipe to the vacuwn retard tap.
k) Ensuring that the gearbox is in neutral and that the refrigeration

is switched off, set the idling speed of the engine to 6(X) rpm using
the adjusting screw and tighten the locknut.
BP/JC 7.8.70 CHAPTER M

Rol/s.finyce Stiver Shadov., iJ Ber.tier I SeflHS Service Bulletin
SECTION
Circulat ion - All Distri butors and fl.J ! l c ti n Pio. SY/M36
R~tailers
D:lte: 1 • 9. 70 . Sheet ;'{o .
CATOOORY C
THE LUCAS 16 P 6 IGNITION COIL
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bent ley 'T' Series cars fitted with t he
Lucas BA 7 ignition coil.
DE~RIPTION:
The Lucas BA 7 ignition coil, Rolls-liloyce part number UE 34104 has been
superseded by the Lucas 16 P 6 ignition coil.
In future the 16 P 6 co il will be supplied as a replacement for the

BA 7 coil . The Rolls-Royce part nLDnber of the new coil is RH 8402.
C:
The two ignition coils are identical except that the BA 7 coil has a
s:~rewed t ype of H.T. l ead and the new 16 P 6 coil has a push-in t ype of H.T.
co.nnecto r. When replacing a BA 7 coil it will therefore be necessary to
replace t he existing connector on t he high tension lead with the push-in t ype
of connector which is supplied with the 16 P 6 coil.
PROCEDURE:
After fi tting the 16 P 6 ignition coil and connecti ng the low tension cables ,
p 1~oceed as fo Hows : -
1. Remove and disca r d the washer and screwed connector from the H.T.
lead.
2. Cut the length of bared H. T. wire, so t hat i t is flush with the

lead, and fit the rubber cover.
3. Push the connector up the centre of the H.T. lead as shown i n Figure
1A.
4. Push the lead into the coil H.T. s ocket until the connector clicks
i ~to the s ocket groove.
5. Pull t he rubber cover over the coil chimney as shown in Figure 18.
Continued .••
i ·· RoJ:s · Ro yr,~ : !motP.rt 19 70

Ro//<; Royce Silver Shadow fl Bentloy 1 Swes Service Bulletin
SECTtON M
Circulation - All Distributors B:JI l.c ti II No. SY/M36

and Retailers
Date: SIH'.Ct No. 2
1. 9. 70
,,....
\~.
B
A
t·.
L 816
Figure l Lucas 16 P6 Ignition Coil.
A. Push H.T. cable down into coil rl.T. extension.

B. Pull cover down over coil H.T. extension.
1. connector pushed into centre of H.T. lead.
LOW TENSION CO"lNECTORS
Coil Tenninal Cable Destination
+ WlG-P Coil Suppressor

+ W/G-P Ballast resistor
N-C Contact breaker
BP/ECk
i· Rolls- Royrn Limited 1970
flolls-f/oyce Stiver Sl1adow fJ Benrley T Series Service Bulletin
SECTION M
an-:! Retailers Bulletin No. SY/M37
Date: 20.11.70 Sheet No.
C.A.TF,GORY C
TifE IGNITION SWITCH
APPLIO\BLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley 'T' Series cars

produced from Car Serial Number 9000.
DESCRIPTION
The ignition switches fitted to the above cars are equipped

w.ith a device which prevents the key from being turned to the tlockt
position until the gear selector lever has been moved to the 'park'
po3ition; in the t1ock 1 position the key can be withdrawn from the
switchbox.
LU
C The device includes a solenoid which is operated by a switch
i, the transmission actuator. Although the solenoid operates very
quickly when energised, it may be possible to mechanically lock the
solenoid before it had time to operate, if the ignition key is turned
v~ry rapidly. In the event of a customer complaint concerning key
withdrawal, it should first be demonstrated that the key must be
operated at a nonn~l speed, particularly if it is suspected that
the battery voltage is low.
The solenoid is designed to operate at all nonnal battery

vultages, but it is possible that a battery which is completely
f:l.::1t will not have sufficient energy to operate the solenoid. In
the event of the battery being unable to operate the solenoid, an
unsuccessful attempt to start the car would then mean that the
ignition key could not be withdrawn from the switchbox and if the
boot were locked there would be no means of access to the battery,
unless a master key were available.
This Service Bulletin gives the correct procedure to adopt

in such a situation, using a 'slave' battery to energise the solenoid
thus permitting withdrawal of the key.
Continued •••
BP/F.ck
flolls-flayce Silver Shadow 5 Bentley TSeries Service Bulletin
-------
SECTION M
Bulletin No. SY/M37
Date : 13.11.70 Sheet No. 2
- 2 -
PROCEDURE
1. Ensure that the gear selector lever is in t he 'park' position

and the handbrake finnly applied .
2. Turn t he ignition key to the 'off' position.
3. L~Ner the fu seboa rd.
4. Connect t he Negative lead of a 'slave' 12 Volt battery to a

clean earth point such as the kick-down stop situated beneath
the accelerator pedal.
"O 5. Using a suitable length of cable fi tted with a 10 amp. fuse,

C
"' connect the Po:'litivc.' lead of the 'slave' battery to the left-hand
oi
C
w
end of the instrument and facia lamp fuse (fuse number eight).
.S T.' te location of this fus e is shown on the fuseboard identification
-0
Q) panel.
c
ct Note: It is of the utmost importance that the correct battery
polarity i s observed. Otherwise severe damage to the
electrical system will occur.
6. The ignition switch solenoid will noN be energised allowing the

ignition key to be turned to the 'lock' position, and then
withdrawn.
1 1
7. Disconnect t he slave battery and close the fuseboard.
BP/F.ck
Rolls-Royce S1lve1 Shadow fl Bentley TSeries Service Bulletin
SECTION M
Circulation - All Distributors and Bulletin No. SY/M38
Retailers
Dote: 12.11.10 Sheet No.
CATEGORY C
'IHE LUCAS 35D8 DISTRIBUTOR CAP
APPLICABLE 'I'O:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley 'T' Series motor cars
from Car Serial Number 8742 onwards.
DESCRIPTION
--------
Should the distributor cap on the Lucas 35D8 Distributor be
disturbed for any reason, it is most important to no~e the following
points when fitting the cap to the distributor.
I• First ensure that the carbon brush is located positively in

the cap. This is achieved by pushing the carbon brush dom1 the
hole in the cap with a thin piece of wood until the spr_ing
be:::anes 'coil-bound', then gently releasing it.
2. Hold the cap down finIJly and squarely on the distributor while
fastening th-e clips.
BP/JC
Rolls-Royce Sliver Shadow ft Bentley TSeries Service Bulletin
SECTION
Circulation - All Distributors Bulletin No. S'{/M39
and r ~tallers
Date: 10/12/70 Sheet No. 1
CA.TEOORY C
11-IE ELECTRICAL CENTRALISED DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM.
APPLIO\BLE TO:
All Rolls~oyce Silver Shadow and Bentl ey T Series produ ced from Car Serial
Number SRH 8741 •
DESCRIPTION.
All cars are now equipped with an electrical centralised door locking
system and this Service Bulletin is issued to give a brief description of
'O
C:
the components used, the principle of oper(J tion and a f ,,ul t diagnosis cha rt.
(l)
0,
C
w The system is an electrical circuit capable of locking all of the
C:
"Cl
doors by the operation of .i control swi tch fitted to each of the front doors,
a,
ilTDllediately above the a rm rests .
.S
ct
The control switches are connected to electrical solenoids , one of
which is mounted adjacent to each door lock mechanism. The sol enoids
contain twin electricul windings and are therefore doubl e acting which mea ns
that the s ol enoid unna ture is capable of being extended or retra cted
depending on which winding is ener gised by the control switch.
The anna tu res are mechani ca lly linked to the door lock operating rod
such tha t movement of the armature will cause the door to be loc ked or
unlocked .
As the wi ndings of the solenoids a re designed for intenni ttent

operation they a re pro tected from elec t rical overload by a thennal cut-out
switch identical to that used in the electric gearchange circuit. The
thermal switch for th~ door locking sys t em is mounted on the inside forward
s urface of the glove box situated immediately in front of the fr ont passenger's
knees.
In the event of one of the control switches being held in the 'ON'
position or if a solenoid winding ciraws too 1TRJCh current, the the rmal switch
will cut-out before damage to the winding occurs . To reset the thenna l switch
it will be necessary to depres s the red button on the top of the switch.
If the t hermal s witch cuts out agdn the cause should be inves tigated.
BP/ ECk Continued •••

Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow fl Bentley T Series Service Bulletin
SECTION
Circulation - All Distributors Bulletin No. SY/M39
und retailers
Date: l 0/1 2/70 Sheet No. 2
The following chart antlcip&tes problens which could be experienced

with the centralised door locking system.
CENTRALISED DOOR LOCKING FAULT FINDING DIAGNOSIS
SYMP'I'CN CAUSE ACTION
1. System 1. Thermal switch 1• Depress the red button

Inoperative has cut out. on the switch. If the
switch cuts out again
check for a sticking
switch or a solenoid
drawing too rrn.Jch current.
2. •• 2. One control 2. Locate and remove the

switch is switch, free off or renew
stuck in 00 if necessary.
position
3. One solenoid 3. Solenoid armature 3. Remove the solenoid and

not stuck in position check for surface
operating. corrosion of the annature.
Also ensure that the
armature is not jamming
at the extremities of
its travel.
4. 11 4. Solenoid 4. Examine the linkage for

linkage signs of janrrn.ing which
mechanically may be caused by the
janmed. linkage having insuffient
clearances to tolerate
the movements of the
annature.
BP/F.Ck
Rolls-Royce fl Bentley Motor Cats Service Bulletin
Service B.ulletin issued for
Circulation All Distributors Section M
and Retailers Bulletin No SY;M40
Page No 1
Date 11-.5.71
(ISSUE 3)
CATEGORY C
Tl!E J.G\ITLG\, ('()NT\CT BRF,\t,JJ{ POI\JTS
APPLICABLE TO:
AJ.l Rol.ls~oyce Silver Slt:i<Jo:1, L,;-;1L.ic_, T S('rir:s ,ind R0lb---R0_y,::e :;,;;I

Bentley Corniche motor cars rron, Car Serinl !\umber 871-2 on\',._irds.
~SCRIPT ION:
S.ince the introduc Lion of ,.he Luc;:is 35 D8 distributor a number of

complaints of engine misfiring, lack of power, poor starting and others
associated with the distributor have been recc.ivcd.
It has been found that these complaints have arisen as a result

"O
of a change to the distributors breathing.
C
«>
en
C A new type of distribut.or incorporating a number of changes is
l1J
now being fitted to engines on Lhc mot.or car production line.
They incJude the followi.ng:
The design of the distributor cap has been revised to incorporate

eight breathing slols L.O .i.rn1.ffove air circulation, the distributor
contact breaker points are increased in area and for a more uniform
spark at high engine speed a baJanced rotor ann is fitted.
A service kit of this material will be available and whenever

a complaint is received on any of tJ1e motor cars, listed under
1
APPLICABLE ro• whose cause is attril.lutaf.>le to rapid wear of the
distributor contact points heel, or burning of the distributor points
faces, then the following procedure should be followed:
PROCElX.J'RE:
1) Remove the distributor cap, rotor ann and contact breaker points.
2) t:sing a lint-free, paraffin soaked cloth clean the distrihutor

cam surface.
3) Inspect the surface of the cam and if necessary use some mHdly
abrasive material 'LO polish it and remove any scratches or other
damage that may be present.
4) Smear the cam with Mi<ilanos Silicones No.4 or Rel.inex A grease.
Continued •••
~ Rolls-Royce Limited 1971

and Retailers Bulletin No SY,/M40
Page No 2
Date 14. s. 71
(ISSUE 3)
5) Fit the new contact breaker points.
6) If there has been a complaint of high engine speed misfires then

fit the balanced rotor arm. Otherwise fit the original rotor
ann.
7) Remove the plug leads from the distributor cap noting their
correct positions.
8) Fit the plug leads into the new eight slot distributor cap in
the correct positions.
9) Fit the cap to the distributor.
10) Check and set as necessary the engine timing and the dwell angle
of the points.
-NOTE a) The engine timing should be 3° B.T D.C. at 800 rJlll.

b) The dwell angle should be 26 - 280
M'\TERIAL REQUIRE[) PART NUMBER
1) Distributor cap (eight slot) CD.5625

2) Balanced rotor ann as necessary Cl).5626
3) Contact breaker set (chargeable) Cl). 5627
TIME ALLOWED 0.50 hrs
This Service Bulletin supersedes Service Bulletins SY;M40 and SY/M40

(ISSUE 2). Therefore they should be removed and destroyed and
SY/M40 (ISSUE 3) inserted.
Arr/JC!
I
-' (el Rolls-Rovce Limited 1971
Rolls-Royce lJ Bentley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributors and Retailers Section M
Bulletin No SY;M.41
Page No 1 of 2
Date 29. 7. 71
CATE(})RY C
WASH/WIPE SYSTEM
APPLICABLE TO:
AU Rolls..;.Royce Silver Shadow and Corniche cars, and all Bentley T

Serles and Corniche cars produced after Car Serial Numbers:
Standard SRX 10236-10355, SRJI 10390, SRH 10392,
SRH 10303. SRH 10304, SRH 10305, SRH 10306,
SRH 10307. SRX 10308, SRH 10309, SRH 10400,
SRX 10401. SRH 10402, SRH 10403, SRH 10405,
SRH 10407, SRX 104-23 and onwards.
Coachbuilt DUI 10376, CRX 10406, DRH 10416 and onwards.
Long Wheelbase LRH 10410/11/12/13/14
DESCRIPTION
A Lucas Wash/Wipe system is now fitted to all cars. This device

consists of a transistorised delay unit which is coJU1ected into the
existing wiper motor circuit. This delay circuit will operate the
wiper motor and the washer motor for as long as the washer switch
is depressed. On releasing the switch the washers will cease to
function while the wiper motor will continue operating for some
six seconds. This allows the windscreen to be washed and dried
by a single operation of the wiper/washer switch.
The wash/wipe control is built into a black plastic housing,

w'nich is fitted imnediately behind the wiper switch. Access to the
control unit can be gained by removing the top roll.
A theoretical wiring diagram of the wash/wipe system is shown

ii'\ Figure 1.
NOTE: It should be noted that the control unit contains

a transistor which can be damaged beyond repair
by high voltages or incorrect connections.
Continued •••
..,. ~ Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971

Ro/ls-Royce fJ Bentley Motor Cars Ser11ice Bulletin
Circulation All Dis tributors and Retailers Section M
Bulletin No SY/M41
Page No 2 of 2
Date 29. 7. 71
B G
L
1
·11111
GIB
N/G
1 2
U/G
p
3 4
P/G
(.!:)
i:, '-
z
C
"'
a, RIG co <.'.)
C
w ........
o~6
(.'.J
,!:
YIG
. -
"O
G)
·=
i:t I
I
7
1
~
I WIG
3 '
'
PIG
M192
Fig. 1 Theoretical Wiring Diagram of Wash/Wi pe system fitted

to pennanent magnet wiper motor (Lucas 16W) circuit
1 Wiper switch 5 Park switch

2 Washe r switch 6 Wiper motor
3 was her motor 7 Control unit
4 Fuse 2
Arr/JCl/ECk
.... () Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971
Bulletin No SY;M42
Page No 1 of 2
Date 27. 7 • 71
RADIO RECEIVERS
APPLICABLE TO:
AU Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow, Bentley T Series and Rolls-Royce and Bentley
Corniche Motor Cars.
DESCRIPTION
With the increasing number of FM radio sets which are being fitted
to the above motor cars, a number of complaints have been received
concerning poor reception and interference.
This Service Bulletin has been issued to advise that poor

reception and interference can be and often is caused by factors other
than the radio receiver or the electrical installation of the car.
In addition these factors cannot be altered or influenced by any
corrective work.
The MVFM radios and AM/FM stereo radio receivers have advantages
and limitations that must be explained to owners who are not familiar
with the operations of FM units.
The frequencies at which FM stations operate create much

shorter wave lengths than those produced in AM broadcasting. Unlike
AM signals? FM signals do not 'bend around' the horizon. This limits
the distance at which FM signals can be received and the dependable
range of FM reception in a motor car is a radius of approximately
twenty miles from the transmitting antenna.
When the FM radio receiver moves out of range of the FM

transmitter, it enters what is referred to as the 1 fringe area'.
In the fringe area, the strength of the FM signal may vary rapidly,
causing a 'flutter' or a series of noise bursts as the car moves
between high and low level signal points.
A second effect found in the fringe area is the presence of

ignition interference from adjacent vehicles. In both instances,
L, may be possible to improve reception by re-tuning - however,
it may be necessary to change to a different station, i f reception
still is not good.
Continued •••
...,~
..J• © Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971
Bulletin No SY/M42
Page No2 or 2
Date 27. 7. 71
Re-tuning should be necessary only in those few instances

when reception becomes slightly noisy while driving through areas
such as the centre of a large city and a weak signal is being
received from a station located away from the centre of the city.
The interference can be reduced by adjusting the tone control to
give more bass and by adjusting the balance control such that more
output is gained from the rear speaker.
While these adjustments will slightly diminish stereo
effect on cars so equipped, they will substantially reduce
background noise interference.
An FM radio installation therefore has advantages and
limitations and these limitations should be considered before
deciding what action should be taken in the event of customer
complaint.
Acr/JCl/ECk

Rolls-Royce & Bentll'y Morar Cars Service Bulletin
and Retailers Bulletin No SY,IM43
Page No 1
CATF.GORY C Date 2i .4., 71.
WI PER ID'IDRS
1PPLICABLE TO:
All Corniche, Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars.
DESCRI PT!ON:
A number of. 16W wiper motors have recently been removed from cars in service
following complaints that after switching the wiper motor 'ONt during the
initial few wiper arm strokes the wiper blades strike the windscreen
surround at the end of each wiping stroke.
This condition is caused by-excessive friction within the anti-

streak mechanism of the wiper motor. As the anti-streak mechanism is an
assembly held together by rivets it is not possible to open the anti-streak
device to correct this condition.
However, it is possible to overcome this extra fricU.on by

increasing the force applied by the spring to the wave washer of the
anti-streak mechanism. This is achieved by fitting a packing piece between
the top of the spring and the existing washer as shown in Figure 1.
In the event of a customer complaint of the wiper blades striking

the windscreen surroundJa packing washer should be fitted to the mechanism
as described in this Service Bulletin.
PROCEOORE
1. Remove the plastic cover from the wiper motor.
NOTE: Do not remove the metal cover, for if the motor is

operated with this cover removed severe damage to
the parking mechanism and rack will occur.
2. Remove the circlip from the top of the crankpin.
3. Fit the packing washer underneath the existing washer.

4. Fit the circlip to the crankpin.
5. Fit the plastic cover to the wiper motor.
Continued •••
~ Rolls-Royce Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce fl Benrley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
and Retailers Bulletin No SY/M43
PageNo 2
Date 27 .4. 71 •
3 4 6
'· '·
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"O
C
<'O
i5>
C
w
I
I
C
"O
!!l
.5
a:
I
9 8 7 M299
Fig. 1 - Position of spacer
1. Wave washer 6. Friction plate

2. Spring 7. Dish washer
3. New spacer (RH.8473) 8. Gear
4. Existing flat washer 9. Connecting rod
s. Circlip
,f'\ R"lls-Rnvr:P. I imi1P.ci 1971

Rol/s-RuytP. fl 8enrky 1vlorr.! l"Jrs Service Bulletin
Page No 3
Date 21 .4. 71.
1'0TAL TIME ALLOOED
0.25 hours
P.!\.RTS Rf.QUI REIJ
DESCR I PTI 0:-.I l-',\RT Nl::\IBER :"IL'MBER REQl 'IR El>
Pac.king Washer RH. 8473
Arr/JCl/OCk

Rolls-Royce fl Benrley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Service Bulletin issued for Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series
Page No 1
Date 28/6/71
CATEOORY C
ALTERNA.'IOR CONNECTIONS
APPLICABLE TO
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars, and
Rolls-Royce and Bentley Corniche cars.
DESCRIPTION
In the event of it being necessary to remove or disturb an alternator

on a car in service, it is imperative that when re~king the various
electrical connections, that they are connectc!d to the correct alternator
terminals and are correctly routed to remove the risk of short circuits
C: occur.ing.
Particular attention should be paid to the fitting and routing
of the alternator earth strap. Should this be incorrectly routed it
is possible that a short circuit ~ay occur with the alternator output
tenninal, which would cause damage to the electrical system.
When re-fitting an alternator, therefore, ensure that all
connections are fitted correctly and that the earth strap is routed
as shown in Figure 1.
Continued •••
© Aolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce fl Bentley Moro, Cats Service Bulletin
Service Bulletin issued for Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series
Page No 2
Date 28/6/71
I
I
II
I
I~
.-·
,,/
/
M 364
Fig.1 Position of alternator earth strap

Inset A - Terminal connection
© Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce fJ Bentley Mocor Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributors & Retailers other than Section M

U.S.A., Canada and Japan. Bulletin No SY/M45
Page No 1 of 2
Date 13. 7. 7l
CATOOORY C
1HE LUCAS 35 D8 IGNITION DISTRIBUTOR
APPLICABLE 'ID:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow, Bentley T series and Rolls-Royce and

Bentley Corniche motor cars:
Four door SRH 11188, SRH 11197, SRH 11191, SRH 11198,
S.aloons SRH 11192, SRH 11202, SRX 11196, SRH 11203,
SRH 11204, SRH 11219, SRH 11212, SRH 11224,
SRH 11213, SRX 11235 and all subsequent cars.
Corniche CRH 11236, DRH 11240~ DRH 11237, CRH 11241,

CRX 11238, DRX. 11242, DRX 11239, CRX. 11253,
DRX 11210 and all subsequent cars.
-0
C: Long Wheelbase L.RX 11246, LRX 11284, LRH 11285, LRX 11286,
"'
O>
C
Saloons LRH 11287, LRH 11288, LRH 11289, LRH 11338
1.U
C:
and all subsequent cars.
""
41
·E
~ DESCRIPTION
The specification of the ignition distributor fitted to the motor

cars listed under 'APPLICABLE TO' has been changed. The new
distributor is equipped with a cap having eight breather slots, a
cam lubricating pad and two breather holes in the distributor body.
Other differences are that the point size of the ignition

contact breaker point has been increased, and the distributor is
now fitted with a balanced rotor arm.
The function of the cam lubricating pad ls to ensure that
the thin film of lubricant on the cam is maintained, and the
existing servicing recommended action of lightly smearing the cam
with an approved grease at the 12 000 miles (20 (X)() km.) 12 months
Service Schedule should be followed.
Midland Silicones .M.54 or Shell Retinax A grease are approved
for this application.
Continued •••
© Rolls-Royce Motors limited 1971

Ro/ls-Royce fl Bentley Motot Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributors & Retailers other than Section M

u.s.A.t Canada and Japan. Bulletin No SY;M45
Page No · 2 of 2
Date 13. 7. 71
NOTE It is important when adjusting the dwell angle that

the final setting is approached from a higher setting
of more than 32°, and not from a setting below that
specified of 26° - 28°. This is to ensure that
any back-lash in the adjusting mechanism is taken
up, thereby preventing it from causing variations
in the setting as the car is used.
'O
C
a"'C
w
,,.5
..s
G>
0:.
Arr/JCl/a::k

Circulation All Distributors & Retailers - Section M

U.S.A., Canada and Japan only. Bulletin No SY/M46
Page No 1 of 1
Date 13. 7. 71
CATEGORY C
THE LUCA.S 35 D8 IGNITION DISTRIBUTOR
APPLICABLE 'I'O:
All Rolls~oyce Silver Shadow, Bentley T series and Rolls~oyce and

Bentley Corniche motor cars:
Four door SRH 11188, SRH 11197, SRH 11191, SRH 11198,
Saloons SRJI 11192, SRH 11202, SRX 11196, SRH 11203,
SRH 11204, SRH 11219, SRH 11212, SRH 11224,
SRH 11213, SRX 11235 and all subsequent cars.
Corniche CRH 11236, DRH 11 240, DRH 11 237 , CRH 11241,

CRX 11238, DRX 11242, DRX 11239, CRX 11253,
DRX 11210 and all subsequent cars.
""O
C:
~ Long Wheelbase LRX 11246, LRX 11284, LRH 11285, LRX 11286,
C)
C:
I.LI
Saloons LRH 11287, LRH 11288, LRH 11289, LRH 11338
.S and all subsequent cars •
,:,
2-
C
·;:: DESCRIPTION
~
The specification of the ignition distributor fitted to the motor

cars listed under 'APPLICABLE TO' has been changed. The new
distributor is equipped with a cap having eight breather slots, a
cam lubricating pad and two breather holes in the distributor body.
Other differences are that the point size of the ignition contact
breaker points has been increased, and the distributor is now fitted
with a balanced rotor ann.
NOTE It is important when adjusting the dwell angle that

the final setting is approached from a higher setting
of more than 32°, and not from a setting below that
specified of 26° - 28°. This is to ensure that
any back-lash in the adjusting mechanism is taken
up, thereby preventing it from causing variations
in the setting as the car is used.
Arr/JCl/ock
-~...
..,. ~ Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971
Ro/ls-Royce fl Remley Motor Cars Ssrvics Bullstin
and Retailers Bulletin No SY/M4 7
Page No 1 of 2
Date 23. 9. 71
CATEGORY C
ICNITION TIMING
APPLICABLE ro
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Ben tley T Series, and Rolls -Royce
and Bent ley Con1iche cars after Car Serial Number SRH 8742 except
cars in or dest ined for North America and Canada.
DESCRIPTION
The present long stroke engine i s only available with a 9: 1 compression

ratio. In many overseas countries the octane value of the best fuel
available l s too low for 9 : l compression ratio at t he standard
ignition timi ng setting of T.D.C. (static) or s0 B.T.D.C. (at 800 r.p.m.).
It has been found that when an engine is run on fu el of a lower

ostane ra ting than 100 (R.O.N.) a t t he standard ignition timing of
5 B.T.D.C • . (at 800 r.p.m.) detonation may occur which can r esult in
irrepa irable engine damage.
It is mos t .important in the event of a compl ai nt of 'pinking'

(the result of de t onation ) t hat the timing be checked and res et as
necessary in a ccordance with t he following table.
CAR SERIAL FUEL OCTANE IGNITION , I GNITION

NUMBFJl AATING TIMING TIMING
(R.O.N.) SETIING SETIING
STATIC AT 800 r.~.rn.
SRH 8742 99 and above T.D.C. 5() B.T.D.C.

onwards
SRH 8742 97 - 99 1' A.T.o.c. T.D.C.

,onwards
94 - 96
0
7 A.T.D.C. 20 A.T.o.c.
Coatinued •••
·• (C) Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971

Ro/ls-Royce 6 Bentley Motor Cars S•nne• Bullstin
PageNo2 or 2
Date 23.9. 71
NOTE AU cars in \!orth Ai11cr lea and Canada must have the
0
ignition timing sP.t to s B"T.D.C. at 800 r.p.m.
with the vacuum retard disconne·cted. The use of
a,y other sP.tt.ings may alter the composition
of the exhaust gases which could result in the
vehicle not meeting the Federal Exhaust Emission
Requirements.
Arr/JCl/Hl,y
·I """" - ,. ..... • ........ - ... - · - .J """"'"

PageNo 1 of 3
Date 16. 9. 7l
CATEGORY C
CHANGES TO THE ELOCTRIO\L SP&'!IFICATION
APPLICABLE TO
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series, and all Rolls-
Royce and Bentley Corniche cars produced after the following car
serial numbers:
Four door saloon sruc. 11882 and onwards
Long Wheelbase cars LRH 11867 and onwards
Corniche cars CRH 11878 and onwards but including
CBX. 11837
DESCRIPT!CN
A number of the electrical features on cars produced after the above

car serial numbers have been changed. The purpose of this Service
Bulletin is to advise of the changes 'Which are likely to affect
service persolUlel.
Thennal Switch' Integration
The therrrel switches which protect the Gearchange Actuator, the

Headlamp Circuit, and the Centralised Door Locking mechanism have
been incorporated in a single housing which is plugged into the
printed circuit fuse board. The housing has a single red reset
button 'Which,when depressed, is capable of resetting two of the
switches. The third switch, being in the headlamp circuit,
is of the automatic reset type as on previous cars.
Engine Temperature Warning

These cars are now equipped with a device 'Which will indicate when
the temperature of the cylinder head metal is approaching a critical
level. The warning is activated by a sensing unit 'Which is mounted
on the right-hand cylinder head ('A 1 bank) adjacent to the exhaust
manifolding.
When activated the sensing unit causes a relay to 'buzz'

and the coolant lamp is illuminated.
The operation of the 'buzzer' can be tested by pressing the

warning lamp test button.
Continued •••
·I_,, CO Rolls-Rovce Motors Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce fl 8entley Mow Cars Service Bulletin
Page No 2 of 3
Date 16. 9. 71
Wash;W i.pe i.lev ice Con L!:v1 Sw.U..cil
The switching arrangement for the washer motor and wiper motor has been
revised.
The rotary switch on the instrument board is now used to

control the nonna.l operation of the wiper motor only.
A frutehr switch has been incorporated into the end of the

direction indicator switch on the steering column. This switch,
when operated by depressing the end button, will activate the
waslywipe sequence, or if the wipers are already in use, will
activate the windscreen washer motor.
By activating the wastywipe sequence, the washer and wiper

motors will operate for as long as the switch is depressed.. On
releasing the switch, the washer motor will stop and the wiper
motor will continue for some four strokes before stopping.
Thus the windscreen can be washedt cleaned and dried without
removing the hands fran the steering wheel.
-0
r:::
~
Cl
C
w
Side Marker Lamps
C
-0 The circuit which controls the side marker lamps, fitted to the
. -~$ front and rear wings, have been changed such that these lamps
a: are illwninated whenever the lighting switch is turned to the
'Park' position (with the split parking switch 9 if fitted, in
the central position)~
Air Conditioning System
Alterations have been made to the air conditioning circuit which

results in the following improvements:
1. The upper quantity flap can be activatedr by withdrawing

the control knob, when the Upper Switch is rotated to
the first fridge position ..
This means that air which has been slightly cooled can
be passed over the screen, the flow of air depending upon
the amount of boost provided by the blower motors.
2. The circuitry of the Lower Switch has been altered such that
the lower quantity flap is autanatically closed whenever the
Upper Switch is rotated to the 'full fridge' position.
This ensures that when the full fridge effect is required,
all air entering the saloon will have passed through the
fridge evaporator and will not by-pass the system by
passing through the lower quantity flap~
Continued •••
© Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce 8 Bentley Motor .Cars Service Bulletin
Page No 5 of 3
Date 16. 9. 71
Air Conditioning Unit - Diodes

The diodes which are a part of the air conditioning unit circuit
and are fitted to the fuse board, have been increased in electrical
rating. Whilst the new diodes can be used for all replacement
purposes, the older type of diode must not be used to replace a
diode of the higher rating.
Rad_io S eea.kers
The fonner practise of connecting one of the radio output leads,

and one of the speaker leads, directly to a convenient earth
point has been discontinued in favour of using a separate insulated
earth return system.
Ce:-itralised Door Locking Swi t.ch

This assembly has been simplified and now consists of two switches
as opposed to the four micro-switches of the earlier type.
Hazard Warning Device

The flasher unit which is mounted on the fuse board is no longer
corrmon to both the direction indicators and the hazard warning
system. There is now a separate unit which operates the hazard
warning system and this is mounted on a spring clip on the
instrument board bracket imnediately above the handbrake barrel.
Arr/JCl/F.ck
CHAPTER N
POWER ASSISTED STEERING
No. SY/N6
Cjrculation - All Distributors
CONFIDENTIAL and Retailers
CATEGORY A
STEERING MECHANISM
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley 'T' Series cars built prior to the
chassis numbers listed below:-
Standard cars:- SRH 5512

Coachbuilt Coupe and Drophead Cars:- CRH 6685
Cars built to the North American Federal
Safety Standards:- SRX 6665
DESCRIPTI<l',l
Recent experience has shown that under exceptional overload conditions a

situation may arise that can cause the side steering lever securing setscrews
to relax their torque tightness.
It is a policy of the Rolls-Royce Company to cater for the exceptional
circumstance, and a decision has been made to modify all Silver Shadow and 'T'
Series cars in service.
No immediate danger is involved, but retrospective action is essential

to prevent the possibility of a dangerous situation developing after a
considerable length of time.
The modification consists of a stainless steel lock plate fitted under
the heads of the two setscrews as shown in Fig. 1.
The modification is to be carried out on a Category 'A' recall basis
and it is the responsibility of .. the Distributor or Retailer to contact each
owner of a 'T' series car in his territory to arrange a suitable progranme to
modify all those cars.
The new lock plates will be supplied direct to each Distributor or

Retailer in sufficient quantities to cover the cars in his territory.
All cars produced after the chassis numbers previously listed will be
fitted with lock plates before leaving the factory.
Continued •••
CHAPTER
S.3/BP 12.3.69 N
- 2 - No. SY/Nb
Fig.1 Lockplate in fitted position
SB/BP 12.3.69 CHAPTER N

-
ROLLS-ROYCE. SILVER SHADOW

AND BENTLEY T SERIES ·S ERVICE BULLETIN
- 3 -
REPORTING
The pink card supplied with each set of lock plates should be completed and
returned to:
TECHNICAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT ,
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED,
P)'M'S IANE,
CREWE, CHESHIRE.
Any communications concerning the campaign should be addressed to the
Service Pranotion Manager at the Crewe factory.
PROCEDURE
It is recorranended that this operation be carried out on the floor with the
front of the car raised and supported by jacks.
This procedure applies to both the L.H. and R.H. side steering lever.
1• Remove the front road Mteels.
2. Remove the two l4 UNF setscrews which secure the brake pipe support
bracket to the side steering lever.
3. Ranove the side steering lever securing setscrews.
4. Slide the side steering lever forward and away fran the stub-axle.
5. Cleaning - Using a wire brush and emery cloth clean the following
mounting faces:-
5.1 The two spot faces on the stub-axle against which the side
steering lever is clamped.
- 5.2 The mounting faces on both sides of the side steering lever.
When f iniehed these·· faces should be free frcm rust, paint,
grease and burrs.
5.3 Clean the threads and under the heads of the original
setscrews ma.king sure that these are clean and dry when
finished.
5.4 Clean the threaded holes into which the setscrews are fitted
ensuring that they a r e free from grease or any other
contamination.
Continued •.•
CHAPTER N
SB/BP 12.3.69
-4- No.sY/r-J.fe
This can be achieved by first cleaning the threads with a cloth

and then by screwing the setscrew in and out a number of times
thoroughly cleaning the setscrew threads a~er each operation.
It is most .important to note that this cleaning operation is
done by mechanical means as described, and not by washing or
spraying with a cleaning fluid since the hub bearing seals
are located im:nediately behind the holes.
Fig.2 Lock tabs - Pre-bent

(Shaded area to renain flat)
6. Refit the side steering lever using the original setscrews and one of
the lock plates provided~
To facilitate the tabbing operation the end of the tabs may be
bent ·upwards slightly before fitt.ing as shown in figure 2. As ·shown
in the diagram,only the ~g.s of the tabs should be- bent upwards and it
is important to note.that the shaded area shottld remain flat.
Torque tighten the setscrews to the following figures:-
9/16 in. A/_F Setscrew 30-35 lb.~. (4.15-~.s kg.m.)
3/4 in. A/F ·Setscrew 60-65 lb.ft. (8.3-9.0 kg.m.)
Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, 'ENGLAND

- 5 -
lN(DRRF.CT
Fig.3 Method of locking tab
7. Bend up the three tabs at each end of the lock plate. Bend up the
locking strip nearest to a full flat first and then bend up the remaining
two tabs as shown in figure·· 1. It is permissible to form the tabs
around the con1.ers of the hexagon, but it should be noted that in these
cases the tab should be clear at the corners of the hexagon but in full
face contact alongside each of the flats. The tab should 1n all cases
be flush with the head of the setscrew as shown in figure 3,
8. Refit the brake pipe support bracket.
9. Refit the road wheels.
Continued •••
SB/BP CHAPTER
12.3.69 N
AND BENTLEY T SERIES ··SERV·ICE BULLETIN
- 6 -
.MATERIAL REQUIRED
PART NO. DESCRIPTICl\l
UR 16355 Lock Plate .2 per car
TIME ALLCMEI>
1 hour.

Rolls-Royce {J Bentley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributors and Section N
Retailers Bulletin No SY/N8
Page No ·1
Date 8.9. 71
CATEG(RY C
1HE STEERJNG MECHANIS\f
APPLia\BLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Corniche cars, and all Bentley
T Series and Corniche cars as listed below:
Left-hand drive cars
All Four door saloons from Car Serial Number~ 11215.

Al 1 Long Wheelbase cars from Car Serial Ntunber LRX 11 290.
All Corniche cars from Car Serial Number IRX 11277, but including
IlUI 11210.
Right-hand drive cars
All Four door saloons from Car Serial Nwnber SRH 11501.
All Long Wheelbase cars from Car Serial Number LRH 11551, but
including LRH 115 35, LRH 11548 and LRH 11 549.
All Corniche 2-door saloons frmn Car serial Ntunber CRH 11596, but
including am 11434 and CRH 11573.
All Corniche Convertible cars from Car Serial Nwnber tJU! 11597,
but including IIUJ 11570.
DESCRIPTI~
The steering boxes fitted to cars produced after the above car
Serial Nwnbers are of a higher ratio than the previous boxes. This
change in ratio means that the steering wheel movement from lock-to-lock
is reduced from 3.5 turns to 3.2 turns.
The new steering box can be identified by the shoulder which is

fonned on the outside of the box housing adjacent to the front end.
Earlier boxes did not have this shoulder.
The higher ratio steering box is used in conjunction with a

steering pwnp having an increased output pressure and the new box is
also fitted with a new shape pendulum lever. To cope with the jncrease
in pump pressure a new hydraulic hose is used.
It should be noted that the old and new steering pumps, steering
boxes and pendulum levers are not interchangeable. However, the new hose
can be used for all replacement purposes.
Arr/JCl/ECk
·1..,, C) Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971
CHAPTER P
TORQUE TIGHTNESS FIGURES
CHAPTER Q
EXHAUST SYSTEM
CHAPTER R
WHEELS AND TYRES
No. SY/Rl
(Re-issue)
ThJs Service Bulletin cancels
all previous Bulletins
numbered SY/R 1.
CATEGORY C
REPLACEMENT TYRES
APPLICABLE TO:

Bentley T Series
INTRODUCTION
This Service Bulletin has been re-issued to emphasise the impori:,ancf' of

fitting and balancing replacement tyres on Silver Shadow and 'T' ser.i..es c;:, 1·3.
With the sophisticated type of suspension fitted on 'T' series cari,

the balance and radial run-out of the wheel/tyre unit is very critica.1 if
smooth and vibration-free running is to be obtained. For this reason
Service Bullet in SY/R 1 was issued which adv i sect the correct fl tt j_ng procedure
utilising the 'high' spot marked on the wheel and the 'low' spot marked on
the tyre.
These instructions are still app11·cablc and Retailers and Service

Personnel should ensure that the people involved in fitt.i.ng and balancing
wheel/tyre units work to these instrucrions, This applies not only to
Retailers own employees but to the specj_alised Tyre fj_ttj_ng Agents who are
sometimes employed to fit tyres and in these cases the Retailer should make
it his responsibility to inform the Agent of the correct fitting procedure.
DESCRIPTION
Manufacturing tolerances on wheels and tyres, if accumulated, will create

sufficient radial 'run out' to cause undesirable vibrations and seriously
impair the ride characteristics of the car. Therefore, it is important that
a replacement tyre should be fitted to a wheel in such a position to ensure
that the tolerances on the wheel and tyre are not accumulated.
With thj_s object j_n view, arrangements have been made with the
manufacturers to mark the lowest point of the tyre bead with a red spot,
approximately\ in. dj_ameter, on the side wall and the hj_ghest point of the
wheel shoulder with the letter 'H' inscribed in a 5/16 in. diameter circle
stamped on the wheel inner rim as shmvn in Figure 1.
Continued •••
SECTION
SB/BP 25.1.68. R
Printed In En1l1nd
SERVICE BULLETIN
- 2 - No. SY/R1
PROCEDURE
When fitting a tyre to a wheel, the red spot on the tyre should be aligned with
the encircled Hon the inner wheel rim (see Fig.1). In addition to the red
spot, some tyres may be marked with either a green, yellc,.v or white spot but
these other markings should be ignored as they are used by the manufacturer
for inspection purposes.
Some of the early wheels and tyres will not be marked with the high
and low spots and in these cases a 'trial and error' method of fitting should
be adopted as follows.
Fig.l Wheel and tyre marking~
A WHITEWALL TYRE
B BLACKWALL TY.RE
1 RED SPC11' MARKING
2 'Ht MARK.1NG
Continued •••
ROLLS .,.ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
SB/BP 25.1.68 SECTION R

Printed In E"gland J
No·SY/Rl
(Re-issue)
\ - 3 -
Fig.2 Method of determining the high

spot on the wheel shoulder
1 HIGH SPOT
2 ACTUAL HIGH SPOT
3 HIGH SPOT
To determine the high spot on a wheel shoulder, rotate the wheel on a

balancing machine and mark the high spot with a piece of chalk; each side of
the wheel should be marked (see Fig. 2) as the high spot on one side of the
wheel may vary slightly from the high spot on the other side of the wheel.
In this case, the mean distance between the two spots should be taken as the
actual high spot (see Fig.Z).
To determine the low spot on a tyre, mount the tyre on a rim which is
known to be true and rotate it on a balancing machine.
A~er fitting a tyre to a wheel, the wheel should be balanced in the

normal manner.
BP/Eck 18.6.70 CHAPTER R

,
ROLLS~ ROYCE SJLVER SHADOW
No. SY/Rl
- 4 -
BALANCING WHEELS AND TYRES
Before removing the wheels from a car for balancing purposes, the flats
which fonn on the tyres due to standing should be ranoved by driving the car
for some ten miles. A~er this the car should be jacked up immediately, the
wheels removed and balanced in the normal manner.
If an 'on the car' wheel balancing machine is available, this should

be used to finesse the balance of the front wheels after they are again fitted
to the car. These machines enable the small amounts of rWl-out which exist
in the tyre, wheel, hub and brake disc to be virtually balanced out.
~ Spigotted road wheels are fitted to cars produced after and
including the following Car Serial NtD'llbers:
SRI-I 8387 SRX 9075 DRH 8421 LRX 9113
(Also to the front hubs only on SRX 9068 and DRX 9102.
The spigotted wheels are located to the hub by a machined centre
bore in the wheel and a machined spigot on the hubs, and it is important
tha't when balancing these wheels on a conventional balancing machine, the
wheel is located on the machine by the centre bore.
The correct procedure for this is detailed in service Bulletin SY/R22.
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMJTED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/Eck · 18.6.70 R
AND BENTLfY T SERIES SERVICE BULLETIN ·
•'
No. SY/R7
Circulation - United
Kingdom Retailers only
CATF.GORY C
DUNLOP SP 41 TYRES
APPLJ;CABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley 'T' Series cars
DESCRIPTICN
An additional tyre~ the Dunlop SP41 with radial ply construction, has been
added to the list of currently approved tyres for replacement purposes in
service. This tyre has a nwnber of advantages and disadvantages when
compared with the conventional cross-ply tyre, the main ones being as follows:
The radial tyre provides a somewhat harsher ride at slow speeds

which may induce rattles over uneven surfaces. Cornering squeal is more
apparent and tyre road noise is modified from that experienced with cross-
ply tyres ln that the higher frequencies are less prooiinent and the lower
frequencies more prominent.
The advantages offered by the radial ply tyre are an increase in tyre
life over that offered by cross-ply tyres and an improvement in straight-line
stability and handling characteristics. Steering response and self-centring
are also improved.
The details of the tyre are:-
Make Casing Material Size Sidewall Colour
Dunlop SP41 Rayon 205 X 15 Black only

Radial TL
These tyres should always be fitted in sets of four and with inner
tubes.
Continued •••
ROLLS -ROYCE LI M ITED, PYM'S LAN E , CREWE, ENGLAND
SB/BP 7.9.67. SECTION R

Printed fn England
-
AND BENTLEY T SER I ES
SERVl,CE BULLETIN .
No. SY/R7
- 2 -
Should an Owner request a set of Dunlop SP41 tyres to be fitted to his

car, he should be made aware of the disadvantages as well as the advantages,
which these tyres offer.
Tyre pressures
The tyre pressures should be as follows:
Front and rear 26 lbs/sq.in. (1 .83 Kg/sq.cm.) Set a:>LD for normal motoring
Front and rear 28 lbs/sq.in. (1 .97 Kg/sq.cm.) Set COLD for fast motoring
ROLLS ... ROYCE LI M ITED, PYM'S LANE, C REWE , E N GLAN D
SB/BP 7.9.67. SECTIO N R

Printed In Enalancl
. . .
AND BENTLEY T SERI E.S SERVICE BULLETIN"·
N°·SY/R18
and Retailers
CATEGORY C
TUBELESS TYRES
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCRIPTION
There has recently been a certain amount of discussion in the Press concerning
the advisability of fitting inner tubes to tubeless tyres and this Service
Bulletin has been issued to state the safety precautions to be observed when
fitting tubes to tubeless tyres on any of the above cars.
SAFETY PRECAUflONS
l. Tubes should not be employed if there is any damage exceeding t/16 in.
(1 ,58 mm.) in length to the internal casing of the tyre in the area of
the tyre tread.
2. The internal surface of the tyre casing and the surfaces of the road
wheel must be free from grit and foreign matter.
3. Should a request be made to fit tubes to a tubeless tyre, it must be

pointed out that in the event of a puncture the deflation will be far
more rapid than with a tubeless tyre without a tube.
It should be noted that before fitting radial ply tubeless tyres Service
Bulletin SY/R17 should be consulted.
-------------------------------------------
ROLLS-ROYCE LtMrTED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
BP/ECk 5.11.69
CHAPTE~
R
===-- -==========================
No.SY/R23
and Retailers
. CATEOORY C
CO.b,CHBUILT CAR TYRES
APPLICABLE TO:
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series coachbuilt cars:-

Car Serial Nwnbers:
CBX 9201 CRX 9234

CRH 9235 CBX 9240 and orwards
DESCRIPTION
All coachbuilt cars produced with the above Car Serial Numpers and orr.vards,
will be fitted with an anti-roll bar to the rear suspension, an increased
diameter anti-roll bar to the front suspension and equipped with radial-ply
tyres.
It is advisable that only radial-ply tyres be used for replacement

purposes on these cars.
The correct tyre pressures for the above mentioned cars ranain
unchanged and appear in the follOHing Service Bulletins:-
SY/R24 All countries except U.S.A., Canada

and tre Federal Republic of Germany
SY;R.25 U.S.A. and Canada
SY/R26 Federal Republic of Germany
f/'JI',--.,»_ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
ROLLS•ROYCE LIMtTED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
BP/ECk 8.7.70 CHAPTER R

AND BENTLEY T SERIES SER.VICE BULLETI
• • • - ~ ' _. , ..... - +
No.SY/R24
Circulation - All Territories except
u.s.A, Canada and the
Federal Republic or Germany.
O\TEGORY C
CURRENTLY APPROVED TYRES
APPLIO\BLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadmv and Bentley T Series cars.
DESCRIPTION
The follmving tyres are approved ror use on the above cars:
Casing and Size Sidewall

Construction Colour
Dunlop Roads peed RS

X Nylon-Cross Ply 8.15 X 15 Black or
White
Firestone Orb Deluxe Nylon-Cross Ply 8, 15 X 15 Black or
White
Avon Turbos peed
R/R B Nylon-Cross Ply 8.15 X 15 Black or
White
Dunlop Weathennaster Nylon-Cross Ply 8.15x15 Black
Dunlop SP41 TL Rayon-Radial Ply 205 X 15 Black or

White
Firestone F100 Rayon-Radial Ply 205 X 15 Black
Avon Radial T Rayon-Radial Ply 20S"x 15 Black
Dunlop Weathermaster Ra yon --Radial Ply 205 X 15 Black

SP44
Dunlop SP68 Rayon-Radial Ply 205 X 15 Black or
White
IMPORTANT
1. Radial ply tyres must be fitted in sets of four.
Continued •••
ROLLS~ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
BP/ECk 12.8.70 R
CHAPTER
No.
SY/R.24
- 2 -
2. When fitting radial ply tyres to the earlier type of road wheel,
inner tubes should be used, With flat ledge rim wheels, inner
tubes are not necessary. Both Wheels are described in Service
Bulletin SY/R.17.
3. Winter tyres, such as the Dunlop Weathennaster cross ply and radial
ply tyres, are not intended for continual high speed motoring and it
is recormnended that the following ma.xi.mum speeds are observed.
Tyre pressure Maximum speed
Dunlop Weathennaster- 28 lb/sq.in. (1,97 kg/sq.an.) 75 m.p.h. (120 k.p.h.)

cross ply front and rear
32 lb/sq.in. {2,25 kg/sq.cm.) 85 m.p.h. ( 156 k.p.h.)
front and rear
Dunlop Weathermaster- 28 lb/sq.in, ( 1 ,97 kg/sq.cm.) 85 m.p.h. (136 k.p.h.)

radial ply front and rear
32 lb/sq.in. (2,25 kg/sq.cm.) 95 m.p.h. (152 k.p.h.)
front and rear
Dunlop Weathennaster tyres of either type should be fitted to the

rear wheels only, or on all four wheels. Cars fitted with radial ply tyres
at the front SHOULD NOT BE FITTED WITH WEA..THERJW..STER CROSS PLY TYRES to the
rear. These tyres are also drilled to accept tyre studs. If studs are
required,Secomet P2-140are recommended. These have a protrusion from the tyre
of 1,5 rrun. - 2,0 nnn. These studs are not available from Rolls-Royce Limited, and the
local tyre dealer should therefore be consulted.
If a set of four Weathermaster tyres are fitted, it m:iy be necessary

to rBnove a small portion of the front underwing shield as described in
Service Bulletin SY/R.5.
When fitting new tyres to a car, new tyre valves should also be fitted,
and the wheels balanced as described in Service Bulletin SY/R.1 and SY/R22. It
is also important to subject new tyres to a short running-in period. It is
re.cOITUllended therefore that hard cornering or sustained speeds of over 90 m.p.h.
(145 k.p.h.) should not be undertaken for at least the first 500 miles {800 km.).
This reconrnendation does not apply to Dunlop Weathennaster tyres where the
max.imwn speeds recommended above should be noted.
Continued •••
ROLLS - ROYCE L IMITEO, PYM'S LANE , CREWE, ENGLAND

·----------·----·-----
BP/f.ck 12. 8. 70 R
CHAPTER
ROLLS·AOYCE SILVER SHADOW
AND 8ENTLEY T SERIES SER.VtCE BULLETI.
- ~.-,. + ::....-=. ~·,} ~~ f\ ...... ~ ~· .... ~. .. .
No. SY;R24.
- 3 -
It is also important -when fitting replacenent tyres, that only a tyre

fitting lubricant recommended or marketed by one of the Rolls-Royce approved
tyre manufacturers be used. Under no circumstances should the tyre be
lubricated with soft or liquid soap, since these liquids contain quantities
of caustic potash which has the effect of causing the paint to strip and
subsequently, corrosion to take place.
The correct tyre pressures for all the recommended tyres listed on
page 1, remain unchanged and are as follows:
Cars other than Long Wheelbase
26 lb/sq.in. (1,83 kg/sq.an.) Front and Rear

For continuous high speed motorway driving the
tyre pressures should be increased by 2 lb/sq.in.
(0,14 kg/sq.cm.), i.e. 28 lb/sq.in. (1 ,97 kg./sq.cm.).
Long Wheelbase Cars
1 - 3 occupants 28 lb/sq.in. (1,97 kg/sq.cm.) Front

30 lb/sq. in. ( 2, 11 kg/sq .cm.) Rear
4 - 5 occupants 28 lb/sq.in. (1 .97 kg/sq.an.) Front
32 lb/sq.in. (2,25 kg/sq.cm.) Rear
5 occupants and 28 lb/sq.in. (1,97 kg/sq.cm.) Front
luggage 34 lb/sq.in. (2,39 kg/sq.cm.) Rear
All pressures set when cold.
ROLLS·ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
BP/ECk 12.8.70 CHAPTER R

No. SY/R25
Circulation - U.S.A. and Canada
CATEGORY C
CURRENTLY APPROVED TYRF..S
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls>-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars.
DESCRIPTION
The following tyres are approved for use on the above cars:
Make ~ Casing and Size Sidewall

Construction Colour
Dunlop Roadspeed RS Nylon-Cross Ply 8.15 X 15 Black or

~ White
Firestone Orb Deluxe Nylon-Cross Ply 8.15 X 15 Black or
White
Avon Turbos peed
R/R B Nylon-Cross Ply 8.15 X 15 Black or
White
Dunlop Weathennaster Nylon-Cross ,Ply 8.15 X 15 Black
Dunlop SP41 TL Rayon-Radial Ply 205 X 15 Black or

White
Avon Radial T Rayon-Radial Ply 205 X 15 Black
Duniop Weathernaster
SP44 Rayon-Radial Ply 205 X 15 Black
White
IMPORTANT
1. Radial ply tyres must be fitted in sets of four.

Continued •••
BP/F.ck 12.8.70 R.
CHAPTER
No. SY/R25
- 2 -
inner tubes should be used. With flat ledge rim wheels , inner
tubes are not necessary. Both wheels are described in Service
Bulletin SY/R 17 •
3. Winter tyres, such as the Dunlop Weathennaster cross ply and radial
ply tyres, are not intended for continual high speed motoring and it
is recommended that the -following maximum speeds are observed.
Tyre pressure Maximum speed
Dunlop Weathermaster- 28 lb/sq.in. (1,97 kg/sq.cm.) 75 m.p.h. ( 1 20 k. p. h.)

32 lb/sq.in. (2,25 kg/sq.cm.) 85 m.p.h. (136 k.p.h.)
front and rear
Dunlop Weathennaster- 28 lb/sq.in. ( 1 , 97 kg/sq.cm.) 85 m.p.h. (136 k.p.h,)

32 lb/sq.in. (2,25 kg/sq.cm.) 95 mcp.h. (152 k.p.h,)
-front and rear
Dunlop Wea.therm.aster tyres of either type should be fitted to the rear

wheels only, or on all four wheels. Cars fitted with radial ply tyres at the
front SHOULD NOT BE FITTED WIIB WEATI-IERMASTER CROSS PLY TYRES to the rear.
These tyres are also drilled to accept tyre studs. If studs are required,
Secomet P2-140 are reconunended.These have a protrusion from the tyre of 1 ,5 rrun.-
2.0 mm. These studs are not available from Rolls-Royce Limited and the local
tyre dealer should therefore be consulted.
If a set o-r four Weathennaster tyres are fitted, it may be necessary to

remove a small portion of the front underwing shield as described in Service
Bulletin SY /R5.
and the wheels balanced as described in Service Bulletin SY/R1 and SY/R22. It
is also .llllportant to subject new tyres to a short running-in period. It is
recommended therefore that hard cornering or sustained speeds of over 90 m.p.h.
(145 k.p.h.) should not be undertaken for at least the first 500 miles (80:.l km,).
This recommendation does not apply to Dunlop Weathennaster tyres where the
maximum speeds recorrunended above should be noted.
Continued •••
1
ROLLS·ROYCE LIMITED, PVM S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER R
BP/F.Ck 12.8.70
ROl.LS·ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
. ·===============================================
NoSY/R.25.
- 3 -
It is also important when fitting replacement tyres, that only a tyre
fitting lubricant recommended or marketed by one of the Rolls-Royce approved
tyre manufacturers be used, Under no circumstances should the tyre be
lubricated with soft or liquid soap, since these liquids contain quantities
of caustic potash, which has the effect of causing the paint to strip and
subsequently, corrosion to take place.
The correct tyre pressures for all the reco1TITlended tyres listed on
page 1, remain unchanged and are as follows:
Four-door Standard Sedan
- 5 occupants 28 lb/sq.in. (1 ,97 kg/sq.cm.) Front and Rear
5 occupants and 28 lb/sq.in. (1,97 kg/sq.cm.) Front

luggage 32 lb/sq.in. (2,25 kg/sq.an.) Rear
All pressures set when cold for nonnal and

fast motoring.
Two-door Coupe and Convertible
1 - 4 occupants 28 lb/sq.in. (1 ,97 kg/sq.cm.) Front and Rear
4 occupants and 28 lb/sq.in. (1,97 kg/sq.an.) Front

luggage 32 lb/sq.in. (2,25 kg/sq.cm.) Rear
All pressure s set when cold for nonnal and

fa·st motoring.
Long Wheelbase Fonnal Sedan
l - 3 occupants 28 lb/sq. in. (1 ,97 kg/sq.an.) Front

30 lb/sq.in. { 2 , 1 1 kg/sq • an • ) Rear
4 - 5 occupants 28 lb/sq.in. { 1 ,97 kg/sq.an.) Front

5 occupants and 28 lb/sq.in. ( 1 ,97 kg/sq. an.) Front

luggage 34 lb/sq.in. {2,39 kg/sq.on.) Rear
All pressures set when cold for no.r mal and

fast motoring.
Important Only ty"res with a maximum pennissible inflation
pressure·or 36 lb/sq.in. (2,53 kg/sq.cm.) must be used.
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITEO, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
BP/OCk 12.8. 70 CHAPTER R

No. SY/R26
Circulation - Federal Republic
of Germany.
CA.TEGORY C
CURRENTLY APPROVED TYRFS
APPLICA.BLE TO:
DESCRIPTION
The following tyres are approved for use on the above cars:
~ ~ Casing: and Sidewall

Construction Colour
Dunlop Roads peed RSX Nylon-Cross Ply 8.15 X 15 Black or

White
Firestone Orb Deluxe Nylon-Cross Ply 8.15 X 15 Black or
White
Avon Turbospeed R/R B Nylon-Cross Ply 8.15 X 15 Black or
White
Dunlop Wea thennas ter_ Nylon-Cross Ply 8.15 X 15 Black
Dunlop SP41 TI. Rayon-Radial Ply "205 X 15 Black or

White
Avon Radial T Rayon -Ra dial Ply 205 X 15 Black
Dunlop Weathermaster SP44 Rayon-Radial Ply 205 X 15 Black

White
IMPORTANT
1, Radial ply tyres must be fitted in sets of four.

Continued •••
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM 's LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
BP/ECk 12 .8. 70 CHAPTER R

ANO BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE
-
BULLETI
·=-==============::::::=:::======= . . .. . .. .. . . .
No.SY/R.26
- 2 -
inner tubes should be used. With flat ledge rim wheels, inner
tubes are not necessary. Both wheels are described in Service
Bulletin SY/R.17.
3. Winter tyres, such as the DunlopWeathennaster cross ply and radial
ply tyres, are not intended for continual high speed motoring and
it is recommended that the following maximwn speeds are observed.
Tyre pressure Maxinrum speed
Dunlop Wea thermas ter- 28 lb/sq.in. (1,97 kg/sq.cm.) 75 m.p.h. ( 120 k.p.h.)
32 lb/sq.in •. (2,25 kg/sq.cm.) 85 m.p.h. ( 136 k.p.h.)
front and rear
Dunlop Weathennas ter- 28 lb/sq.in. ( 1 , 97 kg/sq .cm.) 85 m.p.h. (136 k.p.h.)

32 lb/sq.in. (2,2S kg/sq.cm.) 95 m.p.h. (152 k.p.h.)
front and rear
Dunlop Weathennaster tyres of either type should be fitted to the rear

wheels only, or on all four wheels. Cars fitted with radial ply tyres to the
front SHOULD NOT BE FITTED WITH WFATI-IERM\STER CROSS PLY TYRES to the rear.
These tyres are also drilled to accept tyre studs. If studs are required,
Secomet P2-140 are reconunended. These have a protrusion from the tyre of 1 ,5 mm. -
2,0 nm. These studs are not available fran Rolls-Royce Limited, and the local
tyre dealer should therefore be consulted.
If a set of four Weathermaster tyres are fitted, it nny be necessary to
renove a small portion of the front underwing shield as described in Service
Bulletin SY/RS.
and the v.heels balanced as described in Service Bulletin SY/R.1 and SY/R22. It
is also important to subject new tyres to a short running-in period. It is
recomnended therefore that hard cornering or sustained speeds of over 90 m.p.h.
(145 k.p.h.) should not be undertaken for at least the first 500 miles (800 km.).
This recCllllTlendation does not apply to Dunlop Weathennaster tyres where the
maximwn speeds recommended above should be noted.
Continued ....
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LA-NE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/ECk 12 .. s. 10 R
= ROLlS~ROYCE SILVER SHADOW
No. SY/R26
- 3 -
It is also important when fitting replacanent tyres, that only a

ty~e fitting lubricant reCOITUllended or marketed by one of the Rolls-Royce
approved tyre manufacturers be used. Under no circumstances should the
tyre be lubricated with soft or liquid soap, since these liquids contain
quantities of caustic potash which has the effect of causing the paint to
strip and subsequently corrosion to take place.
The correct tyre pressures for all recofllJlended tyres listed on page
1, remain unchanged and are as follows:
Cars other than Long Wheelbase
28 lb/sq.in. (1,97 kg/sq.on.) Front and Rear
Set when cold for nonnal and fast motoring.
Long Wheelbase Cars
28 lb/sq.in. {1,97 kg/sq.an.) Front

Both pressures set wtien cold for nonnal and fast motoring.
ROLLS-ROYC£ LIMITED, PVM 'S LANE, CREW£. ENGLAND
CHAPTER
BP/ECk. 12.8. 70 R
Ro/ls-Royce Si/vet Shadow ft Bentley T Seties Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributors Section R
and Retailers ~ulletin No S¥/R27
Page No 1
Date 25.1.71.
CATEGORY C
SPIGOTTED RQ\D WHEELS
APPLIC4.BLE TO
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars produced after·
and including the following Car Serial Numbers.
SRH 8387 SRX 9075 OOX 8421 LRX 9113
DESCRIPTION
As described in Service Bulletin SY/R.21, current production cars are

fitted with road wheels that are located on to the hubs by spigots.
As these wheels are a close fit on the hub spigot it is possible that
when fitting a wheel onto the spigot the paint will be r61loved from
the machined bore of the wheel. If the paint is removed, surface
corrosion will occur and this corrosion may increase the tightness of
the wheel onto the hub, thereby .impeding subsequent removal.
To prevent this, the spigotted portion of the hub is lightly

smeared with grease before the wheel is fitted and it is recommended
that this practice is followed in service to ensure that the wheels
can aJ-ways be r61loved easily.
BP/F.Ck
I"' (C) Rolls-Rovce limited 1971

CHAPTER S
BODY
No. SY/S1
FOR INFORMATirn
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FI TIING I BRITAX' INERTIA REEL

SAFETY BELTS
APPLlCABLl:. TO:
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow Standard Saloons

Rolls~Royce Silver Shadow Long Wheelbase Saloons (without division)
Bentley T Ser.ies Standard Saloons
Bentley T Series Long Wheelbase Saloons (without division)
DESCRIPTION
1
BRITAX' inertia reel safety belts are designed to conform to British Standards
Specification 3254:1960. Tiley are intended solely for fixing to cars with
METAL floors and must not be attached to a wooden floor or to car seats.
The instructions given in this Bulletin are intended for the fitting of
seat belts to the front seats only of the above mentioned cars.
The belts are supplied together with all necessary brackets etc., in kit
form under the following part numbers.
Part No. RH 2399 Bentley T

Part No. RH 24-(X) - Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow
The belts can be supplied in the following colours - Grey, Red, Green,
Fawn or Black.
A list of the parts supplied in the above mentioned kits is contained in

Spares Information Sheet No. 4.N.45.
PROCEDURE
Remove the front seats as described in Section S4 of the Workshop Manual.
Remove the floor carpeting and underfelt.
Working to the dimensions given in Figure 1, mark out the section of sill
to be removed, also the holes to be drilled. Note that these dimensions are
taken from the centre of the existing safety belt mounting point ( see 2, Fig. 1 ) •
C >ntj nu Pd •••
Arr/Pen 27 .10.66. SECTION S

Printed In England
- 2 - No.SY/S1
Fig. t Inner sill L.H. - Drilling dimensions

(R.H. symnetrically opposite)
1 To front of car C 2.312 in. (5,870 en.)

2 Original seat belt mounting point D 4.625 in. (11,747 en.)
3 Ten holes 0.4062 in. dia. (10,32 IMl.) E 6.250 in. (15,875 an.)
4' Hole for countersunk headed screw F 2.875 in. (7,350 cm.)
A 1.250 in. (3,175 en.) G 3.500 in. (8,890 en.)
B 0.312 in. (7 ,90 mn.) H 5.625 in. (14,290 cm.)
Continued •••
Arr/Pen 27.10.66. SECTION s

Printed In Eniland
- 3 - No. SY/S1
Drill a series of small holes just inside the scribed lines of the
marked out section then join these holes using a small file or saw until the
section is free; discard the section.
Carefully flle the section to its final shape. Using a 0.4062 in.
(10,32 mm.) diameter drill, drill the ten holes surrounding the section cut
into the sill.
Fig.2 Bottom sill drilling dimensions
A 7. 1875 in. (18,256 cm.)

B 1 .875 in. (3,762 cm.)
C 1.720 in. (3,865 cm.)
D 1.975 in. (5,016 cm.)
E 3.344 in. (8,494 cm.)
Continued •••
ROLLS ... ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
Arr/Pen 27.10.66. SECTION s

Printed In England
. .
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULLETIN..·',
Ho. SY/Sl
- 4 -
Remove any swarf and filings from inside the sill, then to prevent
rusting, coat any bare metal with zinc rich primer.
Fit the backing plates Part Nos. UB.14677 and UR.15025 to the under-
side of the floor, then align the spot welded nuts on the backing plates with
the ten holes in the floor. A 'pop 1 rivet fitted at either end of each
backing plate will hold then to the floor to facilitate assembly.
--
_.....5
0 I
7
j 6
Fig.3 Section through sill (inertia reel installed)
A To centre-line of car 4 Flange finisher

1 Door pillar side 5 Plastic bag
2 Seat belt 6 Support beam
3 Belt guide brackets 7 Inertia reel unit
Continued •••
ROLLS •ROYCE LI MITEO, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
~rr/Pen 21 .1 o.66. SECTIO N s

Printed In England
.. '
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULLETIN· '
No.SY/S1
- 5 -
To facilitate drilling, lower the torque tubes, then drill four holes in
the underside of each sill (see Fig.2). Note that the centres of the holes
have been taken from the centre of the front torque tube mounting.
Fit the seat belt into the plastic bag Part No. UB.14995 with the sealed
end of the bag at the bottom (see Fig.3).
Fit the support beam Part No. UB.13793 and secure it to the belt unit
with set=crews UA.154/Z and washers UA.1252/Z passing the bolts through the
plastic bag.
Note The belt unit must be fitted so that the belt 'runs-off' on the
side of the roller nearest to the outside of the car (see Fig.3).
Fig.4 Seat belts installed

Continued •••
R OLLS -ROYCE LI M ITED, PYM'S LAN E , CRE W E, ENGLAND
Arr/Pen 27 .10.66. SECTIO N s

Printed In Engl1nd
- 6 - No. SY/Sl
The open end of the plastic bag should be pulled out of the sill and
spread around the aperture so that when the cover plates Part No. UB .14607
and UB.14608 are fitted (left-hand and right-hanct respectively) they will
clamp the bag to the floor and seal off the sill to the car interior (see
Fig. 3).
Thread the safety belt into the cover plate ensuring that when the plate
is fitted to the car and the belt has no twist, the belt 'runs-off' on the
side of the roller nearest to the outside of the car.
Fit the flange finisher Part No. UB.14665 to the door pillar side of the
top plate (see Fig.3).
Using two Philips screws UA.7371/Z, fit and secure the safety belt
guides Part No. UB.14609 to the top plate.
Using nine setscrews UA .103/Z and washers UA .1251/Z fit and secure the
cover plate to the sill. Fit a countersunk headed screw to the hole marked
1
'4 in Figure 1.
Trim the edges of the plastic bag so that the bag is not visible around
the cover plate.
Ensure that the belt is free from twists then fit the seat belt anchorage
bracket to the top cover plate; position the belt run as shown in Figure 4.
There are three distance pieces supplied in the kit; two of equal
thickness and one thicker.
The thicker distance piece should be fitted to the door pillar mounting.
Remove the chrome headed setscrew from the door pillar then fit the
remaining belt support bracket. The assembly of the washers etc. is clearly
illustrated in the Workshop Manual TSD 2205 - Chapter S - Figure S35.
Remove the chrome headed setscrew from the transmission tunnel, then
using the setscrew, fit the short seat belt to the tunnel.
Refit the carpets. It will be necessary to cut slots in the carpet and
to cut the carpets away from the centre door pillar in order to allow free
movement of the belt (see Fig.4).
Continued •••
Arr/Pen 27.t0.66. SECTION s

Printed In Enaland
. , .. ,,
ROLLS-ROYCE S II.VER SHADOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVICE BULLETIN:' ' I•
No. SY/S1
- 7 -
To prevent fraying after cutting the carpets, the edges should be bound
with leat.11.er.
Fit the seats following the instructions given in the Workshop Manual
TSD 2205 - Section S4.
After fitting, the belts should be tested as follows.
INERTIA REEL BELTS - TO CHECK OPERA.Tl(X\I
Select an open stretch of road then when the road is free from any potential
danger accelerate the car to 15 m.p.h. Check the operation of the belts by
braking sharply from this speed.
Note The belts should be sensitive to fierce car braking and hard
cornering. Note that the belts should not lock by pulling or
jerking the straps by hand pressure.
ROLLS -ROYCE LI M ITED, PYM'S LAN E , CREWE, ENGLAN D
Arr/Pen 27.10.66. SECTI ON s

Printed In En,land
,S ERVICE BULLETIN : -.)
No. SY/S2
FOR INFORMATION
FRONT VENI'ILA TOR REAR VIEW MIRROR
APPLICABLE TO:

Bentley T Series
DESCRIPTION
~e have received requests for details of fitting a front ventilator rear view
mirror to cars in service and the purpose of this Bulletin is to provide
Retailers with sufficient information to carry out the necessary work.
PROCEDURE
1. Disconnect the battery which is situated in the left-hand side of the

luggage compartment.
2. Dismantle the driver's door in accordance with Chapter S, Section S2 of

the Workshop Manual (T.S.D. 2205) until the black dust cloth is removed.
3. N:>te the position of the lock-nut on the sill control rod. Slacken the
nut, then unscrew and withdraw the control rod.
4. Remove the setscrews securing the waist rail finisher and carefully
withdraw the finisher assembly.
5. Reroove the existing striker plate and gently ease out the rubber vent
seal in the vicinity of the lower rear corner.
6. Unscrew the small nut, remove the washer and bolt which passes through
the base of the channel. Collect the frame to waist connector.
7. Drill out and remove the rear hanl( bush (see Fig.1).
Continued •.
R OLLS -ROYCE LI M ITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, E N GLAN D
Ar.r:/JA 13.12.66. SECTIO N s

Printed In England
- 2 - No. SY/S2
6-----1 0
I I I I
I LI I
._ _ - I
Fig.1 Method of fitting a front ventilator rear

view mirror
1 ALLEN SCREWS 4 TAPPIN, BLOCK.

2 NEW S'IRIKER PLATE 5 Wil.'IDCW CHANNEL
3 HANK BUSH TO BE REMOVED 6 FRAME TO WAIST CONNECTOR
Continued •••
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED. PYM'S LANE, CREWE. ENGLAND
Arr/JA 13.12.66. SECTION s

Printed In England
- 3 - No. SY/S2
8. Position the tapping block in the channel and refit the frarrc to waist
connector; the two assemblies are located by a new setscrew which passes
through the connector and channel frarre and screws into the front (under-
side) of the tapping block. ( see Fig. 1).
9. Fit the new striker plate securing it with the two countersunk screws.
The front screw fits into the original hank bush, while the rear one
passes through the hole in the vent frame and screws into the tapping
blcck.
10. Using the striker plate as a guide, drill through the inner section of
the window frame into the hole through the tapping block; this will then
provide a suitable guide for drilling the outer section of the frame.
Repeat the operation for the second hole.
11 • Any rough edges around the two holes should now be removed and the
convlete area cleaned with the aid of compressed air.
12. Offer the mirror into position and secure with the two Allen screws
provided.
13. Defore replacing the rubber vent seal, it will be necessary to cut away
small sections along the base; this is to allow the seal to seat properly
in the channel and around the tapping block. The rubber vent seal should
then be glued into the channel using a small quantity of Bostik No. 2402
Parts 1 and 2.
14. When refitting the waist rail finisher it will be necessary to cut two
recesses in the underside to accommodate the heads of the Allen screws.
To assemble the remainder of the door reverse the p~ocedure given for
dismantling in Chapter S, Section S2 of the Workshop Manual (T.S.D. 2205).
Finally, connect the battery.
M<\TERIAL REQUIRED
Part No. Description

RH 2407 Rear view mirror kit - L. I-I. door - flat glass
RH 2408 Rear view mirror kit L.H. door - convex glass
ru-1 2409 Rear view mirror kit R.H. door flat glass
RH 2410 Rear view mirror kit R.H. door - convex glass
ROLLS -ROYCE LI M ITED, PYM'S LANE, CRE WE , ENGLAN D
Arr/JA 13.12.66. SECTIO N s

Printed tn Enalancl
ROLLS-ROYCE SI LVEA SHADOW
No. SY/S3
FOR INFORMATICN
PAIN'IWOOK MAINTENANCE
APPLICABLE TO:
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series Standard and Coachbuilt cars
INTilODUCTION
The Body and Coachwork Ch.apter of the 0,<mer 's Handbook has recently been
revised to include the latest information on the care and maintenance of car
paintwork.
The object of this Bulletin is to acquaint Retailers with the need for
this change and to supply information which will enable them to understand,
perhaps more fully, what happens to the paintwork of the cars under nonnal
service conditions.
GENERAL INFORI\IIATION
The paint which is used on all Rolls-Royce and Bentley cars is of the highest
quality, but even so it is unable to withstand •weathering' indefinitely with-
out sorre care and attention.
Weathering occurs grudually and can be detected by a slight surface film

(chalking) which results in a reduction of the gloss and a tendency to show
rain spot marks. This can be overcome and the paintwork restored to its
original condition by suitable maintenance polishing.
Paintwork should be washed with clean cold water. Mud and dirt 1Tn.1st not
be reimved when dry. Apply water with a sponge and remove with a chamois
leather. Automatic car washes 2re not recommended as, due to the detergents
and rrethods used, the paintwork. may become stained or lightly scratched.
The thermo-plastic types of nitrocellulose lacquers which are used on

Rolls-Royce and Bentley cars readily respond to friction polishing, due to
the surface flow encouraged by the heat which is generated during the polishing
Continued •••
JWn/CB/CS 11.5.67. SECTION s

Printed In England
ROLLS-ROYCE SILVER SHA.DOW
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SE:R·VICE BULLETIN ·
- 2 - No. SY/S3
process. 1he period of time during which the restored paintwork will remain
in good condition will very according to the type of exposure to which it is
subjected. If the paintwork is polished every three months as suggested in
the Ownerts Handbook it should be sufficient for the average British climate.
Under more severe conditions such as are encountered overseas, and even places
in the British Isles which enjoy more than average sunshine, more frequent
polishing may be necessary.
Note Polishing should not be carried out in a dusty~ gritty atmosphere.

Grit, which is present in an atmosphere such as may be found out-
doors where the ground surface is loose, is harder than the sur-
face of the paint, anct scratching will result.
If regular polishing is not carried out in the manner described in the

owner's Handbook, the original gloss will become obscured and 'rain spot ting'
may reach objectionable proportions. Therefore, Owners should be encouraged
to make sure that friction emuJ.sion polishing is carried out as soon as the
gloss begins to fade, and not wait until the paintwork has become too dull
and dirty.
M:!rely polishing with a solid wax type of polish is not sufficient, and
an excessive build-up of wax polish can induce its own type of 'rain spotting'
or discolouration.
A slight discolouration appenring on the polishing cloth when using a

friction emulsion polish should cause no concern. It is a weathered product
of the paint and is no longer an essential part of the paint film.
The Formula 2 polish and FonTDJla 3 sealer which are supplied with each
car should be used regularly to enable the initial high quality of finish to
be maintained.
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED. PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
JWn/CB/CS 11.5.67. SECTION s

Printed In En,fand
No. SY/S4
CATF.GORY C
BODY DRAIN HOLES
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCRIPTION
The car body is provided with a number of drain holes to cater for water drain-
age from the body box members. Should any of these drain holes become blocked
by road dirt or underseal it is possible that water may become trapped ins1oe
the box members causing a corrosion hazard, particularly when salt has been used
on the roads.
The purpose of this Service Bulletin is, therefore, to advise Retailers and
Service Personnel of tl1e location of these drain holes and of the need to ensure
that they remain free from obstruction,
An inspection and cleaning operation should be done Annually preferably

immediately before Winter, as this will ensure that the body drainage system
will cope with the harsher weather and road conditions. The drain holes can
be cleaned with a suitable hard-bristled brush, taking care not to damage the
surrounding paint'WOrk and undersealing,
DR:!'._\IN HOLE LOCATION
The following text, .in conjunction with the illustration and insets is intended
to assist in locating the drain holes. The figures preceding the text refer
to those on the illustration and insets.
(1) This drain hole is located on the lower edge of the body front sill
irrunediately below the bolt which secures the Panhard rod.
(2) The left-hand drain hole of the two is to be found adjacent to the front
inner corner of the exhaust silencer box, the other, located opposite, is
obscured by the brake actuation box shield.
Continued •••
SB/ECk 22.8.67. SECTION s

t>rlm:ed In Enaland
- 2 - Ho. SY/S4
Fig.1 Location of body drain holes

Continued •••
ROLLS -ROYCE LIMITED, PYM•s LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
SB/ECk 22.8.67. SECTION S

Printed In Enaland
- 3 - No. SY/S4
(3) The central body cross-member is drained by two holes. The left-hand
hole is located immediately below the exhaust flexible ioountingt the
right-hand hole being obscured by one of the fuel pump suppressors.
(4} There are two drain holes on the lower edges of the body sill outer panels
some 3 in. (7,62 cm.) forward of the rear wheel arches.
(S) These drain holes are located in the lower edges of the outer tonneau
panel 3 in. (7 ,62 cm.) rearward of the rear wheel arches.
(6) Locate the point at which the spare \'kleel carrier operating tube locates
in the boot floor, the drain hole is adjacent to this point on the centre
line of the body.
(7) These two drain holes are located illUllediately above the outer rear corners
of the final drive cross-member.
(8) These two drain holes are located on the lower edges of the body sill
outer panels, 12 in. (30t5 cm.) rearward of the body jacking flaps.
(9) These two drain holes are located on the body side ~mber, sane 24 in.
{61 cm. ) forward of the rea·r wheel arches.
(10) 'fllese t'Ml drain holes are located on the body sill outer panelst adjacent
tc two drain holes shown in position 11.
(11) These two drain holes are located on the body side member 14 in. (35.6 cm.)
rearward of the front sub-frame rear mounting points.
(12) These are twc. circular drain holes to be found adjacent to the top of the
front sub-frame rear mounting points.
ROLLS -ROYCE LI Ml TEO, PYM•s LANE, CREWE, E NG LAND
SECTION
SB/ECk 22.8.67. s
Printed Ir, EnglMd
No. SY/55
CATOOORY C
INSTR.UCTICNS FOR FIXIOO LmGAGE BOOT LID SEAL
APPLICABLE TO:

Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow Long Wheelbase Saloons .
Bentley T Series Standard Saloons
Bentley T Series Long Wheelbase Saloons
James Yotmg 2-Door Conversion Saloons
The new seal which is made of expanded neoprene is designed to ~it to the
body instead of the luggage boot lid.
\ !
Fig.1 Trunk door seal in position
1 OUTER SKJN - BODY

2 OUTER SKIN - TRUNK J)()(ll
3 OLD SF.AL GAP
4 NEW SF.AL
Continued •••
ROLLS •ROYCE LI M ,TED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, E NG LAND
2.11.67 SECTI ON s
Printed In E"aland
- 2 - No. SY/SS
Issue 2
II
i'I
I
I
,- A
,---
1'1'1
IY
-- -- .- ________ -=- - ~
VY
H780
fig.2 Luggage boot seal drain holes

A 18.125 IN. TO 18.37 IN.
B 1.297 IN. TO 1.327 IN.
C 0.101 IN. DIA. TO 0.104 IN. DIA.
D 0.203 IN. TO 0.218 IN.
E 0.375 IN. DIA. TO 0.390 IN. DIA.
PROCEDURE
The bonding areas of the rubber and metal should be thoroughly cleaned with
Bostik cleaner 6(()1 and allowed to stand for one hour, Boscolite primer 9252
should then be applied to the metal only and allowed to stand for one hour.
Boscornprene cement 2402 part 1 and 2 should then be applied to the rubber
and metal surface and allowed to dry for between 5 and 15 minutes before
fixing finnly .in position (see Fig. 1); the luggage boot lid should then
remain open for a rninimwn of 12 hours.
Great care should be taken not to get the primer or cement onto the
paintwork.
Two drain holes 0.37S in. dia. should be drilled approximately

18.125 in. on either side of the centre line at the rear of the car (see
Fig. 2). A cover plate UB.15696 should then be fitted over each hole and
secured with a sheet metal screw UA.7352/Z.
The two buffers UB.12895 on the luggage boot lid will no longer be
required.
Re-issued to amend procedure
ROLLS .,.ROYCE LIM I TED. PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
12.12,.67. SECTION s
.Printed fn England
No. SY/SS .
(Add. 1)
CATffiORY C
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FIXING LUJGAGE BOOT LID SEAL
APPLICABLE 10:

Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow Long Wheelbase Saloons
Bentley T Series Standard Saloons
Bentley T Series Long Wheelbase Saloons
James Young 2-Door Conversion Saloons
The piece numbers of the I3ostik items mentioned in the above Service Bulletin
and. the quantities in which they are available are as follows~
Part No.
RH 8097 Boscoprene cement No. 2402 parts 1 and 2 ~pt.tins

RH 8098 BoscoJ.ite pr.imer No. 9252 J2 pt. tins
RH 8099 Bost.i.k cleaner No, 6001 quart containers
Q/KH 1 • 2 .. 6-8@' SECTION s

Printed In Enslancl
No. SY/S6
CATEGORY C
PAINTWORK SPECIFICATIONS
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T series cars
DESCRIPTION
- --- - -
This Service Bulletin is issued to advise that before any rectification work
is done to the paintwork, the original paintwork specification of the car must
be checked. This is to ensure that the correct paints and thinners are used.
The paintwork specification is included in the car handbook on the page

preceding the Index.
ROLLS -ROYCE LI M ITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, E NG LAN D
SECTIO N
SB/ECk 22.2.68 s
Printed In Eniland
ROLLS-ROYCE S•LVER SHADOW
'SERVICE·..!B·I JLtETIN·
• - - .J : . . .
• • • ,· ~.J -
No. SY/S7
CATEGORY C
PAINT THI~ERS
-APPLICABLE
---TO:
DESCRIPTION
Each paint manufacturer develops thinners to suit the individual requirements

of the finishes produced. It is therefore essential that the correct amount
of the specified thinners is used with each paint.
This is important 1 as a poor finish may result if the correct thinner

is not used.
ROLLS- ROYCE l lMITEO, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/ECk Z2. 2.68 s
SERVICE BULLETIN
NoSY/S8
CATEGORY C
'MIINIGHT BLUE' PAINTI:>:
APPLICABLE 'IO:
DESCRIPTICN
The purpose of this Service Bulletin is to inform Distributors, Retailers and

Service Personnel that I.C.I. 'Midnight Blue' paint is no longer available, and
that Mason•s 'Midnight Blue' and Thornley and Knight's 'Midnight Blue' should
be used for any paintwork rectification in Service.
Mason's 'Midnight Blue' can be used for complete resprays of cars

origina1-1y finished with the r.C:.l. paint providing the existing finish is
prepared correctly. It should not be used on the I.C.I. paint for touching
in or local repair purposes, due to differences in colour.
Thornley and Knight's 1Midnight Blue' paint should only be used for
touching in chip marks on cars finished with the I.C.I. paint.
It is not the policy of Rolls-Royce Limited to supply finishes for any

cars other than Standard Steel Saloons. For Coachbuilt cars, enquiries should
be made to the appropriate Coachbuilder.
Code and Part Numbers
Material Part Number Use
Mason•s 'Midnight Blue' Paint LB 239/5 951cxx» Respray only

Mason's Thinner for the above LB 308/9 9500937
Continued •••
CHAPTER
SB,IF.cK 14.3.68 s
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVIC.E BULLETIN
- 2 - No.sy/ S8
Material Code Part Number Use
Thornley and Knight's

'Midni ght Blue ' Pain t 1V 3765 RH 2421 Touch-in only
Thornley and Knight's
Thinner for the above 'Tekavite' RH 8047
ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE , CREWE, ENGLAND
CHAPTER
SB/ ECK 14. 3.68 s
SERVICE BULLETIN
No. SY/S10
Circulation - All Reta'ilers
CATEGORY C
WING MIRRORS
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of this Service Bulletin is to infonn Service Personnel of the

easiest method of fitting wing mirrors to the above cars.
PROCEDURE
One problem in fitting wing mirrors is the difficulty in gaining access to the
underside of the wing, usually necessitating the removal of the underwing
shield. This can be overcome by drilling a 0.250 in. (6,40 mm.) diameter
hole in the wing at the required mirror mounting point, using a drill of
sufficient length to pierce the underwing shield also.
~ith the aid of tank cutters, holes of the required sizes can then be
cut in the wing and the underwing shield. The latter hole should be large
enough to enable the mirror clamping nut held in a suitable socket spanner to
pass through the underwing shield and be fitted to the stem of the mirror.
After fitting and aligning the mirror the hole in the underwing shield
should be sealed using a blanking plate, Rolls-Royce part number UB 14316 and
eight screws, Rolls-Royce part number UA 8812/Z. It is most important that
an effective seal is achieved between the shield and the blanking plate and a
suitable sealing compound such as 'Bostik No. 771' or 'Seeiastik 1 should be
applied to the joint faces. When the plate is fitted a coat of undersea!
should be applied to the area surrounding the plate.

SB/Eck 9.5.68. $
CHAPTER
SERVICE BULLETIN
No. SY/S11
and Retailers
CATEGORY C
PAINTWORK RECTIFICATION -
THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM SEALS
APPLICABLE TO:
DESCRIPTION
During paintwork rectification it may be necessary to place the car in a drying
oven operating at high temperatures.
This Service Bulletin has been issued to advise that at these temperatures,
with the air conditioning unit flaps in the fully open or fully closed positions,
the various seals in the A.C.U. system may adopt a pennanent 'set' thereby
~ffecting their sealing ability. Also, it may cause the seals to stick to the
flaps J'le.SUlting in undue strain on the actuators and stressing of the flaps when
the system is next operated.
In order to prevent these problems arising, before placing the car in ,
a drying oven, the following procedures should be carried out.
PROCEOORE
1. With the ignition switched on, pull the upper and lower heater switch
controls out two notches.
2. Turn the upper and lower heater switch controls clockwise two notches.
3. Fully open the flaps in the two circular outlets on the facia by
withdrawing the knobs adjacent to each outlet.
4. Fully open the rectangular flap in the centre of the facia, or front
console as applicable.
Continued •••
CHAPTER
SB/ECk 17.4.69 s
·SER.V ICE BULLETIN
- - . . . -
No. SY/Sl 1
- 2 -
5. Fully open the flap in the driver's side scuttle wall, also the flap in
the passenger's side scuttle wall on some early cars, by withdrawing
the control knob on the facia.
Note When carrying out items 1 and 2 on Long Wheelbase cars

fitted with a centre division the heater change-over
switch on the front console should be in the position
marked I FRONT'.
ROLLS ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

4
CHAPTER
SB/Eck 17 .4.69 s
- ,~ ._ . - - ......... ..,,...,. .
.SE~~~~: _,U·L~_E!IN
No. SY/Sl 2
and Retailers
CATEGORY C
HEAD RAIL CATCHES OF CONVERTIBLE CAR'S
APPLICABLE TO:
All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series Convertible ca rs with
Coachwork by H.J. Mulliner, Park Ward, produced pd or to car serial number
CR.X 6596.
DESCRIPTION
Complaints of wind noise, rattles or rain leaks on the above Convertible cars
may stem from the wood screws, which secure the safety catches of the folding
hood to the hood head rail, coming loose after a period in serv.i.ce. An
effective and pennanent cure for this has been devised and should be applied
in such cases of complaint.
The modification entails replacing the upper wood screw in each head
rail catch with a 2 B.A. screw, screwed into a brass insert fitted in the head
rail, and replacing the lower wood screws with longer, 1.50 in. (38,1 mm.)
wood screws.
PROCEDURE
t. Lower the hood.

2. Remove the three wood screws holding each safety catch to the hood head
rail and remove the catch.
3. Remove any packing pieces which may be fitted under the catch.
4. On cars built to American Federal Safety Standard Requirements, the head

rail padding must also be rEmovcd by taking out the screws holding it in
position.
5. Using the two lower wood screws as attachments, fit the guide plate
provided in the modification kit to the head rail.
Continued •••
CHAPTER
BP/JC 22.8.69 s
AND BENTLEY T SERIES SERVI.C.E BULLETIN
No.SY/S12
- 2 -
I
I
I
/
/
I
cJ
4 L181
FIG.1 Showing drilling dimensions and method of

fitting the brass insert
A 1.125 in. (28,57 mm.)
B 0.312 in. (7,93 mm.) diameter
C 0.109 in. (2,77 mm.) diameter
D 0.625 in. (15,87 mm.)
1 Rear face of the hood head rail
2 'Tee' spanner, engaged on the 2 B.A.
setscrew and lock-nut
3 2 B.A. setscrew and lock-nut
4 Brass insert (CBD 2904)
Continued •••
BP/JC 22.8.69 CHAPTER S

ROLLS•ROYC£ SILVER SHADOW
SER¥1-CE BULLETIN
No. SY/S12
- 3 -
6. Fit a 0.312 in. f7,93 mm.) diameter drill with a stop, and drill out
the upper centre screw hole to a depth of 1.125 in. (28,57 nun.) as
shown in Figure 1.
THIS DEPTH IS CRITICAL AND EXTREME CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO .ENSURE

THAT THE DRILL STOP IS FITIED CORRECTLY.
Note As only 0.125 in. (3,2 JIUll.) of wood remains between the
bottom of the ho.le and the outside oft.he hood after
drilling, it is recormnended that this operation be
carried out using a hand drilJ rather than an electric
once since the action of the latter tends to be too
vigorous.
7. Remove the guide plate and clean away all drill cuttings from the hole.
8. Take one of the brass inserts (CBD 2904) and ensure that the 2 B.A.
setscrew and lock-nut, fitted to the end opposite the lead-in {see
Fig. 1), is well engaged with the threads in the insert.
9. Smear the buttress thread of the insert with a suitable lubricant

such as Molytone 265.
10. Using a 'Tee' spanner, engaged with the lock-nut rather than the head
of the setscrew ( see Fig. 1), sc:rew the insert squarely into the
0.312 in. (7,93 rmn.) diameter hole drilled out in the head rail until it
is flush with the rear face of the head rail.
11. Remove the setscrew and lock-nut.
12. Dr ill out the remaining two screw holes for each head rail catch with a
0.109 in. (2, 77 JIUll.) diameter drill to a depth of 0.625 in~ ( 15,87 mm.)
(see Fig. t).
13. Clean away all drill cuttings which may be remaining.
14. On cars built to American Federal Safety ~tandard Requirements~ fit

the head rail padding.
Continued •••
BP/JC 22.8.69 CHAPTER S

AND BENTLEY T SERIES I
SERMtC'E BULLETIN
! ');:;_''
No.SY/S12
- 4 -
15. Fit the head rail safety catches, and distance pieces where applicable,
using chrome plated 2 B.A. raised head screws in the top holes and
1.50 in. (38,1 mm.) long, chrane plated wood screws in the lower holes.
16. Tighten all the screws finnly and evenly.
MATERIAL REQUIRED
One Modification Kit Number 10, per car.
22.8.69
CHAPTER s
BP/JC
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow Et Bentley TSeries Service Bulletin
Circulation All Dis tr lbutors Section s
and Retailers Bulletin No SY/S 1 3
Page No t
Date 6•. 1. 71.
C<\TEGORY C
FRONT SEA.T ASSEMBLIES
All Rolls~oyce Silver Shadow and Bentley T Series cars produced prior
to Car Serial Number SRX 9618.
DESCRIPTION:
The mechanism which provides adjustment of the front seat bases has
been modified to incorporate a fulcrum bracket which attaches the
rearmost adjusting clutch directly to the floor of the car.
Complete seat assemblies incorporating the new mechanism will

eventually be supplied for all replacanent purposes. The mechanism
can be fitted to cars produced prior to Car Serial Number SRX 9618
but this will necessitate fi.tting two tapping plates for each seat
on the underside of the floor panel and ranoving a small portion of
the front carpet.
The fulcrum bracket has two alternative mounting holes to
increase the range of seat positions available. When fitting a new
seat mechanism to an early car a similar range of seat positions will
be available if the forward pair of mounting holes are used as shown
in Figure 1. If the rear pair of holes are used in the range of seat
positions will be moved forward by approximately 2 in. (5,08 cm.).
However, unless the customer requests otherwise it is recommended that
the front pair of holes are used.
It should be noted that old and new seat frames or seat

mechanisms are not individually interchangeable and before ordering
replacanent parts, Spares Information Sheet 4.N.94 should first be
read.
PROCEllJRE:
1. Place the seat assembly in position on the mounting brackets.
2. Locate the two seat runner mounting holes which are exposed and
place a KB 3906 washer between each seat runner and the mounting
hole.
3. Using two RH 8404 screws fasten the two seat runner ends down.
4. Connect the plug.and socket of the seat loom.
BP/ECk
© Rolls· Royce Limited 1971

Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow ff Bentley TSefles Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributors Section s
and Retailers ~ulletin No SY/S13
Page No 2
Date 6 . t • 71 .
5. Operate the seat switch such tha t the r ear clutch nut is at the
fo rward end of its travel on the worm shaft.
6. Mov e t he seat mechanism rearwards on its runners until the front

edge of the lowe r seat runner is exposed by the upper runner to
a distance of 2.0 in . ( S,08 cm.). The f ulcrum br acket wi ll now be
correctly positioned on lhe floor.
7. Remove all t r a ces of underfelt or. fore ign matter from the area
where the fulc rum bracket is t o be placed tnen ensure that the
rear clutch fulcrum bracket is located s quarely on the f loor
panel.
8. Mark out the posi tion of the four chosen mounting holes on t he
fl oor.
9. Renove the seat assembly from the car .
1o. Dt'ill four O. 281 in . ( 7, 14 mm.) holes in the positions previously

marke d on the f loor .
11 • Remove all traces of und erseal from the underside of the floor
adjacent to the forward pair of holes.
12. Place a tapping plate (RH 2524) in posi t.ion on the unders ide of
the f loor in line wi th the t wo forward hol es a nd secure in position
with t wo self-tapping s crews CS 1725, ensu r ing that t hey will not
obs truct the fulcrum bracket when in place .
13. As t he two reannost holes a re drilled into a s eal ed box section,

a further la rger hole should be drilled to give access for the
tapping plate . This access hole should be 1 in. (25 3 4 rron.)
in diame ter and should be drilled in t he flat section of t he
floor a djacen t to the t wo mounting holes a nd midway between
them.
14-. Drill a 0.1 25 in. (3,2 nnn.) hol e in the cent r e of the tapping
plate and threa d a l ength of wi re through the pla te. It will
now be possible to guide the plate through the access hole and
line i t up with the moun ting holes in the floor.
15. Te~porarily hold the tapping plate to the flo or wi th two 0 .2 50 in.
(6 , 35 nun. ) bol ts and then s ecure it using two CS 31 725 self- tapping
screws, ensuring t hat t hese wi ll not obstruct the ful c rum bracket
when in place.
BP/ECk
(t') Rolls-Royce l imited 1971
Rolls-Royce SJ/ver Shadow uBentley TSe/les Service Bulletin
and Retailers Bulletin No SY/S 13
Page No 3
Date 6. 1. 71
1 2
4 6 5 3 M 126
Figure 1 Seat in reannost position
1 Rear clutch unit

2 Worm shaft
3 Fulcrum bracket
4 These two holes (if used) place the seat in the forward position
S Tapping plates on underside of floor
6 These two holes (if used) place the seat in the rearmost position
BP/ECk
"'00
00 c<'l Rolls-Rovce Limited 1971
Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow fl Bentley TSeries Service Bulletin
Page No4
Date 6. 1 • 71
16. Remove the two bolts and the length of wire and seal the access
hole using a UG 12442 grommet and a suitable sealing compound.
17. Place a KB 3906 washer on top.of each of the seat mounting brackets,
place the seat assembly in position and secure using RH 8404 screws.
, 1 8 .. Using four o. 250 in. ( 6, 3 5 mm.) bolts and plain washer~ secure
the rear clutch fulcrum bracket to the tapping plates in the floor.
1 9. Apply undersea! to the forward tapping plate and the adjacent area
of the floor.
20. Lay the front carpet into the car and fasten down as far as possible.
Mark out the area at the rear end of the carpet which is obstructed
by t he fulcrum bracket and carefully remove the required piece.
21. Bind the cut edges with leather or binding tape and fit the front
carpet.
-0
C:
"'
O> PARTS RE.Ql'I.RED FOR EACH S&\T:
C:
UJ
.!:
"O C~ONENT PART NO, NO. ROOUIRED
l!:l
.!:
0: Tapping plate RH 2524 2
Screw-seat runners RH 8404 4
Washer-seat runners KB 3906 4
Bolts-fulcrum bracket UA 103/.l 4
Washers UA 1251 4
Screws-self-tapping cs 31725 4
GrOITDllet UG 12442 1
TIME AL.l..OVFD:
For replacing an older seat with a new seat having the revised mechanism -
1.8 hours.
...... BP/ ECk

c:o
.... © Rolls-Royce Limited 1971
Rolls-Royce fl Bentley Mo(Of Cars Service Bulletin
Page No 1
Date 14. s. 71
(ISSUE 2)
CATEGORY C
RETENTION OF JX)OR LOCK ROLLER
APPLICABLE TO
All Rolls-Royce Sllver Shadow and Bentley 'T' Series cars.
DESCRIPTION
The method of retaining the • Delr in' roll er on the door .lock bolt has
been changed.
The roller is now retained by a cotter pin which fits through

a hole in the end of the lock bolt, as shown in Figure 1. A plain
washer (part number UB 19027) is fitted between t.he cotter pin and the
roller which has a section of the outer spigot removed to facilitate
fitting the cotter pin. Wh.en renewing a roller it is important that
a new cotter pin (part number UB 19370) is used and th.at the pin is
of the correct size.
If it is necessary to replace a roller which is nom1ally

retained by a circlip and the circlip groove has been damaged beyond
further use then the lock bolt should be drilled as described in
the following instructions and the new method of retention used.
It is also important that the cotter pin is fitted correctly

otherwise it may foul the 'Oelrin' roller and prevent roller rotation.
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the door lock from the car as described in Chapter S
Volume 3 of the Workshop Manual - TSD 2476.
2. Remove Lhe retaining circlip and the old 'Delrin' roller.
3. Carefully drill an 0.0625 in. (1,587 nun.) hole in the end of

the lock bolt. The centre of the hole should be o.0625 in.
(1,587 nnn.) from the end of the lock bolt.
4. Fit the new 'Delrin' roller and plain washer to the lock bolt.
5. Rotate the roller until the cut-out in the roller is opposite

one end of the hole in the lock bolt.
Continued •••
© Rn:I:<;- R.:i•1ce Motors Limited 1971

Page No 2
Date 14.5.71
(ISSUE 2)
6. Push the cotter pin through the hole until Lhe head abuts the
lock bolt. Bend both legs of the pin round as shown in
Figure 1.
7. Fit the door lock to the car, smearing lhe 'Dclrin' roller with
Molytone 265 grease.
1 2
M 190
Figure 1 Method of retaining 'Delrint roller
1. Cut-out in 'Delrln' roller

2. Cotter pin ends bent over
3. Washer
4. 'Delrin 1 roller
Arr/JCl/ECk
© Rolls-Royce Motors L.1m1ted 1971
Circulation United Kingdom Distributors Section s
and Retailers only Bulletin No SY/S15
PageNo 1
Date 18.8. 71
CATEGORY C
ACRYLIC PAIN'fWORK
APPLICABLE TO:
Rolls-Royce and Bentley Corniche cara only.
DE&:RIPTION
Until recently, all the above cars were painted with modified nitro-
cellulose type paint. A number of coachbuilt cars are now being
painted with Nugg~t Gold paint of the full thermal acrylic type. In
the futu~e the use of full thermal acrylic paints is likely to be
extended to embrace an increasing number of coachbuilt cars and a
larger choice of colours.
The materiai.s used with full thennal acrylic paints differs
from those used with modified nitro-cellulose paint. Therefore, if
a co3chbuilt car rinished in full thermal acrylic paintwork requires
any attention to the paintwork, it is most important that the correct
materials be used as described in this Service Bulletin.
It is imperative that non-acrylic paints. stoppers or fillers
are not used for a~ purpose on a car which has been finished with full
acrylic paint.
CO\iPOSITION OF PAINT FILM

All areas of bare metal JJU1St be thoroughly cleaned and treated with
acid etch paint.
T~e first coats should consist of Rinshed Masons Green Primer/
Surfacer number U34 AVOOl. This should be applied at a viscosity
equivalent to 24 seconds using a B4 cup, thinning as necessary,
using Rinshed Masons Primer Surfacer Thinners number L18 CVOOS.
Following this, any build-up required should be achieved with
valentines Air Drying Super Surfacer, number PG1. The viscosity
of this surfacer can be varied according to the amount of build-up
required.
As fonnerly noted, at pres0nt the only acrylic paint in use is
Nugget Gold. This paint is made by Rinshed Masons, the part number
being L58 LV004-. The paint should be thinned to an equivalent viscosity
of 18 seconds with a B4 cup, using Rinshed Masons Thinners number L18 C\1002.
Any panel damage rectification work can be completed using ICI

Grey Acrylic Repair putty, number M\12 - R901.
Arr/JCl/F.Ck
_,. C) Rolls-Royce Motors Limited 1971
Ro/ls-Royce eBentley Motor Cars Service Bulletin
Circulation All Distributors and Retailers Section S
Bulletin No SY/S 16
Page No 1 of 2
Date 29. 7 . 71
CATEOORY C
DOOR HANDLE BUTTON TRAVEL
APPLICABLE TO:
All Roll s -Royce Silver Shadow, Bentley T Series and Rolls-Royce and
Bentley Corniche cars.
DESCRIPTION
A number of complaints have recent ly been received of excessive door
handle button travel before the door lock i s operated , Compl aints of
thls nature can be caused by an incorrect amount of free travel between
the button adjusting screw and t he lever which operat es t he door lock.
In the event of a complaint being rece ived of excessive button

travel to operate t he door lock , before undertaking any further work,
the button free travel should be checked and adjusted,if necess ary,
so that t he button operates the door l ock whilst i t is more t han
0,0625 in. ( 1 ,58 mm.) from the button surround.
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the trim pad from the door as described in the

Workshop Manual - Chapter S, to gain access to t he door
handle .
2. Remove the handle and button assembly and turn the

adjusting screw until a clearance of 1/32 in . (0 ,79 nun.)
exi sts between t he head of the adjusting screw and t he
contac t l ever, as s hown in Figure 1.
Continued •••
·I... (0 Rolls- Royce Motors Limited \971

....
Rolls-Royce aBentley Motor Cits Service Bulletin
..S,rvice Bulletin issued for
Circulation A.U Distributors and Retailers Section s
Bulletin No SY/S16
Page No 2 of 2
Date 29. 7. 11
G67
Fig. 1 Handle adjusting screw settinE
l Adjusting screw
2 Push button to contact lever
A 1/32 in. (0,79 nun.)
Arr/JCl/ECk
·a If'!) Rnll~-An\lr.P. Mntnr~ I imitP.d 1Q71

TSD 2859

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TSD 2859

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TSD 2859

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

"'O

Lubrication and Maintenance D

Propeller Shaft and Universal Joints F

Fuel System and Carburetters K

Engine Cooling System L

Power Assisted Steering N

00 Wheels and Tyres R

The name Rolls Royce is a registered trademark of

All material enclosed in this publication was accwate at original publication.

TSD Publication 2859 (Vol I)

Re-printed by Elanders Hindson Limited, England.

ROLLS•ROVCE SILVER SHADOW

HIGH-SPEED ROOOHNESS AND NOISE

A brief description of the characteristics of.the noises and the necessary

All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T series cars.

This procedure also applies if an on-the-car balancing machine is

2. COOLANT FAN NOISE

UE 32842 Viscous coupling 1

ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

Flg.1 E?CPlod~d vt~

4. Remove the fan extension cone.

7. Fit the expansion tank.

ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

ROLLS··ROYCE SILVER SHAOOW

AND BENTLEY T SERIES

On a small number of cars roughness may be felt i f the car is cruised

It should be noted that this particular roughness is felt only at these

This roughness is caused by small out of balance forces in the torque

In the event of a customer complaint of high speed roughness the stiffened

ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

l. Drain the coolant system.

3. Remove the existing torus unit bottan cover.

Fig. 2 Stiffened bottom cover -

1 GUSSET ro BE REMOVED SHCMN

ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

Torque tighten the four smaller setscrews to between 16 lb.ft. and

All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T series cars.

On a small number of cars a l<M'-frequency vibration is apparent when the car is

In the cases experienced, the vibration was caused by the half-shafts

In the event of a customer complaint of vibration of this nature it should only

ROLLS-ROYCE LIMtTED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

ROAD WHEEL AND SUSPENSION ROOOHNESS

All Rolls-Royce Silver Shadow and Bentley T series cars.

A brief description of the characteristics of the noises and the

1• ROAD WHEEL VIDRA~

- ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

This procedure also applies if an on-the-car balancing machine is

In the ~ases experienced the vibration was caused by the half-shafts

ROLLS-ROYCE LIMITED, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

SB/BP 22.8.68 CHAPTER A

CARS BUILT TO COvU>LY WITH

ROLLS-ROYCE LtMITEO, PYM'S LANE, CREWE, ENGLAND

THE CAR Nl.MBERING SYSTEM

The car serial ntunber is marked on an engraved plate which is attached

The complete car serial ntunber consists of three letters followed by a

CAR SERIAL Nl.MBER

C ::: Two-door saloon with coachwork by

D = Convertible with coachwork by